Encore CX 816 3672 36112

816,3672 AND 36112
KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
FORM 2993101 E
Decrmber 1989
TECHNICAL MANUAL
INDEX
This manual supports the following ENCORE CX systems: 816.3672, and 36112. The table below shows how the manual is organized. To locate specific information, proceed as follows: first, look under the description column of the table for the system (816, 3672, 36112) and type of information youre looking for programming); then proceed to the tab indicated in the third column of the table. Locate the section own table of contents. number (first column) within the table. Each section has
Section 100 101 102 200 201 202 300 301 302 400 401 500 600 601 602 700 701 702 901 1000 I
Description ENCORE CX 816 System Description and Features ENCORE CX 3672 System Description and Features ENCORE CX 36112 System Description and Features ENCORE CX 3672 816 Operating OperatingInstructions Instructions ENCORE CX 36112 Operating Instructions 816 Technical Specifiitions 3672 Technical ENCORE CX 36112 TechnicalSpecifications ENCORE CX Design And Configuration ENCORE CX 3672 Least Cost Routing (LCR) ENCORE CX 36112 Design And Configuration General Regulatory Agency Information ENCORE CX 3672 816 Installation Installationinstructions Instructions ENCORE CX 36112 Installation ENCORE CX 3672 816 Programming ProgrammingProcedures Procedures ENCORE CX 3672 Cost Routing (LCR) ENCORE CX 36112 Programming Procedures , 816 Checkout Procedures ENCORE CX 3672 Checkout Procedures ENCORE Information ENCORE CX 3672 Service Technical Facts Record of Changes
Tab 1 1 1
3 4 4
8 6 3 7 3 8 1X
-iii-
ENCORE" CX 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
No. 1608 October 2, 1987 For Distributors Only
ENCORE' CX 3672 SOFTWARE RELEASE

A new version software, is now available for the Central Processor Board (2994401) used in the ENCORE CX 3672 key telephone system. Central Processor Boards shipped on or a f t e r O c t o b e r 1, 1987, w i l l h a v e t h e n e w software. The ENCORE CX 3672 PROM program on page 2 of this Technical Facts makes available a PROM exchange program for field upgrade will not require the of the customer database. upgrades. The enhanced version of software includes improvements in feature operations and corrects identified problems. Details of changes in feature operations will be available in an upcoming Technical Facts.
Correction Of Problems
Listed below are the most commonly reported problems corrected in version be encountered: that may
1. U N A C a l l S k i p
When using the UNA feature, . dialing system code 77. 2. C.O. Line Lockup When using the loop supervision feature, a station user could be disconnected from a second outside call if his first outside caller, which he put on system hold, hangs The second outside call would appear in-use on a l l stations and could not be re-entered. 3. Cancellation Of Last Number Redial The Last Number R e d i a l f e a t u r e m a y h a v e s t o r e d d i g i t s c a n c e l l e d by many station operations not related to a new outside call attempt, i.e. answering an incoming only every other incoming Call could be answered by
call. 4. Reset Lockup of KIB or COB Ports

Some KIB o r cards may act as if they are in the CPB reset event.
Of Service" mode after a
File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Technical Facts File and in your ENCORE CX 816 and 3672 Technical Manual, Form a n d 29931018. list it on the Record Of Changes page. Attachments:
Alan Penick
Product Line Manager
P R O M R e t u r n A u t h o r i z a t i o n Form
Page 1of 3
ENCORE CX 3672 PROM Program The ENCORE CX 3672 PROM program offers a method to obtain version to upgrade your present customers and in-house inventory. software for you
O r d e r p a r t A 6 9 2 0 2 f r o m D i s t r i b u t o r S e r v i c e s f o r t h e s o f t w a r e b y P R O M s. e t s f o r Part A69202 represents a complete set of six (6) replacement in the field. n e c e s s a r y t o c h a n g e s o f t w a r e i n o n e (1) s y s t e m . Quantities for the PROM sets will be $115.00 w i l l b e c h a r g e d f o r e a c h P R O M s e t . B y r e t u r n i n g t h e controlled by allocation. old PROM sets, using the instruction on the attached PROM return form, full credit for A new order for an additional each PROM set passinq return inspection will be issued. of PROM sets be allowed after the receipt and acceptance of the old PROM sets in San Diego. The allocation of PROM sets ensures that each distributor will receive a fair share and reduce the chance for back-order problems. It i s v e r y that sets ordered are installed quickly and old PROM sets are returned No credit will be issued for any old PROM sets received after the close of business December 31, 1987. All ENCORE CX Central Processor Boards (2994401) shipped or repaired on or after October '987, from our San Diego warehouse and repair center will have the new software A f t e r D e c e m b e r 3 1 , 1987, a l l C e n t r a l P r o c e s s o r B o a r d s (2994401) s e n t included. to the repair center will be upgraded upon request only. Normal repair charges will apply for any cards sent in after the warranty period expires.
How To Obtain Version
Sets
Please use the following procedure to obtain new PROM sets. 1. Call Distributor Services with a purchase order for part A69202. They will inform $115.00 p e r P R O M s e t w i l l b e you of the quantity that you have been allocated. charged. exchange as quickly as possible in desired CPB
2. Upon receiving the new PROM sets, (2994401) cards.
Page 2 of 3
TF1608
3. 4. 5.
Return old PROM sets immediately using the instructions on the Return Send the form along with the PROM sets. attached to this Technical Facts. A c r e d i t o f $115.00 w i l l b e i s s u e d f o r e a c h P R O M s e t r e t u r n e d Additional allocation quantities will then be allowed. inspection. Follow this procedure again if additional PROM Installing New Sets required. and passing
T h e f o l l o w i n g s t e p s s h o u l d b e f o l l o w e d w h e n e x c h a n g i n g P R O M S o n t h e C P B (2994401).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
E n s u r e s w i t c h 8 o n t h e DIP s w i t c h o f t h e C P B i s i n t h e O F F p o s i t i o n . protect the customer's data base. Turn OFF the power switch on the DC/DC converter. Using removal tabs, remove the CPB card.
This will
Place CPB card, component side up, on a well-lighted, clean non-conductive Use all normal procedures for handling static-sensitive cards. surface. Locate six mounted in chip sockets marked G2, 3, 4, 5, 8 and 9. and set aside for proper packing. remove, using proper tools, old Carefully
Remove the new PROM set from its packing tube and insert each PROM carefully in the All six PROMS are marked with a number for matching to a proper chip socket. Make certain each PROM is inserted in the proper direction (pin one to chip socket. pin one). Carefully inspect each PROM to ensure it is installed properly without any damage to pins. Insert the CPB into the system and turn the DC/DC converter on. Press the reset button on the CPB and then check for normal system operation. the packing tube and secure.
7. 8. 9.
10. P a c k o l d
It should not be necessary to re-program any customer data if all procedures are NOTE: followed carefully.
PLEASE PACKAGE SETS PROPERLY FOR RETURN
Devices received will be screened for physical damage (bent, broken pins, broken cases, etc.) and to ensure that complete sets are included prior to credit approval and reallocation for re-orders. TF1608 Page 3 of 3
.-. .
ENCORE"' CX 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM N o . 1616 October 23, 1987 For Distributors Only
ENCORE CX 3672 SOFTWARE RELEASE

We have made a change from the software version outlined in Technical Facts No. 1608 The new software version for and PROM exchange program d a t e d O c t o b e r 2 , 1987. chip sets is The purpose of this Technical Facts is to outline some changes in feature operation and activation which have been made to the ENCORE CX 3672 system. Many of these changes and improvements have been made based on requests from customers and our sales force. Others were made to correct omissions or misunderstandings in interpretation of the specification for the ENCORE CX. These changes are accomplished in Software Version on the ECX 3672 system which began shipping on all for the ECX 3672 shipped as of In addition, because of the importance of some of these features to your customers, we have made it possible to change out the on already-installed systems without having to These new sets of six (6) PROM chips can be reprogram the customer's Data Base. ordered by your operations people using part A69202, and if the old set of PROM chips. version. is returned, there will be no charge for the new See Technical Facts No. 1608 for details on the ENCORE CX 3672 PROM Exchange program. Below is a list of the most significant changes which have been implemented between Software Version (the only version which has shipped since the launch of the ECX) and the new Software Version
Attendant Recall
Recalls to an attendant will
to all attendants simultaneously.
Callback Requests
If a station has several Callback Requests on their set, they can return them in any That procedure will cancel the Callback order by dialing the selected station number. Request for the station dialed.
File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Facts File and in your ENCORE CX 816 and 3672 Technical M a n u a l , F o r m 2993101A a n d 29931018. A l s o , list it on the Record Of Changes page.
Alan Penick
Product Line Manager
Page 1 of 4
Forward a station manually forwards its calls, then newly ringing incoming (as well as C.O. lines will follow the forward. Forward for Attendant low the attendant can manually forward his/her telephone and the ringing of incoming line calls will follow the forward. However, recalls back to the attendant do not
Park Recall call recalling from a parking orbit will now ring the station parking the call for System Hold time before recalling to the attendant. Timer an additional security feature we have changed the system so that the Conference s e t i n s y s t e m m e m o r y w i l l a p p l y t o U n s u p e r v i s e d C o n f e r e n c e a n d D I S A c a l l s . It i s recommended that both options be used on all systems where the C.O. provides and when the C.O. does .not, Conference Timer b e u s e d to a long distance bill for call(s) lasting many hours. Call Pick-Up 'his feature has now been changed so that it can be used to answer a newly ringing C . O . L i n e a n d a H a n d s f r e e Intercom c a l l a s w e l l a s a t o n e r i n g i n g i n t e r c o m
Not Disturb Warning Tone
Set)
'he length of the warning tone sent to a Single Line Telephone in DND has been ( O v e r two (2) s e c o n d s o f w a r n i n g t o n e . ) engthened from 3 to 6 bursts of tone. Pairs DND Override of an Executive/Secretary pair or a Station Callback to an Executive/ pair will apply to the set programmed as the secretary of the pair.
Page 2 of 4
Flexible Button Additions Call Park Pick-Up and Station Hunt Group dialing can now be as flexible station buttons by the user. Use the established procedure and codes for programming. Last Number Redial If a s t a t i o n a n s w e r s a n I n c o m i n g C . O . l i n e r i n g i n g o n t h e i r t e l e p h o n e o r a c c e s s e s a line which has been put on Hold by the number stored in Last Number Redial memory will not now be erased. The same C.O. line will be used when Last Number Redial is activated. Second Level of Recall A call placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold or in a Call Park orbit will ring the station invoking the feature and then both that station and all attendants. Station Message Detail Recording Column Headers have been added which will print every 66 lines for SMDR applications which output directly to a printer. SMDR now provides an indication of the type of call recorded as the first entry in the "Dialed Digits" field: I Incoming Call Outgoing Call Transferred Call
System Speed Dial Restriction If a s t a t i o n i s r e s t r i c t e d f r o m a c c e s s t o and then attempts to dial a system speed dial bin, line will be disconnected. Transfer Recall The first Transfer Recall rings both the transferring and the transferred to station, and the second Transfer Recall rings both stations and all attendants. Dial and accesses a C.O. line error tone will be heard and the
Page 3 of 4
TF1616
Unsupervised Conference For a station to establish an Unsupervised Conference it is now necessary for that key and then hang up. station to press the If the station just hangs up, the outside lines will be disconnected. This is a major change from previous operation. Universal Night Previously some calls ringing in at night over UNA could not be answered by dialing This has been corrected so that any call ringing in at night can be system code 77. answered by dialing the UNA answer code of 77. We have added a provision so that UNA ringing can be automatically assigned to Loud Control 1 even if no instrument in the system is programed to ring for all lines. (Use Flash 13 command.)
We will continue our efforts it as viable and saleable in very indebted to you for to our attention, v a l u a b l e contributions to ..
to improve this product throughout its life cycle to keep the market as we possibly can. Toward that end we are in bringing problems as well as possible and we wish to take this opportunity to thank you for this effort of continuing improvement and enhancement.'
TF1616
Page 4 of 4
ENCORE'" CX 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
No. 1619
December 23, 1987 For Distributors Only ENCORE CX 3672 RELEASE 2.06 As part of our ongoing effort to improve the operation of the ENCORE CX 3672 system, have approved the release of version 2.06 software. This replaces the version 2.01 previously used. A l l o r d e r s f o r C P B c a r d 2994401 s h i p p e d a s o f (upgraded software for the CPB card) shipped as of and orders for part No. A6920. contain the version. 2.06.
The changes made in version 2.06 correct identified problems found in version affect the allocation of system resources as well as an SLT feature operation sets). 1. When using (2500 sets) in the system:
A change made in the allocation of DTMF receivers on the APL and/or RSM reduces the chances for receiver congestion. Congestion of the DTMF receiver! causes SLT users to have delayed or no system dial tone when going off hook. Previously, if SLT station A used directed or group call pickup to answer a cal ringing at SLT station B, station A could not transfer the picked-up call another station. The new software allows an SLT station to transfer the picked-q call. 2. SMDR from the RS-232 port:
Corrections have been made for an SMDR data flow interruption problem. This due to an unwanted signal sent back to the KSU when power to some printers terminals is switched off and on. This condition blocks all activity on the RS-23; port on the CPB card until the system is reset.
Alan Penick Product Line Manager File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Technical Facts File and in your ENCORE CX 816 and 3672 M a n u a l , F o r m 2993101A a n d 29931018. A l s o list it on the Record Of Changes page. (over)
3. Multi-party conference: Corrections have been made in 2.06 software to eliminate unwanted conferences. In earlier software versions, an unwanted conference could occur as a result of the originator of a multi-party conference exiting the conference in progress. In this a subsequent call in the system could be inadvertently added to the situation, conference in progress. This symptom usually occurs in conferences involving four internal parties and one external party. SOFTWARE FIELD REPLACEUENTS If your customers have experienced any of the above conditions in systems using previous software versions, we recommend that you obtain version 2.06 by using the PROM exchange program detailed in Technical Facts 1608. This Technical Facts officially extends the PROM exchange program introduced in Tech 'acts 1608 until April 1, 1988, for those distributors who wish to equip installed 3672 systems with the latest software version (2.06).
Page 2 of 2
E N C O R E ' " C X K E Y TELEPHONE SYSTEM
N o . 1621 January 29, 1988 For All Oistributors
SIB
We have identified certain problems that may be encountered when inserting SIB cards. Erratic system operation and crosstalk may result from inserting and/or removing the A high failure rate of SIB cards may also be cards when the under power. A l l SIB c a r d s ( 2 9 9 3 7 0 4 ) b e a r i n g s e r i a l n u m b e r 7 1 0 9 9 9 9 9 o r l o w e r , s h i p p e d experienced. b e f o r e D e c e m b e r 7 , 1987, f r o m t h e S a n D i e g o w a r e h o u s e , c o u l d e x h i b i t t h e s e s y m p t o m s . All SIB cards (2993704) bearing serial number 71100000 or higher, shipped after December 7, 1987, from the San Diego warehouse, have been modified to eliminate the problems associated with insertion and removal under power. SIB cards requiring modification for the aforementioned conditions should be sent to the F o l l o w n o r m a l r e p a i r p r o c e d u r e s . In o r d e r t o e x p e d i t e m o d i f i San Diego repair center. cation, please write "SIB insertion problem" in the problem description section of the This modification will be performed at no charge until December factory repair form.
1988.
Alan Penick Product Line Manager
File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Technical Facts File and in your ENCORE CX 816 and 3672 Technical M a n u a l , F o r m 2993101A a n d 29931018. A l s o list it on the Record of Changes page.
.-.
ENCORE'" CX 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM No. 1623 M a r c h 11, 1988 For All Distributors
ENCORE- CX 3672
RELEASE
A new version software, i s n o w a v a i l a b l e f o r t h e C e n t r a l P r o c e s s o r B o a r d (2994401) used in the ENCORE CX 3672 key telephone system. Central Processor Boards shipped on or a f t e r M a r c h 1, 1988, w i l l h a v e t h e n e w software. The ENCORE CX 3672 PROM on page 2 of this Technical Facts makes available a PROM exchange program for field upgrades. This upgrade will not require the of the customer database. The new software includes improved operations of DISA and SMDR features, as well as a new feature that enables the first attendant to change the time and date of the In addition, identified problems have been corrected in software. clock.
1. T i m e a n d D a t e P r o g r a m m i n g
Time and date changes can be implemented now from the first attendant station. With the receiver on hook: a. Dial 299. I f a d i s p l a y t e l e p h o n e i s u s e d , "DATE T I M E " w i l l n o w a p p e a r o n t h e first line of the LCD. b. Dial the following ten (10) digits for date and time: YYMMDDHHMM YY = year; MM = month, DD = day, HH hour (military format), MM = minute. After hearing confirmation tone, press MON button. Date and time are displayed. C. 2. DISA The Directed Call Pickup feature can now be used to pick up a DISA call ringing at any station in the system. S i m u l t a n e o u s i n c o m i n g DISA calls ( o n t w o o r t h r e e D I S A lines) are answered on a first in/first out basis. 3. SMDR When long distance only is enabled for SMDR, any dialed number over 7 digits in length will be reported as a long distance c a l l , even if that number is not preceded by a or In the past, default baud rate for the RS-232C port on the CPB card was 4800, not the 300 baud as indicated. The default baud rate has been corrected to accurately reflect 300 baud.
File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Technical Facts File and in your ENCORE CX 816 and 3672 Technical Manual, F o r m 2993101 Issues A , B a n d C . A l s o l i s t it on the Record of Changes page. Attachments: PROM Return Authorization Form
John Henderson Product Line Manager
Page 1of 3
ENCORE CX 3672 PROM P r o g r a m 'he ENCORE CX 3672 PROM program offers a method of obtaining version to upgrade your present customers and in-house inventory. rder part software for
from Distributor Services for the software by PROM sets for in the field. Part A69202 represents a complete set of six (6) to change software in one (1) system. Quantities for the PROM sets will be ontrolled by allocation. $115.00 will be charged for each PROM set. By returning the PROM sets, using the instruction on the attached PROM return form, full credit for ach PROM set passing return inspection will be issued. A new order for an of PROM sets will be allowed after the and acceptance of the old ets in San Diego.
he allocation of PROM sets ensures that each distributor will receive a fair share and educe the chance for back-order problems. It is very t h a t PROM sets ordered
re installed quickly and old PROM sets are returned immediately.

o credit will be issued for any old PROM sets received after 31, 1988. the close of business
11 ENCORE CX Central Processor Boards (2994401) shipped or on or after March from our San Diego warehouse and repair center will have the new software After October 31, 1988, all Central Processor Boards (2994401) sent included. o the repair center will be upgraded upon request only. ormal repair charges will apply for any cards sent in after the warranty period xpires.
How To Obtain Version
Sets
lease use the following procedure to obtain new PROM sets'. Call Distributor Services with a purchase o r d e r f o r part A69202. They will inform $115.00 per PROM set will be you of the quantity that you have been allocated. charged. Upon receiving the new PROM sets, (2994401) cards. exchange a s quickly as possible in desired CPB
Page 2 of 3
TF1623
3 . Return o l d P R O M s e t s using the instructions on the "PROM Return Form" attached to this Technical Facts. Send the form along with the PROM sets. 4. A credit of $115.00 will be issued for each PROM set returned and passing inspection. Additional allocation quantities will then be allowed. 5. Follow this procedure again if additional PROM sets are required. New PROM Sets T h e f o l l o w i n g s t e p s s h o u l d b e f o l l o w e d when exchanging PROMS o n t h e CPB (2994401).
1. 2. 3. 4. 5 . 6.
E n s u r e s w i t c h 8 o n t h e DIP s w i t c h o f t h e C P B i s i n t h e O F F p o s i t i o n . protect the customer's data base. Turn OFF the power switch on the DC/DC converter. Using removal tabs, remove the CPB card.
This will
Place CPB card, component side up, on a well-lighted, clean non-conductive Use all normal procedures for handling static-sensitive cards. surface. Locate six mounted in chip sockets marked 3, 4, 5, 8 and 9. and set aside for proper packing. remove, using proper tools, old Carefu
Remove the new PROM set from its packing tube and insert each PROM the All six are marked with a number for matching to a proper chip socket. Make certain each PROM is inserted in the proper direction (pin one to chip socket. pin one). Carefully inspect each PROM to ensure it is installed properly without any damage to pins. Insert the CPB into the system and turn the DC/DC converter on. Press the reset button on the CPB and then check for normal system operation. ihto the packing tube and secure. data if all procedures are
7. 8. 9.
10. P a c k o l d
NOTE: carefully.
It s h o u l d n o t b e n e c e s s a r y t o
PLEASE
PROPERLY FOR
Devices received will be screened for physical (bent, pins, broken cases, etc.) and to ensure that complete sets are included prior to credit approval and reallocation for re-orders.
TFi623
Page 3 of 3
CX 816 KEY For All
No. May 3, 1988 Distributors
New versions of software are now available for Program (PM) 1 and 2 for 2993601 and 2993602 the CX 816 system. All orders f o r (PM-2) shipped from the San Diego warehouse or after April 22, 1988, will contain the new versions of software: for and for PM-2. The new software corrects problems identified in previously shipped software, end includes feature enhancements as well. The following is a list of fixes and
. Feature
1.
2. 3.
The SMDR record now prints a header every 66 lines, making the report easier to read. (PM-2 only) DATE Example: 102 01 012122331234 now prints an account in a specified fixed field, improving (PM-2 only) compatibility with some call accounting
The attendant can now change and date without entering system program, reducing the chance for possible damage to the programmed database. (PM-2 only) With the receiver hook: is used, DATE TIME will now appear a. Dial 299. If a display the first line of the b. Dial the ten (10) digits for date time: where year, MM day, hour (military minute. Date and time a r e now C. After hearing tone, press displayed. can now forward calls to another 4. The the Call For5. Incoming CO calls will now follow the warding feature is activated. CO (not just 6. Directed Call Pickup can now be used to pick up transferred CC calls or intercom calls). File a copy of this Technical Facts your Master Technical Facts File in your ENCORE CX 816 3672 Technical Manual, Form 2993101 A , B, C. Also list it on your Record of Changes page. NOTE : Technical Facts replaces TF1624, issued
John
Manager
1.
Station
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
was activated the next time call came in on that CO line at S t a t i o n A . T h e result w a s a caller could not hear A speaking. With the new software this scenario no longer occurs. Prefixes that did not require a "1" could not be restricted in Special Table 4 of the restriction F o r e x a m p l e , a t t e m p t i n g t o deny 9 7 6 c a l l s home area did not work. The problem has been corrected. in Station A is denied access, via to a CC group, but has an a p p e a r a n c e of t h e C C c m h i s / h e r In the past, Aw o u l d n o t receive any visual indication (LED if that CO was busy o r o n hold. In the new software, A does r e c e i v e L E D if t h e restricted CO is busy or hold. Station A is a telephone equipped with Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Station A puts a c a l l exclusive hold. In the past, Station A's display continued t o s h o w " L i n e H o l d i n g " e v e n a f t e r t h a t C O l i n e recalled t h e a t t e n d a n t e n d w a s as the attendant answers the answered. The display now extinguishes as recall. Preset forward did not i f t h e preset timer was set for any value less than seven (7) seconds. The problem has been corrected by lengthening t h e r i n g c y c l e timer to all Central Office ring cycles. Any as COS 4 did not follow restrictions in Table A and o n l y T a b l e A w a s searched. T h e p r o b l e m h a s b e e n c o r Table B as
816
A has Preferred Line Answer enabled in programing. Station A uses to transfer a C O to a b u s y station. In the transmitter mute
ENCORE C X 8 1 6 s o f t w a r e program o f f e r s a o f u p g r a d i n g your present inventory of Generic I Program Modules (PM-l) and Generic II Program Modules ( P M - 2 ) t o t h e n e w s o f t w a r e The rework w i l l b e i m p l e m e n t e d free o f c h a r g e if are in before
1988. To Retum 2993601 2993602 For
for upgrading should be returned to the San Diego repair center. the normal factory repair procedure, and write 816 Software in the problem 1.
Customer
Follow
d a t a f o r m s m u s t reflect t h e c o r r e c t c u s t o m e r
will be
2. Remove AC power. 3. Remove the old program module and install the new module.
procedures in the
CX 816
Refer t o 3672 Technical Manual, Form
4.
Restore AC power. Follow the instructions detailed in the 3 6 7 2 Technical M a n u a l for and
P a g e 2 of 2
CX 816
ENCCRE CX 3672 KEY

For All
No. 1626 2 0 , 1988 Distributors
3672
2.m
A new version software, is now available for the Central P r o c e s s o r B o a r d (2994401) used in the 3 6 7 2 k e y t e l e p h o n e s y s t e m . C e n t r a l Processor Boards shipped on or after June 15, have the new software. The
E N C C R E CX 3672 program page 3 of this Technical Facts available a PROM exchange program for field upgrades. will not require the of the The new software includes improved
operations and corrects problems in software.
1 . U n w a n t e d S L T Conference a. Key telephone A is in the TN intercom mode. b. SLT station B calls A. c . W h i l e t h e S L T c a l l i s r i n g i n g a t s t a t i o n A, A p r e s s e s a D S S to call another station (C). Result: All 3 stations (A, B and C) are and hear busy simultaneously. Fix: I n t h e a b o v e s c e n a r i o , S L T s t a t i o n B will hear busy -and stations A and C will be connected. 2 . Unwanted a. SMDR or toll is enabled SLT A. B attempts to a s u p e r v i s e d t r a n s f e r of a C C c a l l t o s t a t i o n b. c . A n o t h e r s t a t i o n ( C ) in the system attempts to make an call to any other (D) in the system. Result: Internal parties C D are with Aa n d t h e After 2 0 C a n d D d r o p o u t of transferred call for 20 the unwanted a regular intercom call, A and the transferred The can no occur. Fix: Product Manager Master Technical Facts File and
File a copy of this Facts in your your CX 816 and 3672 Technical Manual,
A.
Form 2993101 Issue C. Also list it t h e R e c o r d of C h a n g e s p a g e .
3. Unwanted Night Ring This problem Is the result of a software failure in t h e system.
by
the end user; It is not a
A forwards calls to station B. a. Attendant b. m-hook, A mistakenly presses the flashing to cancel call forward. This operation actually ambles Night Ring; call forward is still activated (the correct way to cancel call forward is by pressing the flashing k e y while . c. If A then goes off-hook and presses the LED goes out. R e s u l t : The result is not what the end user expects: call forward is but Night Service is still even though there is no visual (LED)
Fix:
The LED will lit when the system is still in Night Service. on-hook to cancel. Is so
occurs to indicate the A then presses while
Be&use the a. Call Forward:

while off-hook.
we offer the following reminder: and cancellation by pressing the the
button
b. Night Service: activation and cancellation by while 4. Preferred Line Answer For DISA Calls
a. Preferred Line Answer is enabled for A. b. An incoming DISA call rings in A, causing the Loop flash. c. A lifts handset to answer the call. Result: Preferred Line answered Fix: does not A depresses the f the
key.
to
DISA call is not
Preferred Line Answer will now for calls Simply pick up the handset and speak to the calling party.
P a g e 2 of 4
TF1626
The CX 3672 program offers a of obtaining 2. ON software for you to upgrade your present customers and inventory in stock, if desired. Order part A69202 from the Inside Sales Department for the software by sets for replacement in the field. Part A69202 represents a complete set of six (6) necessary to change software in one ( 1) system. $115 .OO will be charged set will be given if returned Full credit for each for each set. following the requirements No credit will be issued for any old sets received after the close of business December 30, 1988. All ENCORE CX Central Processor Boards (2994401) shipped or repaired or after June 15, 1988, from our Diego warehouse repair center will have the new software version included.
To
Please use the following procedure to obtain new sets. The for returning the old sets, as well as the return location, have changed from the last software Call the Inside Department with a purchase order for part A69202 sets. $115.00 per set will be charged. exchange as quickly as possible in desired 2. Upon receiving the new CPB (2994401) cards. 3. Call the Inside Sales Department prior to returning the old sets, and obtain a credit authorization 4. Fill out the attached Return Authorization Form and send a copy with the old sets to: Inc. Attn: Manufacturing 8300 East Drive Scottsdale, 85260 CRA Do not use the previous Return 1623 or 1608. 5. Be sure to include the Credit Return 6. A credit of $115 .OO will be issued for each Form provided with Technical Facts the shipping set returned and passing
TF1626
Page 3 of 4
sets
The following steps should be followed when exchanging
on the
(2994401). 1.
2. 3. 4.
switch 8 the DIP switch of the will protect the customers data base. Turn OFF the power switch Using removal tabs, the the card.
is in the
OFF position. This
side up, on a well-lighted, clean Place CPB card, surface. Make sure to use a static wrist strap to a ground when handling the CPB. Locate six mounted in chip sockets marked G2, 3, 4, 8 and 9. and set aside for proper Carefully remove, using an IC remover, old packing. Remove the new PROM set from its packing tube and insert each carefully the chip socket using the chip tool. All six are with a number for matching to a chip socket. Make certain each PROM is inserted In the proper (pin me to pin me). Carefully inspect each PROM to ensure it is installed properly without any damage to gins (pins outside the socket or bent under the device body). Insert the CPB into the system and turn the Press the reset button on the CPB operation.
Pack old
5.
6.
7. 8. 9.
an. then check for system
10. NOTE:
Into the
tube and secure.
Devices received will be screened for physical (bent, broken pins, broken cases, etc.) and to ensure that complete sets are included prior to credit .
Page 4 of 4
TF1626
ENCORE CX 3672
36112 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
No. 163OA December All EXECUTONE Distributors

SYSTEM
NEW BOARDS FOR THE ENCORE CX
Two new boards are now available for use in ENCORE CX and key telephone systems. The Single tine OPX board (OPX, 2993706) enables the use of four off-premise 2500 telephone sets. The Amplified Central Office board (COB-A, 2993705) enhances audio levels for and multi-line conference applications. systems using
1. SINGLE LINE OPX BOARD (OPX, 2993706)
The OPX board provides four (4) FCC registered single line interface ports. When an OPX is installed, the maximum number of stations in the system is reduced by four. The OPX board can be used with a Central Processor Board (CPB) as well as with an Enhanced Processor Board (EPB). 1.1 OPX STATION FEATURES AND OPX station features are the same as SLT station features. The only exception is Receiving Message Waiting- Indication, which is not allowed. feature operations are identical to those for on-premise SLT stations. Refer to Section 101 of the ENCORE CX Technical Manual (Form instructions. 2993101 D) for details of allowed features, and refer to Section 201 for OPX stations cannot answer a message waiting indication since they are incapab e of receiving such an indication. 1.2 INFORMATION
Each OPX port requires an network circuit. An FCC interface is required to connect to the network. On SLT devices cap of true DTMF can be used on an OPX circuit provided by the E X system. When an OPX boar8 is installed, four station ports are rendered unusable, reducing the maximum number of stations in the system by four (see Example 1). John Henderson, Product Manager
NOTE: This Technical Facts replaces TF 7630, issued Page 1 of4
Example OPX Reduces Maximum Number of Stations by 4 An OPX is inserted into the second card slot Ext 108 111 support four ( 4 ) OPX circuits
Loop resistance/current: each circuit operates with a loop resistance up to ing station resistance). Maximum current (terminals shorted) = Mininum current ohms = 20mA. 1.3 INSTALLATION
ohms (includ-
The OPX board can be installed in all but the first card slot of the ENCORE CX system. It can be inserted and removed with power on. The board has a NORMAL/SERVICE switch on its top front edge, as the KIB, SIB and COB cards have. It also has an adjustable control directly above the switch. Do not make adjustment to this control. It is factory set for proper operation. One 1 ) Ring Generator Unit (RGU) and one (1 Applications Board (APL) are necessary to supManual for An port t e OPX card. Refer to the ENCORE CX additional Receiver/Sender Module (RSM) may also be needed if the combined traffic of OPX, calls affects the availability of receiver circuits. SIB, and A type female connector is provided on the front edge of the OPX. This allows Twenty-five (25) the OPX system extensions to be cabled to the Main Distributor Frame pair cabling must be prepared with a male connector to extend the OPX extension to the MDF. The cable should be routed throu h the bottom cable access area of the KSU or expansion terminated on industry standard punch-down cabinet. The cable(s) then should type cable connector has been attached, the cable connector . After the at the bottom of the KSU or expansion cabinet. should be secure to a cable Connection from the OPX punch-down block to an FCC approved connector can be done by cross-connect wiring. Example 2 illustrates the pair identification for each of the OPX circuits. 1.4 PROGRAMMING In customer data base entries, all OPX station extensions must be programmed with a station ID code of This is done in Station Attributes flash 40, page B. Refer to page 18 of Section 700 in the ENCORE CX Technical Manual.
Page 2 of 4
Example 2. Station Connecting Block

PIN DESIGNATION
UNUSED 9 9 10 10 UNUSED R4 I
NOTE: PAIRS 1
2. AMPLIFIED CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD (COB-A, 2993705)
The Amplified Central board (COB-A) is an optional card that is installed in of the standard COB. The COB-A enhances audio levels and is recommended for and conference applications. It can be used with a Central Processor Board (CPB, or an Enhanced Processor Board (EPB, 2994402). The COB-A card should not used in ENCORE CX systems behind because of possible When used with system software versions earlier than 5.16, the COB-A provides gain for trunk-to-trunk and for supervised trunk-to-trunk calls. and later, the COB-A provides gain for trunk-to When used with software versions trunk calls, supervised trunk-to-trunk conference calls and trunk-to-trunk conference calls. In all cases, the Application board (APL, is required to support and unsupervised conferences. 2.1 There are six (6) CO line circuits per card. Each CO circuit has a Gain Program Jumper Strap. These jumper straps are marked through (see Example 3). These jumper straps are set by the installer durin installation for either 0 (no gain) or 2 (gain). Gain/No gain affects line conferences and DI A calls. All other installation requirements are the same as for the ard COB. Refer to Section 601 of the ECX Technical Manual for installation instructions. Page 3 of 4
Example 3. Jumper Straps
on COB-A for Setting Gain/No Gain
1
0 0
0 (No Gain) 0 (No Gain)
(Gain)
(Gain)
(Sat
Gain)
(Sat for no Gain)
P2
co Circuit
1 2 3 4
Jumper
Pl P 2 P3 P4
0 Gain Off Gain Off
5 6
Gain On Gain On On Gain On On
CX KEY
For All
No. 1635 S e p t e m b e r 16, 1 9 8 8 Distributors
The ENCORE CX Line Adapter/Off Premises Extension (SLA-OPX, 2997301) Is This new product Is a single adapter which provides available an Interface between an electronic key telephone port and most standard DTMF single line telephones o r d e v i c e s . I t I s d e s i g n e d t o w o r k w i t h t h e ENCORE CX 512 and key telephone systems.
C a n b e u s e d f o r O f f P r e m i s e s E x t e n s i o n (OPX a p p l i c a t i o n s . y and ringing generator. Self-contained; includes Its own power e r a t e s on common AC power. for easy Installation. U modular ent devices (such as Provides a means o Interface many special a F A X , modem, c a r d r e a d e r , a u t o a t t e n d a n t o r o h e r t e l e p h o n e - r e l a t e d devices) . l i e s w i t h p a r t 1 5 a n d 6 8 o f t h e FCC r e g u l a t i o n s .
A standard DTMF single line telephone used with the SLA-OPX perform t h e following station operations: Place intercom and outside calls. Answer Intercom and outside calls. 816 only). P a r k a n d r e t r i e v e c a l l s I n C a l l P a r k l o c a t i o n so n y ). Place and retrieve calls on System Hold (512 M a k e and r e c e i v e s c r e e n e d and u n s c r e e n e d transfers. Perform a flash on Use the Group Call Pickup feature (816 Use the Call Pickup feature. Use the Call Forward feature. t o ab u s y Allowsthe o f s y s t e m. n i g h t s e r v i c e m o d e . Allows h t p i c k u p of U N A c a l l s ( 8 1 6 . ernal,external A l l o w s u s e of t h e M e e t - M e user-selected day/n t F i l e a c o p y of t h i s Facts In a copy y o u r Master T e c h Facts F i l e . In your ENCORE CX Technical a n d I n t h e ENCORE CX 512 Product/Technical Manual, Form t h e Record of 2983101A. A l s o l i s t
Changes pages.
P r o d u c t Manager
John Henderson,
P a g e 1 of 3
Notes a. b. System and Station Speed Dial Feature The SLA-OPX cannot use or program system or station speed dial bins. MSG Waiting When a key set calls an The message waiting feature cannot be used. unattended SLA-OPX a callback request generated from the key set will result in a confirmation tone at the key set. No visual Indication, however, will appear at the SLA-OPX station. Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb feature cannot be activated f r o m a SLA-OPX station. Call Wait The SLA-OPX station is allowed the call wait (camp-on) feature. The OPX station user can dial 3 a n d c a m p - o n t o a b u s y s t a t i o n . Answering a Call Wait A key set Is allowed t o c a m p - o n t o a b u s y SLA-OPX s t a t i o n . T h e c a m p e d - o n s t a t i o n will ring the SLA-OPX as soon it goes on-hook. The SLA-OPX This is a Data Security will not receive a tone. feature.
Conference
C.
d.
e.
f.
The SLA-OPX can be included In a ccmference, but cannot Initiate a conference . CO Line Access The ENCORE CX 512 with software or lower does not allow the dial 9 code for pooled group access. This restricts the SLA-OPX f r o m Line selection is allowed by the having the 9 access code for the Individual CO by tone). Example: 1. Lift handset (hear 2. Dial 8801 (you are to CO 1). If CO line 1 is In use or no appearance Is assigned, error tone Is heard. When the SLA-OPX is used on the 816, will be translated as if you have pushed the first feature key cm a means that whatever CO line or allowed system feature is for that key will be connected or performed. h. Hold Retrieving Calls In ENCORE 512 systems, the S L A - O P X station cannot retrieve calls that have placed on system hold. Page 2 of 3 TF1635
The SLA-OPX will have access T h e S L A - O P X i n t e r a c t s with " S t a t i o n t o C O l i n e s b a s e d o n t h e d a t a e n t e r e d i n t h e " S t a t i o n A t t r i b u t e s " ( F L A S H 4 0 ) of the extension to which it is connected. T h e S L A - O P X w i l l o p e r a t e as d e s c r i b e d i n the " P r o c t o r S y s t e m P r a c t i c e " O P X w i t h o n l y o n e c h a n g e t o Default Settings of the Station Attributes of the The o n " P a c e A 5 of the program for t h e assigned must be changed to 0.
service
The manual T h e SLA-OPX is s h i p p e d w i t h i t s o w n P r o d u c t / T e c h n i c a l M a n u a l . functional testing, feature includes sections covering installation, operation and much more. This unit is manufactured by Proctor Associates for Information Systems. I n a n d o u t o f w a r r a n t y r e p a i r c a n b e o b t a i n e d d i r e c t l y from P r o c t o r be shipped pre-paid to: Associates. Defective SLA-OPX units Proctor Associates 15050 N.E. 36th Washington98052 To obtain a Return Authorization, contact Proctor's Customer Service group at 2 0 6 - 8 8 1 - 7 0 0 0 . R e p a i r s are n o r m a l l y p r o c e s s e d i n t w o weeks. T e c h n i c a l S u p p o r t w i l l be p r o v i d e d b y E X E C U T C N E System's Field C a l l l - 8 0 0 - 3 5 6 - 7 2 7 9 f o r t o l l free Service Department in Scottsdale, assistance.
ENCORE CX SLA-OPX (2997301) Single L i n e Adapter/Off Premises E x t e n s i o n m u s t be placed with the E X E C U T O N E Customer S e r v i c e / I n s i d e S a l e s call t o l l f r e e l - 8 0 0 - 4 5 1 - 1 7 5 4 . B y by D e p a r t m e n t . When placing
Crders for t h e
FAX call toll free l-800-458-4799.

8300 E.
Orders by Dr.
should be sent to:
E X E C U T O N E Information Systems, Inc.

Scottsdale, AZ 85260
Attention:
Customer Service/Inside Sales
Page 3 of 3
ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System
No. 1637 October 14, 1988 For All EXECUTONE Distributors
ENCORE CX 816
UPGRADE EXTENSION
On May 3, 1988, Technical Facts 1624A announced the release of new software versions for PM-1 (2993601) and for PM-2 (2993692). A software upgrade program permitted older software to be sent to the San Diego repair center for an upgrade, free of charge, if received before September 1988. We are pleased to announce that the software upgrade program has been extended until December 30, 1986. Rework will be implemented for all program modules containing old software that are received before December 30, 1988.
How To Return PM-1 (2993601) and PM-2 (2993602) For Rework
Modules for upgrading should be returned to the San Diego repair center. Follow the normal factory repair procedure, and write ECX 816 Software Upgrade Program in the problem description section.
Installing Updated Modules at Customer Sites
1. 2. 3. 4.
Customer data forms must reflect the correct customer database. re-enter customer program data.
be necessary
Remove AC power. Remove the old program data module and install the new module. Refer to installation
procedures in the ENCORE CX 818 3672 Technical Manual, Form 2993101. Restore AC power. Follow the instructions detailed in the ENCORE CX 816 & 3672
Technical Manual for initialization and programming. John Henderson,

Product Manager File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Technical Facts file and in your ENCORE CX 818 813672 Technical
Manual, Form 2993101 A,
C D. Also
list it on your Record Of Changes page.
ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System
No. 1637 October 14, 1988 For All EXECUTONE Distributors
ENCORE CX 816
UPGRADE EXTENSION
On May 3, 1988, Technical Facts announced the release of new software versions for PM-1 (2993601) and for PM-2 (2993602). A software upgrade program permitted older software to be sent to the San Diego repair center for an upgrade, free of charge, if received before September 1988. We are pleased to announce that the software upgrade program has been extended until December 30, 1988. Rework will be implemented for all program modules containing old software that are received before December 30, 1988.
How To Return PM-1 (2993601) and PM-2 (2993602) For Rework
Modules for upgrading should be returned to the San Diego repair center. Follow the normal factory repair procedure, and write ECX 816 Software Upgrade Program in the problem description section.
Installing Updated Modules at Customer Sites 1.
Customer data forms must reflect the correct customer database. customer program
necessary
2. 3. 4.
Remove AC power.
Remove the old program data module and install the new module. Refer to installation procedures in the ENCORE CX 816 3672 Technical Manual, Form 2993101. Restore AC power. Follow the instructions detailed in the ENCORE CX 816 & 3672 Technical Manual for initialization and programming. John Henderson, Product Manager File a copy of this Technical Facts in your Master Technical Facts file and in your ENCORE CX 816 3672 Technical Manual, Form 2993101 A, C & D. Also list it on your Record Of Changes page.
1.3
GROUP (Feature Package 5
CORE system can be set up with several automated attendants. The UCD group is programmed with the SLT port or ports as the only UCD group members. The desired CO lines are programmed to ring this UCD group. The call wilt be circulated within the UCD group until an available automated attendant is found. This automated attendant is then rung. One station port is required for each automated attendant. 2. SETUP 2.1 PRESET CALL FORWARDING An unequipped key telephone port is assigned in the database to ring on the desired CO lines. This port is then programmed to preset forward to the SLT port where the automated attendant is connected (FLASH 40, Page B, Button 6). The Preset Forward Timer (FLASH 04) must be set in programming. It should be set at approximately 5 seconds depending on customer needs. This same timer is used to determine the amount of time before the first automated attendant forwards to the second automated attendant if more than one attendant is used. 2.2 STATION CALL FORWARDING A key telephone is dedicated for automated attendant use. Desired CO lines will ring this station which is placed in station call forward mode to forward calls immediately to the SLT port where the automated attendant is connected. 2.3 UCD GROUP The UCD group is programmed with the station numbers of the SLT ports to which an automated attendant is connected (FLASH 38). Any or all CO lines can be assigned (FLASH 30, Button 9) to ring directly into the UCD group. 3. INSTALLING THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
l
This method is particularly useful for high traffic offices. One of the 8 UCD groups on the EN-
Connect the AC power cord to the AC receptacle.
Receptionist and plug the cord into an
Connect the Single Line Telephone line cord to the to line jack on the back of the Receptionist.
l
hone jack on the back of The Single tine Telephone may be connected to the the Receptionist if desired to act as busy ove ow station. There are 4 switches on the back of the COBOTYX Receptionist. If the ENCORE CX key telephone system does not have system battery back up, switches 1 and 2 should and switches 3 and 4 should be OFF (up). be
If the ENCORE CX system does have system battery back up, switches should be ON (down) switch 4 should be OFF (up).
2 and 3
Consult the Receptionist manual for setting up greeting voice messages and programming the unit for call routing within the ENCORE CX system. 1 Page 2 of 2
ENCORE CX 816 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER 1 9 8 8
ENCORE CX 816 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES

TABLE Of CONTENTS
PAGE 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . 3. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 KEY SERVICE UNIT (KSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEYTELEPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PHONE BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ............................................ ...3 EXPANSION MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
4.1 4.2 4.3 5.01 5.02 5.03 5.04 5.05 5.06 5.07 5.08 5.09 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16 5.17 5.10 5.19 5.20 5.21 5.22 5.23 5.24 PORT FOR SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 REAL TIME CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 BACKUP UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ATTENDANT RECALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 .................... 4 AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION WITH SPEED AUTOMATIC PRIVACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 BACKUP-MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 BACKUP-SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CO ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CO LINE GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CO RING DETECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DIAL PULSE SENDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DIALING PRIVILEGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DTMF SENDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 EMERGENCY TRANSFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FLASH WITH SPEED DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ............................................. 4 FLEXIBLE HOLD PREFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 HUNTGROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOUD BELL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 MUSIC ON HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 NIGHT TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTSIDE LINE RING ASSIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAUSE TIMER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 PBX DIAL CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PULSE-TO-TONE SWITCHOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. SYSTEM FEATURES
100-A
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER 1988
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTD)
DESCRIPTION
5.25 5.26, 5.27
PAGE
5 5 5
REAL TIME CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM SPEED DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. STATION FEATURES
6.01 6.02 6.03 6.04 6.05 6.06 6.07 6.08 6.09 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 6.17 6.18 6.19 6.20 6.21 6.22 6.23 6.24 6.25 6.26 6.27 6.28 6.29 6.30 6.31 6.32 6.33 6.34 6.35 6.36 ADD ON CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACKGROUND MUSIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL ANNOUNCE-PRIVACY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL PARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL WAITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECT STATION SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECTED CALL PICKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY CAPABILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................ EXCLUSIVE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRANSFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLASH KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLEXIBLE ASSIGNMENT. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP CALL PICKUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOLDRECALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTERCOM SIGNALING SELECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NUMBER ........................................... MEET ME PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGE WAITING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGE REMINDER TONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MULTI-UNE CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON-HOOK DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... ... . . . ... .. . . . .. ... . . . ... PAGING ACCESS RESTRICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRE-SELECTED MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESET CALL FORWARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUEUING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RINGING UNE ANSWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................ SAVE NUMBER STATION CALL FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATION SPEED DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEAKERPHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 8
0 0
100-B
ENCORE
816 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES
SECTION ISSUE 3, NOVEMBER 1989
DESCRIPTION 7. 8. FEATURE INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE
FEATURES AND BENEFITS SYSTEM FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 8.1 STATION FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 PROGRAM MODULE 3 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM-3: STATION FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 AUTOMATIC RELEASE OF THE MONITOR 10.1 .................................... AUTOMATIC 10.2 CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 CANNED TOLL RESTRICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 10.5 FLASH ON INTERCOM CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 INTERCOM CALL HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .lS 10.7 ONE-TIME DO NOT DISTURB (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 10.9 ..................... 10.10 PROGRESS TONES ON HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECALLRING.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11 PM-3: ATTENDANT FEATURES DISABLING OUTGOING ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 SELECTING BGM AT A PHONE BOX FROM ATTENDANT . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 PM-3: INTERCOM PHONE BOX BLOCKING BACKGROUND MUSIC (BGM) 12.1 PROGRAM MODULE 14.1 ............................... .
9. 10.
11.
12 13. 14. 15.
SYSTEM FEATURES ENHANCED KEY TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . STATION FEATURES ADDITIONAL DIAL CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMING CODES. TRANSFER SEARCH WITH RECOVERY ..................................................... ABBREVIATEDCONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FIGURES
15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4
1. 2.
ENCORE CX 818 KEY SERVICE UNIT ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100-c
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX Key Telephone Systems are designed to meet the needs of telephone users from small to large. The systems are designed for growth by allowing the same telephones to be used in all systems. The low end system (CX 816) is a flat pack system equipped with 4 CO lines and 8 stations. It can be easily expanded to 8 lines and 16 stations with a modular PCB mounted in the KSU. The mid-range system (CX 3672) is a KTU card) system that can support a maximum of 36 lines and 72 stations. This system is expanded with plug-in cards and a modular shelf. Except where specifically identified, the features will operate the same in all systems. appearances which can be programmed in any order; speakerphone included in all key telephones: unlimited DSS capability; preset call forward so that
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System is designed to meet the telecommunications needs of small to medium sized businesses. A customer may start out with only a few outside lines and stations and can add as the business grows up to a maximum of 8 lines and 16 stations. This system contains all the features of the bigger system with the exception of Off-Hook Voice Announce, single line compatibility, DSS console, unsupervised conference, and (Direct Inward System Access). In addition, the ENCORE CX 816 has an alarm feature which is not provided in the bigger system. Some of the time and money saving features in the ENCORE CX systems include: an adjustable character, 2-line LCD display which allows the user to position it for better viewing; the ability to program a name into the display instead of just using a station number; pre-selected messages which can be viewed on the display; time and date in the display; and the use of the display in on-line programming of system data base. Other features included in the new ENCORE CX systems are: flexible buttons which allow the user to program his/her own telephone; outside line
a telephone which is busy or does not answer can have CO calls automatically forwarded to another station; an intercom selector switch which allows the user to determine the mode of incoming intercom calls: the ability to restrict a station from accessing features such as paging, DND, call forward and Off -Hook Voice Announce: executive/secretary pairs and hunt groups, and many more features.
100-l
ENCORE CX SECTION 100 ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER 1988
Enhanced
Executive 2 1 -Button Executive
FIGURE 2. ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONES
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1988
3. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
3.1 KEY SERVICE UNIT (KSU) The KSU is a self-contained unit that contains the Power supply, processor, external connectors and circuits for 4 CO lines and 8 stations. A plug-in Program module provides system operating data in both a standard and advanced
software for the Basic 4081816 system and provides support for and LCD Display Telephones. Feature Package III or III-ENH features are not available with this program module. This program module or PM-3-ENH is required per system. ENCORE CX GENERIC III-ENH PROGRAM is a MODULE (PM-3-ENH). Program Module revised version of the operation system software which provides new features that supplement the features available by the ENCORE CX GENERIC III PROGRAM MODULE (PM-3). This program module or PM-2 is required per System.
3.2 KEY TELEPHONE

The 2 1 -button telephone comes in 2 models Enhanced and Executive. Both models come with 9 fixed feature buttons, 12 programmable buttons, speakerphone, 2 volume controls and an intercom mode selection switch. In addition, the Executive model comes with a Z-line, LCD display. The telephone also comes in 2 Enhanced and Executive. Both models come with 9 fixed feature buttons, 24 programmable buttons, speakerphone, 2 volume controls and an intercom mode selection switch. The Executive model also comes with a 48-character LCD display. The is a small key telephone which contains 8 buttons with a Message Waiting LED, a speakerphone, voice announcement with handsfree answer-back, and single voice/tone volume control. Of the 8 buttons, 2 are fixed feature buttons (hold and transfer) and the other 6 are flexible. has a Hearing Aid Compatible handset, a 12 foot coiled handset cord and 7 foot line cord. In addition, it comes with all equipment necessary to mount on a wall. Requires a station position on a KIB or OH interface card, but does not have OHVA capability.
3.5 EXPANSION MODULE

This is an optional plug-in unit that expands the system from 4 lines and 8 stations to 8 lines and 16 stations.
4. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
4.1
PORT FOR SMDR
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) is an optional feature that allows the customer to track incoming and outgoing, local and long distance calls by CO line, number dialed, time of day and date, station that placed the call, duration of the and, if used, an account code. 4.2 REAL TIME CLOCK
The system can be equipped with an optional RCU or real time clock unit to provide Executive telephones with LCD, to have time and date displayed, and a battery on the RCU to keep the time clock accurate in case of a commercial power failure. This optional unit is required if SMDR or LCD telephones are used.
3.3 PHONE BOX

Phone boxes provide handsfree intercom conversation from locations that do not need a key phone. The phone box contains 2 lighted buttons: one to originate calls and one for DND (Do Not Disturb). It also has a volume 3.4 PROGRAM MODULE This is a plug-in unit that operating tions for the system. There are two modules
4.3
BACKUP UNIT (BBU)
The system can be equipped with a battery backup unit that will sustain system operation during a commercial power failure. The BBU is an externally wall-mounted unit that provides battery charging and the battery in a safe Batteries are not included.
ENCORE CX GENERIC II PROGRAM MODULE

(PM-2). This cartridge contains the operation system
100-3
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER
5. SYSTEM FEATURES 5.01

An external alarm device may be connected to the system to signal an alarm condition to all stations programmed to receive this signal. The system detection may be programmed for either an open or closed loop and either a continuous signal or single tone alarm.
5.09 CO RING DETECT

The duration of the ringing signal from the or the PBX is matched with ringing detection circuitry in the KSU. The ring detect can range to programmed in increments. This timer helps prevent false ringing.
5.02 ATTENDANT RECALL

When a line has been left on hold for a programmable period of time, the station placing that line on hold will be recalled. If that station fails to answer the recall, the call will be recalled to the attendant for handling.
5.10 DIAL PULSE SENDING

Each CO Interface circuit for outside lines can be programmed to send dial pulse signals. Dialing speed and break/make ratios are programmable.
5.11
PRIVILEGES
5.03 AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION WITH SPEED DIAL

If a flash command is placed into system and station speed dial numbers, a pause will automatically be inserted after the flash. A pause will also be automatically inserted after a PBX dialing code has been used. .
The system provides a flexible means of providing toll or dialing restriction. Through the assignment of class of service (both station and outside line) many combinations of allow and deny numbers can be set. Both area and office codes can be screened for allow/deny privileges.
5.12 DTMF SENDING

DTMF (tone) signals can be programmed for dialing on outside lines.
5.04 AUTOMATIC PRIVACY

Privacy is automatically provided on all calls. If one station is using an outside line, another station cannot intrude on that line.
5.13 EMERGENCY TRANSFER

In the event of commercial power failure or central processor failure, the system will automatically connect the first 3 outside lines to 3 preselected or single line telephones, depending upon CO signaling requirements.
5.05
BACKUP
MEMORY
A long-life lithium battery is provided in the KSU to retain the system database in case of a power outage or the system power being turned off.
5.06
BACKUP- SYSTEM
5.14 FLASH WITH SPEED DIAL

A flash can be programmed within a speed dial number. When this is done, a pause will automatically be inserted before the remaining speed. digits are sent.
Optional batteries and cabling can be directly connected to the KSU to provide system operation in case of a commercial power outage. Calls in progress will continue without interruption when the power fails.
5.07 CO
ACCESS
5.15 FLEXIBLE ATTENDANT

Any key in the system may be assigned as the attendant station. station receive recalls and can place the system in Night The 816 is limited to one attendant.
Through programming, telephones are allowed or denied access to particular outside line groups.
5.08 CO UNE GROUPS

Outside lines can be placed in one of 8 groups if the customers business requires such grouping. are then individually assigned access to these lines and given the ability to dial on lines.
5.16 HOLD PREFERENCE

This allows either exclusive or system hold as the primary on the first depression of the HOLD button, depending on programming.
100-4
816 SYSTEM
AND FEATURES
SECTION ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER
5.17 HUNT GROUPS

Intercom and transferred outside calls can be sent to the pilot extension number of a hunt group. There are 8 hunt groups and each can have up to 8 stations as members. The system will search sequentially (in the order the stations were entered in programming) for an idle station in and will ring that station.
5.24 PULSE-TO-TONE
When commanded, the system will change the signaling on an outside line from dial pulse to (tone), allowing the use of common carriers behind a dial pulse outside line. This can be done manually when dialing, Of can be stored within a speed dial number.
5.25 REAL TIME CLOCK

This hardware option allows the system time and date to keep functioning in the event of a commercial power failure. It also provides the time source for information used by display phones and
5.18 LOUD BELL CONTROL

Two sets of relay-controlled contacts are provided to connect external signailing devices. Each set of contacts can be programmed to follow the ringing signals at any station.
5.26 SMDR (STATION MESSAGE RECORDING)

The standard RS-232C port is an optional feature of the ENCORE CX 816, allowing connection to an external printer or call accounting device. The system provides details on both incoming and outgoing calls. This feature is programmable to allow all calls or just outgoing long distance calls to be recorded. The system tracks calls by outside line, number dialed, time of day, date, station that placed the call and duration of the call. Account codes may also be entered. Requires SIU Board.
5.19 MUSIC ON HOLD

A music source, when connected to the will provide music to all lines on hold.
5.20 NIGHT TRANSFER

The system can be placed into night service. This allows designated stations to ring at night that may or may not ring on those lines during the day. The attendant station can place the system into and release frdm night service operation by pressing . the DND button. Any key telephone can place the system into and release from night service by dialing code
5.27 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL

Up to 80 commonly dialed numbers can be programmed into System Speed Dial for use by stations allowed this feature. These numbers can be up to 24 digits including pauses, flash commands and pulse-to-tone switchover. The last 40 numbers will not be monitored by toll restriction.
5.21 OUTSIDE
RING ASSIGNMENT
Outside lines are assigned to ring at individual stations by programming. Any station may be programmed to ring for any outside line(s) during the Day and/or Night Mode, both or neither.
5.22 PAUSE TIMER When dialing a speed number, a timed pause

between digit sending can be placed in the number. The length of this pause can be programmed in the system database.
6. STATION FEATURES 6.01 ADD ON CONFERENCE

Three internal stations can engage in a conference.
5.23 PBX DIAL CODES

system will allow 5 one- or two-digit access codes to be entered into memory. When one of these codes is dialed, this signals the KSU that toll restriction is to be applied at the next dialed digits after the code. If one of these codes is not dialed, toll restriction does not apply. This allows the dialing of extensions 100, 110, 111, etc. NOTE: The line must be marked as PBX and toll restriction must be enabled. 100-5
6.02 AUTOMATIC SELECTION

The select an outside line, an intercom station, or speed bin and the telephone in the dialing mode without lifting the handset or pressing the Monitor button.
6.03 BACKGROUND MUSIC

Key telephone users may receive over their speakers when an optional music source is connected to me system. system-wide in programming.
ENCORE CX 8 1 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES
6.04 CALL ANNOUNCE PRIVACY Each telephone user can set their intercom signaling switch to receive intercom call announcements without having the calling party hear any conversations in progress.
6.11 DO NOT DISTURB

Placing a in DND will eliminate incoming outside line ringing, intercom calls, transfers and paging announcements. A ringing station may go into DND to silence that ring. The attendant can override a station in DND. station in DND can use the telephone to make normal outgoing A station can be denied this feature through programming.
6.05 CALL PARK

An outside line can be placed into one of 6 parking locations ahd can be retrieved by any station that has a direct line appearance or an available loop button. Parked calls have their own recall timer and will recall the originating station and then, if unanswered, the attendant.
6.12
HOLD
When a line is placed on exclusive hold, no other station in the system can retrieve this call.
6.06 CALL TRANSFER

An outside line can be transferred from one phone to another by using the TRANS button and dialing the station number, or by just pressing the stations DSS button if one is assigned at that phone. Unscreened transfers or screened transfers with an announcement can be made. The receiving the transfer receives a repeated ring and exclusive hold flash on that line. Several attempts can be made to find someone at different without losing the call. If a line is transferred to a busy station, that station will receive muted ringing.
6.13 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY TRANSFER

There are 4 sets of Executive/Secretary pairings available. When the executive station is busy or in DND, the secretary station will receive intercom calls
and transfers. The secretary station can signal the executive in DND by using the Call Wait feature. 6.14 KEY
Provides telephone users with the ability to terminate an outside call or transfer a call behind a PBX and restore dial tone without hanging up the handset.
6.07 CALL
A station user may alert a busy party that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them by dialing code
A FLASH button is located on each key telephone. 6.15 FLEXIBLE ASSIGNMENT The buttons on each telephone can be individually programmed. One of 6 operations can be selected for each button: 1. Outside line automatically access assigned line. 2. automatically signal assigned station and provide BLF for off-hook and DND. 3. Feature a feature with a dialing code can be assigned a button. 4. Speed dii automatically dial a speed number (system or station). 5. Line group access some or all outside lines can be grouped; pressing this button accesses the highest numbered unused CO line in that group. used to answer a transferred call on a 6. . . . line for which a user does not nave a assigned.
A CALL WAIT button can be programmed under one of the flexible buttons; then the station user can
just press this button to signal a call wait. The busy party will receive a muted ring and flashing HOLD button to notify them a call is waiting for them.
They can answer by pressing the HOLD button. 6.08 DIRECT SELECTION A user with DSS buttons assigned at phone can call another station by pressing the desired DSS button. 6.09 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP A station can pick up an intercom or outside line call ringing on a specific unattended station. 6.10 DISPLAY CAPABILITIES
An optional ECX display phone gives the user visual indication of call status. Calls to/from other stations, number dialed and call waiting are among the features displayed.
100-6
6.16 GROUP CALL PICKUP

Stations can be placed in one or more of 4 pickup groups. Stations within the same group can pick up tone ringing intercom calls or transferred outside line calls for another station.
6.20 LAST NUMBER

Permits the automatic redialing of the last telephone number dialed on an outside line. Up to 32 digits can be stored. Outside line selection is automatic.
6.21 MEET ME PAGE 6.17 HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK

Each telephone user can set the intercom signaling switch to receive intercom call announcements and respond to these announcements handsfree by simply speaking in a normal tone of voice. Users may answer a page call from any phone in the system by dialing a special code. The party who initiated the page must remain off-hook.
6.22 MESSAGE WAITING

Stations that are unattended or in DND can left a message indication by other stations in the system. Up to 5 messages can be left at one Upon return to the station, the user can press the flashing CALL BACK button to ring each party leaving a message in sequential order.
6.18 HOLD RECALL

When an outside call has been on hold for a programmable length of time, recall ringing tone is sent to the station placing the call on hold. If this station does not answer the recall, a recall tone is sent to the attendant.
6.23 MESSAGE
REMINDER TONE
6.19 INTERCOM
SELECT
A station with a message waiting can be reminded at a timed interval with a tone.
Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals. A convenient slide switch is located on each key telephone for easy selection. The choices are: 1. Tone Ringing (TN) A standard tone notifies the party of an incoming intercom call. The party answers by lifting the handset or sliding switch to HF or pressing MONITOR.
2.
6.24
CONFERENCE
One internal station can engage in a conference with 2 outside parties.
6.25 ON-HOOK
The key telephone user can place calls without lifting the receiver. If the speakerphone is disabled, the receiver must be to converse.
Privacy (PV) The station user receives a burst of tone and a voice announcement over speaker. The microphone is deactivated for privacy. The called party must lift the handset to answer the call. (Or switch the selector to handsfree HF) Handsfree (HF) The station user, upon hearing tone burst and reply voice announcement over the speaker, handsfree.
6.26 PAGING
There are 4 types of paging available: External, Internal, All Call, and All Call. There are 1 external zone and 2 internal zones dialing code. available. Paging requires a
3.
6.27 PAGING ACCESS RESTRICTION

A station of page. be denied the ability to make any type
100-7
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER
6.28 PRE-SELECTED MESSAGES

Each key telephone can select a pre-assigned message to be displayed on the LCD of the telephone calling that station. There are 10 possible messages which can be left: OUT TO LUNCH ON VACATION OUT OF OFFICE BACK AM OUT OF OFFICE BACK PM OUT OF OFFICE BACK TOM OUT OF OFFICE- BACK UNKN OUT OF TOWN IN A MEETING AT HOME AT BRANCH OFFICE
6.32 SAVE NUMBER

Any number dialed on an outside line can be saved permanently to be used at any time.
6.33 STATION CALL FORWARD

Each key telephone user may direct intercom and CO calls to be forwarded to another station in the system. 6.34 STATION SPEED DIAL Each station user can program up to 20 frequently to 24 digits in length. dialed numbers of Pauses, flash and pulse-to-tone switchover take up digit spaces. Numbers are dialed by use of the access code. SPEED button and a Speed bin 00 can be used to program the users name so that it appears on calling/called display telephones instead of station number. 6.35 SYSTEM HOLD line is placed on system hold, any station in the system with access to that line can retrieve the call. 6.36 SPEAKERPHONES
6.29 PRESET
FORWARD
The system can be programmed so that incoming calls from outside lines, which are programmed to ring a particular station, can be forwarded to another station predetermined in programming if the original station does not answer. Preset forward can be chained up to a maximum of stations. Each station in the system can have a preset forward station.
6.30 QUEUING
When all the outside lines in a group are busy, stations can be placed in queue awaiting a line in the same group to become available. Users are signaled when the line is available. If a station doesnt answer the queue signal within 15 seconds, that station is dropped from the queue. 6.31 RINGING PREFERENCE A station with ringing tine Can assigned ringing outside line by simply handset or pressing the monitor button.
Each key telephone is equipped with a. speakerphone. However, the speakerphone can be programmed to work in one of 3 ways: Normal speakerphone operation. for outgoing calls and incoming CO 2. on intercom allowed. calls but handsfree 3. Disabled to allow headset operation.
the
ENCORE CX
816
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2 . NOVEMBER 1988
7. FEATURE INDEX
Feature Alarm Signaling Paging All Attendant Position Automatic Hold Background Music Automatic Privacy Automatic Pause Insertion Battery Backup (Memory) Battery Backup (System) Call Forward Group Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Transfer Call Wait (Camp-On) Outside Line Grouping Outside Line Ring Assignment Line Group Queuing Call Park Conference Loud Bell Control Dial Signaling Page Access Restriction Pulse-to-Tone Switchover Direct Station Select Automatic Line Select Do Not Disturb Emergency Transfer Hunt Groups Exclusive Hold Executive/Secretary Transfer External Paging flash Flexible Buttons Hold Preference Intercom Signaling Switch Internal Zone Paging Meet Me Page Message Waiting Music On Hold Mute Key On-Hook Dialing Last Number Night S-Standard Availability Internal Equipment Required N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N External Equipment Required System N N N Music Source N N N Battery Pkg. N N N N N N N N N N Bell/Ring Gen . N N N N N N N N N Paging Equip. N N N N N N N Music Source N N N N I
i
0 S S S S S S
S S S S
S S S S S S S
SECTION 100 ISSUE 2 , NOVEMBER 1988
7. FEATURE INDEX
Feature Preset Call Forward PBX Dialing Codes Ringing Line Answer Private tine Save Number Redial SMDR Speakerphone System Hold Real Time Clock System Speed Dial Station Speed Dial Toll Restriction Messages Wall Telephone Availability S S S S S S S S Internal Equipment Required N N N N N SIU + RCU + PM2 N N RCU Unit + PM2 N N N N N External Equipment Required N N N N N Printer N N LCD Phone N N N LCD Phone N
100-l 0
ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER 1988
SECTION 100
8. FEATURES AND BENEFITS 8.1 SYSTEM FEATURES FEATURE ALARM DESCRIPTION An external alarm device may be connected to the system to signal an condition to all stations programmed to receive this signal. When a line has been left on hold for a programmable period of time, the station placing that line on hold will be recalled. If that station doesnt answer, the call will revert to the attendant. If a flash command is placed into system and station speed dial numbers, a pause is automatically inserted after the flash. One is also inserted after a PBX dialing code has been used. Through programming, privacy is automatically provided on all calls. feature can be disabled. A long-life lithium battery is provided in the KSU to retain the system database in case of power outage or system power being turned off. An optional Battery Backup Unit (BBU) can be directly connected to the KSU to provide full system operation in case of a commercial power outage. Through programming, each station is allowed or denied access to particular outside lines. Outside lines can be placed in one of 8 groups. Stations are then individually assigned access to these lines and given the ability to dii on particular lines. Each outside line can be programmed for either pulse or DTMF signals. BENEFITS Can be used as notification that someone has entered the premises. Used for either business purposes or as a security measure. Assures that a calling party is not forgotten or forced to wait too long without word on the status of his or her call. Guarantees that the PBX will have time after a flash command or dialing code to get ready to process subsequent digits. If one station is using an outside line or intercom, another station cannot intrude on that call. No one can interrupt or overhear your calls. Memory of functions is not lost even in the event that power is or a turned off, the KSU is power failure occurs. The entire system will keep functioning even if commercial power goes off. A money-saving tool which allows management to determine who can use which lines. Allows similar lines to be grouped together and helps speed the ability of a station to make outside calls. Offers the convenience and speed of DTMF dialing for systems handling heavy traffic, as well as pulse dialing where needed..
ATTENDANT RECALL
AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION
AUTOMATIC PRIVACY
BATTERY BACKUPMEMORY BATTERY BACKUPSYSTEM CO ACCESS CO GROUPS
MIXED USE OF AND DTMF SIGNALS
100-l 1
ENCORE CX 8 16 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FEATURES
8.1 SYSTEM FEATURES (CONTD) DESCRIPTION DIALING PRIVILEGES The system provides a flexible means of providing toll or dialing restriction through the assignment of class of service to both station and outside lines. BENEFITS A cost saving feature. Permits a customer to decide who can make long distance calls to specific area/off ice code locations.
EMERGENCY TRANSFER
In the event of commercial power failure or central processor failure, the. system will automatically connect the first 3 outside lines to 3 predetermined single line telephones (2500 or 500 type). A flash can be programmed within a speed dii number. A pause is automatically inserted before remaining digits are sent. Any key telephone in the system may be assigned as the attendant station. This station will receive attendant recalls and can place the system into Night Service by pressing DND. This allows either exclusive or system hold to be programmed as the primary hold. When an intercom call or transferred outside line Is sent to the pilot number of a hunt group, the system will search sequentially an idle number in that hunt group and will ring that station. Relay-controlled contacts are provided to control external signaling devices to follow the ringing pattern of any station. The system can be placed into night service. This allows designated stations to ring at night that may or may not ring on those lines during the day. Any station can the system into and release it from night service.
Offers economical alternative to full system battery backup. Insures receipt and placement of important calls during periods of commercial power outage. Aids in accessing features when behind a or
FLASH WITH SPEED DIAL
FLEXIBLE ATTENDANT
Allows any station in the system to be designated as the attendant.
HOLD PREFERENCE
Gives the user the choice of which type of hold will be implemented on the first depression of the HOLD button. If a customer is calling anyone in a particular the system can try ail phones in that department until an idle one is found. Allows the installation of a device for high noise or outside areas to hear the telephone ringing. Reduces number of before and after business hours. Allows employees working after business hours to receive telephone calls.
HUNT GROUPS
LOUD BELL CONTROLS
NIGHT TRANSFER
100-l 2
8.1 SYSTEM FEATURES (CONTD) FEATURE OUTSIDE LINE RING ASSIGNMENT PAUSE TIMER DESCRIPTION Outside lines are assigned to ring at individual stations by programming. Any station may be programmed to ring for any outside line(s) during Day or Night Mode. When dialing a speed number, a timed pause in digit sending can be placed in the number. The length of this pause can be programmed. 5 one- or two-digit access codes can be entered into memory. When one of these codes is dialed, this signals the KSU that toll restriction is to apply at the next dialed digit after the code. If one of these codes is not dialed, toll restriction does not apply. , The system can change the signaling on an outside line from dial pulse to tone. An optional unit which allows Executive telephones with LCD to have time and date displayed. An external printer or call accounting device can be installed to provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls. (optional) BENEFITS Any line can be programmed to ring on any station during the day and/or night, both or neither. Allows the use of a pause in speed dialing for use behind a PBX, or in accessing special services. Allows PBX users to more exactly determine when toll restriction is to be applied and not confuse the dialing of extensions beginning with 1 with long distance calls. Allows dialing of PBX extensions 100, 111, 110, etc. Allows the use of common carriers and other services behind a dial pulse line. Allows system time and date current in the event of a power failure. This is a cost saving feature. Allows you to keep track of which stations are making and receiving calls as well as the telephone numbers of the locations being called. Also records duration of . calls. Increases productivity by eliminating time wasted on looking up and dialing frequently called numbers common to the entire system.
PBX DIAL CODES
PULSE-TOTONE SWITCHOVER REAL TIME CLOCK SMDR
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Up to 80 commonly numbers can be programmed into system speed for use by stations allowed this feature. The 40 numbers not be monitored by toll restriction.
100-13
SECTION 100
ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER
ENCORE
STATION FEATURES FEATURE ADD ON CONFERENCE ALERT TONE DESCRIPTION Permits you to establish a conference with 2 other internal stations. Provides an audible signal to the called party that a voice call or page will immediately follow. The user can select an outside line, an intercom station or speed dial bin and automatically place the telephone in the dialing mode without lifting the handset or pressing the MONITOR button. Allows a station to determine at a glance if the person they wish to call is busy or not. Each telephone user can set the intercom signal switch to receive one-way intercom call announcements the handset must be lifted or signal switch moved to HF to respond. You can place an outside line in one of 6 parking locations and it can be retrieved by any station in the system. An outside call can be transferred from one station to another within the system. The transferred call will ring at the receiving station even though it is not normally programmed to do so. A station user may alert a busy party that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them. The user with DSS buttons assigned at his or her key telephone can call intercom station by simply pressing the appropriate DSS button. The called station is automatically signaled. BENEFITS Saves time and ensures information is received and understood. Notifies a station that an intercom voice call or a page call will follow immediately. Simplifies the making of calls by having the user press only one key to access an outside line, an intercom station or speed dial bin. Saves time and prevents busy signal irritation. You can receive call announcements but not allow the calling party to hear private conversations in progress. Call park has a separate timer which allows these calls to be placed on hold longer and then be retrieved at any station. Expedites efficient call handling.
AUTOMATIC SELECTION
BUSY STATUS ON DSS BUT-TONS CALL ANNOUNCE PRIVACY
CALL PARK
CALL TRANSFER
CALL
Allows a busy user to be notified of and handle a 2nd caller and still provide professional courteous to both Allows rapid handling of calls.
DIRECT STATION SELECT
ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1988
SECTION 100
8.2 STATION FEATURES FEATURE DIRECTED CALL PICKUP DISPLAY CAPABILITIES DESCRIPTION
A station can pick up an intercom or
BENEFITS Enables quick response by another station to calls that might otherwise be unanswered. Allows stations equipped with the LCD feature to receive special messages, call status indication, and the convenient date and time display. Ensures your business meeting or other activity will not be interrupted by a phone call. Ensures that no one else can pick up a call you placed on hold, so you wont lose the call. Allows busy executives to have their calls automatically transferred to designated to take messages. Allows you to terminate a call on an outside line without losing that line so another call can be placed. Allows each user to customize his/her own phone based on individual needs and calling patterns. Enables you to answer a call to any unattended station from your own phone without knowing the extension number of the ringing phone. Frees your hands to do other while talking on the telephone. Assures that a caller is neither forgotten nor made to wait on hold too long without a response. Improves your companys image to customers.
outside line call ringing on a unattended station.
Visual indication of call status is provided. Calls to and from other extensions, number dialed, line used and call waiting are among the features displayed. The LCD also displays time, date and other call processing information. (optional) Eliminates incoming outside line ringing, intercom calls, transfers and paging announcements. When a line is placed on exclusive hold, no other station in the system can retrieve the call. Executives can have an assigned secretary station(s) receive intercom calls and transfers when they are busy or in DND. Provides you with the ability to terminate an outside call and restore dial tone without hanging up the phone. Each key telephone user can have individually programmed buttons. 6 operations are possible: outside line, feature key, speed dii, loop, Stations can be placed in one or more of 4 pickup groups. Stations in the same group can pick up tone ringing intercom or transferred calls for another station. intercom Each telephone user can set signal switch to receive call ments and respond handsfree by simply speaking in a normal tone of voice. When an outside call has been on hold .for a programmable length of time, a recall tone is sent to the originating station. If unanswered by this station, the attendant is recalled.
DO NOT DISTURB EXCLUSIVE HOLD EXECUTIVE/ SECRETARY TRANSFER KEY
FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
GROUP CALL PICKUP
HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK
HOLD RECALL
100-l 5
ENCORE CX 816 SYSTEM
AND FEATURES
8.2 STATION FEATURES (CONTD)

r I
FEATURE INTERCOM SELECT NUMBER
DESCRIPTION There are 3 types of signals available to key telephone users: tone ringing, privacy (announce only), and handsfree answerback. automatic redialing of the last telephone number you dialed.
BENEFITS Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals. Puts control in the called partys hands. Eliminates time-consuming redialing. Allows you to redial the last outside line and number you dialed by depressing 2 keys instead of dialing a 7-16 digit number. Allows a paged party to respond quickly to a page call. You can respond using any phone in the system. A time saving feature. Eliminates the need to repeatedly call a station or leave a pink slip; the station you called can call you back when free.
MEET ME PAGE
Users may answer a page call from any phone in the system by dialing a special code. If you try to call another internal station but no one answers, you may leave a Message Waiting request. The called party will be signaled and they can return your call when they return or become available. Allows you to call 1 outside and 1 internal party or 2 outside parties and connect them for a conference. The key telephone user can place calls without the receiver. 2 internal and 1 external paging zones are available.
MESSAGE WAITING
MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE ON-HOOK DIALING PAGING
Saves time and expense of callbacks and allows immediate handling of urgent business. Leaves your hands free for other Enables rapid location of personnel on the premises, and restricts announcements so that unconcerned areas are not diiturbed. Limits who can make pages; can allow only certain to make them. Expedites outside calling by enabling the system to automatically select the first available outside line in group for you.
PAGING ACCESS RESTRICTION POOLED ACCESS
A station can be denied the ability to make any type of page. An idle outside line can be automatically seized a pool of outside lines without selecting a specific line.
8.2 STATION FEATURES (CONTD) FEATURE PRESELECTED MESSAGES DESCRIPTION If you are going to be out of your office, you can leave one of 10 special messages to be displayed on internal callers LCD phones. Incoming outside lines which are programmed to ring at a particular station can be programmed to forward to another station if the first station doesnt answer. Allows you to wait for a particular outside line group that is busy to become free. Your phone will ring as soon as a line in the desired line group is available. Allows a station to answer any assigned ringing outside line by simply lifting the handset or pressing the MONITOR button. Allows you to save an outside number you just dialed and have had difficulty reaching. This number can be at your request even if you make other BENEFITS
A l l o w s you to notify callers (with
LCD displays) of your whereabouts. Allows for a backup attendant if
PRESET CALL FORWARD
the original attendant is busy or

has to leave her station. Helps prevent unanswered calls and annoyed callers.
QUEUING
Enables a station user to proceed

with other work while waiting for a busy outside line to become available Helps maximize use of available lines. Provides one-step operation by
RINGING PREFERENCE SAVE NUMBER
allowing the user to answer the

telephones without manually selecting the ringing line.
Increases productivity by eliminating time wasted on

digit
in between.
STATION CALL FORWARD Enables you to forward all intercom and CO calls to another station.
Reduces the number of lost calls, lost messages and callbacks.
STATION SPEED DIAL
You can store 20 frequently dialed personal numbers in the telephones memory. At your request, the desired number will be automatically dialed. Each key telephone is equipped with a speakerphone which can be programmed to work in one of 3 ways: normal, handsfree only, headset only. When a line Is placed on system hold, any station that has a direct line appearance can retrieve the call. Permits you to control the level of tones and voice announcements heard through built-in speaker.
Increases productivity by eliminating time wasted on digit dialing of frequently numbers. Frees your hands for other work while talking on the telephone. Allows 2 or more people in one to speak on the speakerphone to an outside party. Allows a line to be put on hold at one station and be picked up at another station where it appears. you to choose a comfortable volume level. This level can be c h a n g e d as desired.
SPEAKERPHONE
SYSTEM HOLD
VOLUME CONTROL
100-l 7
SECTION 100
ENCORE
816 SYSTEMDESCRIPTIONANDFEATURES
9.
PROGRAM MODULE 3
10.3
CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
Program Module 3 (PM-3) software provides a number of new features for the ENCORE CX 816 system. The features described on the following pages are also available in Feature Package V software for ENCORE CX 3672 and 36112 systems.
10. PM-3: STATION FEATURES

The following features are available to key telephone station users.
Permits a station user to forward busy calls, no answer calls, or a combination busy/no answer calls to a designated station or a hunt group pilot number. No answer calls forward when the system-wide no answer answer expires. Intercom calls to stations will forward only when the station Is in tone mode. An Initially ringing CO call cannot forward to a unless the has a direct line appearance for that call. Initially ringing CO calls cannot be forwarded to a hunt group.
10.4 10.1 AUTOMATIC RELEASE OF THE MONITOR BUTTON
CANNED TOLL
EXPANDED
The MONITOR button will turn off automatically after the completion of the following features: call park, callback, call forward, queuing and pre-selected messages. The phone returns to the on-hook condition. This feature functions only if the MONITOR key was used to activate the feature in question.
Canned toll restriction has been expanded to allow access to certain toll free calls and to deny access to certain other calls. The expanded canned toll restriction Is applied to all stations with COS 5. These entries supplement the existing COS 5 tables.
10.2
AUTOMATIC 10.5
l-911 1811 DIAL MEMO
976 411 555
Allows you to save an outside number you have had difficulty reaching (busy or no answer). The system will ring your phone after a programmed time and will the number for you automatically. The Automatic feature uses the Number bin. The system-wide Auto timer is programseconds, and default is mable from seconds. When the timer and the system calls back your phone, your phone for seconds and then cancel, if The feature on the will also cancel if you seize a CO line or original CO line, or if you forward your calls or put your phone in DND. If you are busy when the timer expires, the timer resets and starts again. You must have a direct appearance the CO line, or a loop or pool key, for this feature to be
You can a telephone number into your phones memory as a reminder to yourself to call that number. This can be done you are using the phone, interrupting the call in progress. When your call in progress completed, you can prompt the to the number you stored. feature the Save/Repeat bin, any previously stored Save/Repeat number in the bin will be erased when the Memo feature is used.
10.6
FLASH ON INTERCOM CALLS
The user can terminate calls and pages by the FLASH key of hanging up. tone is returned and another call can be made Immediately. This feature provides a better way of terminating page announcements.
SECTION ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1988
10.7 INTERCOM CALL HOLD You can program a flexible button to allow an intercom call to be put on hold. Only one flexible button may be programmed at each station for intercom hold. In addition, only one intercom may be put on hold at one time.
discern a recalling CO call from a new incoming CO call. The following features are impacted by this change: call park, system hold, exclusive hold, transfer recall. Recall ring tone is now the same as CO Queue Callback ring tone.
11. PM-3: ATTENDANT FEATURES

10.8 ONE-TIME DO NOT DISTURB (DND) 11 Allows you to prevent calls from ringing at your station while youre on a call. Useful when youre having an important conversation and do not wish to be disturbed by ringing. The One-Time DND condition will automatically cancel when you end your call. This feature is not available to Intercom Phone Box users. OUTGOING ACCESS
10.9
PROGRAMMING CODE 72 ON A FLEX KEY
The attendant station can disable CO lines, preventing outgoing CO calls. Useful for removing a faulty line CO lines for important from service, or for use. All stations that can normally make calls on the lines are affected, but incoming calls are not affected. A CO line may be disabled while is being used; when the trunk becomes idle, further outgoing access will be prevented.
You can program code 72 on a flexible key. This speeds access of pre-selected messages. In earlier software versions you could only program a specific message on a flex key. Now you can program the 72 code on a flex key and then dial the code for any desired pre-selected message.
11.2 SELECTING BACKGROUND MUSIC AT AN INTERCOM PHONE BOX FROM THE ATTENDANT STATION The attendant station can turn on background music at an intercom phone box station. In eatiler software versions this could be accomplished only through admin programming.
10.10 PROGRESS TONES ON HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK In handsfree answerback mode (speakerphone type 2) a user can hear a CO party but must the handset to be heard. Wlth earlier software no progress tones are heard when you make an intercom or are programming; nor do you hear intercom dial tone you go off-hook by pressing the monitor button. tones to Program Module 3 software allow you to your
12. PM-3: INTERCOM PHONE BOX FEATURES

12.1 BLOCKING BACKGROUND MUSIC An Intercom box station can block background music using the Do Not Disturb @ND) button. This is true regardless of whether or not DND allowed at
10.11 RECALL RING Recall ring tone has been changed. In earlier software, recall ringing was the same as a new incoming CO call. The change the user to
13. PROGRAM MODULE SOFTWARE

Program Module (PM-3-ENH) software provides new features for the ENCORE CX 408816 system. These new features described on the ing pages are included with the features provided by the Program Module 3 software.
15.2 ADDITIONAL PROGRAMMING CODES The following feature functions can he programmed on a flexible feature button using the assigned programming code. These codes are intended for use by the user of the Enhanced Key or Telephone where a fixed feature does not exist. Monitor 696 693 692 690 691 694 695 699
14.
SYSTEM FEATURES
Call Back Conference Flash Mute Ring Code
The following system feature is available with this software. 14.1 ENHANCED KEY TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY
15.3 TRANSFER SEARCH WITH RECOVERY The existing transfer feature has been improved to allow the search for a station user with of the call the transfer cannot be completed. This feature can also he used with the new Abbreviated Conference feature.
Provides software control which special feature operations necessary for the use of the ENCORE CX Enhanced Key Telephone.
STATION FEATURES
following features are available to key telephone station users when using this software. 15.1 ADDITIONAL DIAL CODES The features below can be initiated using the signed dial codes giving the user an alternate way to use the feature without having or programmed feature buttons for the fixed features.
.
15.4 ABBREVIATED CONFERENCE the fixed on any key telephone to be used to establish an add-on ference. The outside call must be made first. The Transfer Search Recovery feature can also be used in conjunction with this feature albwing easy conference or supervised call set up. Exiting the ferenca in progress permitted but does not albw entry. DIAL CODES
Flash on CO line Call Forward Program Speed Dial Bins Place Message Wait/Callback Return Message Cancel Call Forward DND Dial Speed Dial Bins Program Flexible Buttons Intercom Ring Control
51 53 54 Destination 55 Bin Number 56 57 59 + Bin Number + Flex Btn + Code 699

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION BASIC KEY SERVICE UNIT (KSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 CENTRAL OFFICE INTERFACE BOARD (COB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 ............................... KEY TELEPHONE INTERFACE BOARD 2.4 POWERSUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 2.6 .....................................................
2.
3. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT EXPANSION KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 ADDITIONAL PORT FOR SMDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 DC/DC CONVERTER WITH BATTERY CHARGING BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 ................................. EMERGENCY TRANSFER MODULE 3.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................. BOARD (APL) 3.5 SINGLE UNE RING GENERATOR AND POWER SUPPLY (RGU) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE BOARD (KIBOH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 SINGLE LINE INTERFACE BOARD (SIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 RECEIVER/SENDER MODULE (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 DIRECT STATION SELECT (DSS) CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 AMPLIFIED CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 ENCORE CX 3672 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 ENCORE CX 3672 SOFTWARE WITH LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 SINGLE LINE OPX BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 4. 5. FEATURE INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*... . . . . . . . . ADDITIONAL 3672 FEATURES ADD ON CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5.1 OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5.2 (DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 ................................................. LEAST COST 5.4 ............................................. MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE 5.5 .......................................... OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE 5.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................................... PAGING 5.7 TIME AND DATE PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
101-A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 6.
SINGLE FEATURES CALL PARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 ........................................................... 6.2 CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 DIRECT OUTSIDE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 DIRECT OUTSIDE RINGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 DO NOT DISTURB INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 GROUP CALL PICKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 INTERCOM ................................................... MESSAGE WAITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 PAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 QUEUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 6.14 STATION SPEED DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM SPEED DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 6.17 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECT STATION SELECT (DSS) CONSOLE FEATURES ATTENDANT OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUSY FIELD INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALLING STATION INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAMP-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECT CALL PARK KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECT PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................................. DIRECT STATION 7.8 HUNT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 MAPPING OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 7.11 RELEASE KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7,
6 . 7 7
7 7 7
7 7 7 7 7 7 6 8 8
7.
6 8 8 8 8 8
8 8
8
8 .
6.
8.1 8.2 8.3 9.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS ADDITIONAL 3672 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SINGLE UNE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DSS CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 FEATURE PACKAGE V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
101-B
ENCORE
SECTION ISSUE 3, DECEMBER 1989
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTD.) DESCRIPTION 10. FEATURE PACKAGE V: STATION FEATURES ADDITIONAL SPEED DIAL BINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 AUTOMATIC HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 CALL FORWARD OFF PREMISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 CUSTOM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 DAY/NIGHT OF SERVICE (COS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP OF AN INTERCOM PHONE BOX . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 DISPLAY SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 FORWARDING CALLS TO UCD, HUNT AND VOICE MAIL GROUPS . . . 10.6 LEAST COST ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 10.10 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO THE LCD DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOTE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11 10.12 REMOTE PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 TRUNK GROUP ACCESS ON CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14 UCD AGENT IN/OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16 VOICE MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE 14 14 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 16
11.
FEATURE PACKAGE V: FEATURES 11.1 CUSTOM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 DSS/DLS CONSOLE MAP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORWARDING INCOMING CO CALLS OFF PREMISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 SELECTING BGM AT A PHONE BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 11.4 FEATURE PACKAGE V: SLT FEATURES 12.1 ACCOUNT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 12.2 FEATURE PACKAGE VI (FP6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
12.
13. 14.
SYSTEM FEATURES: PROGRAMMABLE KEY STATION ANNOUNCE TONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 LCR ROUTING FOR TOLL INFORMATION CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2 FLEXIBLE UCD NEW CALL TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 EXPANDED RINGING ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 INTERCOM TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 DISABLE SLT ADD-ON CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6
17 17 18 18
15.
STATION FEATURES: DISPLAY CALLS IN QUEUE FOR UCD GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 15.2 SLT PERSONAL PARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 SLT MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3 15.4 FORCED TONE RINGING INTERCOM CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FIGURES ENCORE CX 3672 KEY SERVICE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONE AND UNIT . . . . . . . . . CONSOLE MAP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.
101-c
SECTION
ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1988

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The ENCORE CX 3672 key telephone system is designed for the medium size business market wlth a maximum.of 36 outside lines and 72 internal telephone stations. The 3672 is a modular, expandable system with all of the same features as the smaller ENCORE CX 816 system. (Alarm is not included in this system). In addition, the 3672 system provides a number of additional features, including DISA, off-hook voice announce, unsupervised to-trunk conference, and capability. Standard 2500 Single Line Telephones can be installed by exchanging key station interface boards to with single line interface boards, allowing 8 replace 8 for each board exchanged. can access most system features, including call pickup, transfer, call park, intercom calling, paging, speed dial, message waiting, call waiting, do not disturb, direct outside line ringing, call forward, and queuing. Customers who are upgrading from the smaller ENCORE CX system will find that their existing ENCORE CX phones can be used in the 3672 system. A Direct Station/Line Selector console is available and can be programmed in 5 different ways for different combinations of stations and trunks. The DSS console also includes such fixed feature buttons as paging, call park, hunt groups, override and call wait. Up to 3 DSS units can be assigned to a station and there is no limit to the number of DSS units in the system other than that each DSS unit uses a key telephone
FIGURE 1. ENCORE CX 3672 KEY SERVICE UNIT
101-l
SECTION 101
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A basic system (required for system operation) must include the following: Basic KSU Enhanced Processor Board (EPB) Key Telephone Interface Board Power Supply (24 volt) DC/DC Converter Optional boards will be discussed later.
2.3 CENTRAL OFFICE INTERFACE BOARD (COB) Interfaces 6 loop start CO/PBX lines and provides for both dial pulse and DTMF signaling. Includes MOV protection circuitry. The board can be removed or inserted with KSU power ON. An in-use LED for each circuit and a switch to take the board out of service for maintenance are provided.
2.4 KEY TELEPHONE INTERFACE BOARD (KIB) Provides interface circuitry for eight electronic key telephones. The board will support ail of the CX key telephone sets. Does not include the capability for off-hook voice announce. The board can be inserted the KSU power ON. An LED (to or removed indicate in-use status) and a switch (to take the card out of are provided. A DSS or Phone Box can be assigned to any one of the circuits.
2.1 BASIC KEY SERVICE UNIT (KSU) The Basic KSU is housed in a wall-mount cabinet that contains card slots for modular boards and associated pre-wired connectors. The KSU provides card slot positions for 18 CO/PBX lines, 32 stations, DC/DC converter, Application module and one Emergency Transfer module.
2.5 POWER SUPPLY 2.2 ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (EPB) This board provides the systems main 16 bit microprocessor and operating memory. It controls ail system activii including switching functions and feature operation. This board houses the Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) generic operating instructions, and Random Access Memory (RAM) for customer data base programming. A lithium battery is included for protection of the RAM memory. An RS-232C connector for data printout, Remote Programming/Maintenance and SMDR is included. The Enhanced Processor Board (EPB) is shipped without software. The capabilities of the board are controlled by the software package installed on it. Refer to Optional Equipment paragraph for available software packages. The EPB replaces obsolete Central Processor Board (CPB). The power supply unit provides the 24 volt power needed for system operation. One power required for the Basic KSU and one additional power supply is required for the Expansion KSU. Both units plug into the Basic KSU.
2.6 DC/DC CONVERTER A modular unit that converts the 24 VDC power into VDC and 14 VDC system operating voltages. .The unit also provides LED voltage indicators, test points and adjustments, as well as input jacks for MOH sources with level adjustments.
101-2
ENCORE
SECTION ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER
FIGURE 2. ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONE AND
WITH DISPLAY UNIT
SECTION 101
3.1 EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT The Expansion KSU is housed in a wall mount cabinet lines, and contains card slots for 18 stations and emergency transfer module. power supplies must be installed in the Basic KSU.
3.5
BOARD (APL)
Provides for Direct Inward System Access (DISA), unsupervised line-to-line conferences and 2 external and unsupervised conpage ports. A total of 3 ferences are supported simultaneously by this board. Two DTMF receivers and 2 DTMF senders are and a limited number of included to support single line telephones.
3.2 ADDITIONAL
PORT FOR SMDR
RING GENERATOR AND 3.6 SINGLE POWER SUPPLY (RGU) This unit is mounted to the Basic KSU and provides ringing and message wait power for single line telephones. One unit is required for each system equipped single line telephones.
This module mounts on the Application Board and provides a second connector. This tor may be used to output SMDR data while the standard is used for system printout.
3.3 DC/DC CONVERTER WITH BATTERY CHARGING BOARD (BCB) May be installed instead of the standard DC/DC converter and provides constant voltage charging for external GEL-TYPE batteries. During commercial power failure, full system operation is maintained monitors without dropping connected calls. battery discharge during a commercial power outage to prevent battery damage due to A tone emitting unit will sound an audible alert tone to warn the customer that their system is running on stand-by power and to restore commercial power before the batteries are discharged and the system is out of service.
3.7 OFF-HOOK VOICE
BOARD
Provides Interface for 8 electronic key telephones. This board will support ENCORE CX key telephones. Any telephone (except the &Button Model) by board may be programmed for off-hook voice announce. Used In place of board. 3.8 SINGLE LINE INTERFACE BOARD (SIB) Provides interface for 8 single fine telephones. Single line interface boards and key telephone interface boards are interchangeable within the 3672 system. Both standard DTMF and message waiting DTMF single llne telephones may be used.
3.4 EMERGENCY TRANSFER MODULE Provides automatic direct cut-through of 6 In of CO/PBX lines to 6 commercial power failure. The single line may may not be intercom stations. If they are not Intercom stations then the 3672 system does not require any equipment. There can be 2 units: one into the Basic KSU and one plugs into the Expansion KSU. Each unit also contains 1 loud control contact rated at 1 amp 24 v.
3.9 RECEIVER/SENDER MODULE (RSM) This module into the Appliiion Board and 4 receivers and 1 additional DTMF sender to support single line telephones and The system can have a maximum ratio of 1 DTMF receiver for every 24
101-4
SECTION 1 0 1
3.10 DIRECT
SELECT (DSS) CONSOLE
3.12
ENCORE CX 3872
console that provides for Fully modular direct one-button access to 36 stations and 12 fled feature buttons. Two units can be connected to provide access to 72 stations. The DSS station buttons can also be programmed for direct line access for lines l-36. Up to 3 DSS units can be associated with a key telephone.
Since the Enhanced Processor Board is shipped software, software must be ordered separately. Basic 3672 software (2996300) does not include Least Routing (LCR).
3.13 ENCORE CX 3672 SOFTWARE WITH LCR This software CX 3672 features provides all basic ENCORE Least Cost Routing (LCR).
3.11
CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD
The Amplified Central Office Board (COB-A) is an optional card that is installed in place of the standard COB. It enhances audio and is recommended for and multi-line conference applications. The COB-A board should not be used in ENCORE CX 3672 systems installed behind because of possible feedback.
3.14 SINGLE UNE OPX BOARD
The OPX board provides 4 FCC registered single line interface ports. This enables the use of 4 off-premise telephone sets. When an OPX is installed, the maximum number of stations in the system is reduced by four.
4. FEATURE INDEX
SECTION 101
5. ADDITIONAL 3672 FEATURES

5.1 ADD ON CONFERENCE Four internal and 1 external (or 5 internal) stations can engage in a conference.
5.6 OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE (OHVA) This optional feature allows a station to contact a key telephone user currently talking on the phone. Two simultaneous conversations would be conducted on the same telephone. A warning tone provided before the voice cut through. This feature is programmable per station and requires that each station board. receiving OHVA be installed on a
5.2 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE The attendant may ring a station that is in DND by pressing the Override button on the DSS console. The attendant can also voice announce to a busy OHVA station that is set in the privacy or tone ringing (TN) mode. 5.7 PAGING There are 5 types of paging available: external, internal, all call, external all call and all call. There are 2 zones and 4 internal zones available. dialing code. Access to Paging requires a paging is programmable. The 2 page ports require the APL card.
5.3
(DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS)
Allows as many as three outside line positions to be used by outside callers to dial directly into the system without the intervention of an attendant. callers can choose to access and dial out on outgoing trunks or dial directly to stations that have a llne appearance or a loop button assigned. If a caller attempts to call a station that is busy, he/she will be able to dial other stations without having to dial into the system again. A security code can be assigned to restrict uncircuits. Each line can wanted use of the be programmed independently for night or 24 hour use. The APL card is required to provlde
5.6 TIME AND DATE PROGRAMMING The first attendant can change the system date and time via the feature code 299.
5.9UNSUPERVISEDCONFERENCE The conference initiator can exit a conference with 2 outside parties and leave then in an unsupervised conference. The can the conference at any time. A programmable timer will conference if the initiator disconnect the does not A maximum of 3 conferences can take place at one time. Requires APL board.
5.4 LEAST COST ROUTING This is a cost saving feature which the most economical programmed route for an outgoing call.
6. SLT FEATURES
5.5 MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE One internal station can engage in a conference 2 outside patties. 6.1 CALL PARK
the SLT to consult with another internal station and/or transfer the call.
ENCORE
8.2 CALL WAIT
6.8 GROUP CALL PICKUP Tone ringing intercom calls and transferred outside line calls can be picked up by single line telephones by dialing a special pickup code. The telephones must be in the same pickup zone.
A busy station can be notified (by a beep tone) that an outside line is on hold and wafting for them. Single line phones can receive a call wait or they can initiate one by using an access code.
6.3 CONFERENCE An SLT user can a conference with an outside line and another station. The outside party must be connected first.
6.9 INTERCOM can make and receive intercom calls.
6.10 MESSAGE WAITING 6.4 DIRECT OUTSIDE ACCESS or in DND can have up to An SLT which is busy, 5 message waiting indications left for them.
Single line telephones can access outside lines by dialing 88 and the line number or by the CO line group access codes 9 or 81-86.
6.11 MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION Message waiting single line telephones may be connected to the system. The lamp will flash when a message has been left at that station.
6.5 DIRECT OUTSIDE
RINGING
Single line telephones can be set up to receive outside line.ringing. Maximum is one line per SLT. . 6.12 PAGING 6.6 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP Tone ringing intercom calls and outside line calls to specific stations can be picked up by single line telephones. For this kind of pickup, the stations do not have to be in the same pickup group. internal and external paging zones can be accessed by Specific stations may be disallowed paging in programming. External paging requires the APL card.
6.13 QUEUING 6.7 DO NOT DISTURB @ND) Each telephone user can be allowed to place their error phone in Do Not Disturb. The user tone if they are not allowed this feature. They also receive a warning tone when lifting the handset to remind them they are in Do Not Disturb. The a station in DND. attendant can can be in a queue to wait for the first outside line in a group to become available.
6.14
SPEED DIAL
Each telephone may program up to individual speed dial numbers. Each speed dial number can be up to 24 digits in length. There are a total of 640 speed locations to be among the phones: therefore a system with a full 72 stations will not be numbers to all stations. able to allocate
101-7
SECTION 1 0 1
6.15 SYSTEM SPEED
7.5 CAMP-ON (CALL WAIT) The DSS has a Camp-On key, enabling the attendant to notify a busy station that a call is waiting for them.
Each station user can be programmed for access system speed numbers. The last system speed numbers override toll restriction. Requires APL board.
7.6 DIRECT CALL PARK KEYS 6.16 TRANSFER Outside lines may be transferred by or to Transfers can be either announced or unannounced. The DSS has 3 Call Park keys, allowing the attendant to park up to 3 incoming calls by pressing a key.
7.7 DIRECT PAGE 6.17 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) When outside lines are marked UNA and the system is placed into night service, an SLT can answer incoming calls on lines it does not normally have access to. An external ringing device must be provided. The attendant can make an internal, external or system all call page by pressing 1 key. Automatically puts an outside caller on hold.
7.8 DIRECT STATION
7. DIRECT STATION SELECT (DSS) CONSOLE FEATURES

7.1 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE
The DSS attendant can make an intercom voice call to any key phone in the system. Automatically puts an outside call on hold while making an intercom call, Also allows an attendant to transfer an intercom or outside call on to an internal station.
The DSS console provides an Override key which allows the attendant to ring a station in DND. 7.9 HUNT GROUPS 7.2 ATTENDANT SEARCH (SERIAL An attendant can make a series of intercom calls without hanging up. Intercom connection is to another station whenever a DSS key is and the previous intercom is The DSS provides 3 hunt keys, the attendant to place a call to a hunt group by pressing a button.
7.10 MAPPING OPTIONS a. b. MAP 36 appear in sequential order. MAP 2, stations 136-l 71 appear in sequential order. MAP 3, CO appear in sequent&l order. MAP 4, stations appear in sequential order. Available only 36112 MAP 5, CO l-24 and 24 Requires Feature Package V Software.
7.3 BUSY LAMP FIELD
INDICATORS
Each station key on the DSS a corresponding LED which shows a stations status. The LED is busy, unlit if idle and flashing in DND.
7.4
STATION INDICATION
7.11 RELEASE KEY Allows the attendant to disconnect calls hook, speeding up call handling time.
The LED next to a calling stations key rapidly on the DSS, showing the attendant who is calling.
ENCORE
8. FEATURES AND BENEFITS 8.1 FEATURE ATTENDANT OVERRIDE 3672 FEATURES DESCRIPTION attendant may override a busy station in the PV or TN intercom mode or a station in DND. An outside caller may directly into the ENCORE CX system without attendant intervention and gain access to stations and outgoing trunks. BENEFITS attendant to inform a busy Station of an important waiting for them. Allows users to access such system features as WATS lines from remote locations. Saves additional expense of credit card from an employees home. Allows direct calls to a station when an is on the road. Enables rapid location of personnel on the premises, and restricts public announcements so unconcerned areas are not disturbed. Saves time and callbacks.
PAGING
There are 2 external zones and 4 internal zones. The 2 external zones require the optional APL card. There is also External Call, Internal All Call and System All Call. 4 internal and 1 external, or 5 internal stations, can engage in a conference. One internal station can engage in a conference with 2 outside A third person may contact a key telephone user currently talking on the phone. A warning tone is provided to voice cut-through.
The conference initiator can exit a conference with 2 outside parties and
ADD ON CONFERENCE CONFERENCE OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE

UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE
Saves time and expense of callbacks and allows immediate handling of urgent business, Allows the station user to converse with another internal calling party while off-hook on a call. The conference initiator does not have to be in the conference for it to continue a secretary could initiate a conference and then exit it so 2 outside parties can be allowed to continue talking after the initiator has hung up.
leave them connected together in an conference. (Requires APL card.) A warning tone will alert the parties before the call is automatically terminated.
SECTION 101
8.2 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES
FEATURE CALL WAIT (CAMP ON)
DESCRIPTION A busy station can be notified that an outside line is on hold and waiting for can also initiate cal! wait. them. An SLT can initiate a conference with 1 outside call and 1 internal party. can directly access idle outside line groups. can be set to receive outside line ringing. Intercom calls and outside line calls to specific stations can be picked up by a single line telephone.
BENEFITS Provides user with the choice of waiting off-hook for a internal party to become free: eliminates the need to call back repeatedly. Saves time and costly callbacks.
CONFERENCE DIRECT OUTSIDE UNE ACCESS DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE RINGING DIRECTED CALL PICKUP
Provides quick and efficient access to outside lines. Cost saving feature. A key station does not have to be installed to receive outside line ringing. Enables quick response to calls that would remain unanswered.
DO NOT DISTURB
Each SLT user can be allowed to place their telephone in DND. A warning tone will be received each time the handset is lifted as a reminder that phone is in DND. Intercom calls and transferred outside line calls can be picked up by in the same pickup group by dialing a special pickup code.
Ensures that your business meeting or other activity will not be interrupted by phone calls.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
There is only 1 pickup code to remember. Enables you to answer a call to an unattended station from your own phone. Enables quick response to calls that would otherwise remain unanswered.
101-10
8.2 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES (CONTD)

FEATURE INTERCOM CALLING calls. DESCRIPTION can make and receive intercom BENEFITS An SLT can be used in place of a key telephone in the system. Provides an inexpensive phone alternative in areas where not all lines and features of a key phone are required. Eliminates the need to repeatedly a station; the station you called can call you back when available. Lets you know that someone wishes to talk to you; they do not have to call back repeatedly. Enables rapid location of personnel on the premises. Saves time and expensive callbacks. Saves time because you do not have to keep repeatedly trying a busy line group to see if it is available yet. Increases productivity by eliminating time wasted on continually redialing frequently called numbers. Increases productivity by eliminating time wasted on multi-digit dialing of frequently called numbers common to the entire system. Expedites efficient call handling.
MESSAGE
An SLT which is busy, idle or in DND can have up to 5 messages left for them.
MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION PAGING
Message waiting may be connected to the system. A lamp will flash when a message has been left. All internal and external paging zones if programmed can be accessed by to do so. can be placed in a queue awaiting an outside line in a specific group to become available. Each SLT may program up to 20 individual speed dial numbers. Maximum 640 per system. Each SLT can be programmed to system speed dii numbers. The last 40 system speed dial numbers override toll restriction.
QUEUING
STATION SPEED DIAL
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
TRANSFER
Outside lines may be transferred to or transferred by another station by other stations to an SLT. When outside lines are marked UNA and the system is placed in night an SLT can answer incoming calls by dialing 77.
UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER
Allows any station to answer an incoming call by simply dialing a code.
101-l 1
SECTION 101 ISSUE NOVEMBER
8.3 DIRECT STATION SELECT (DSS) CONSOLE FEATURES FEATURE DIRECT STATION CALLING DESCRIPTION Enables DSS attendant to make an intercom voice call to any station in the system by pressing only 1 button. Also permits attendant to put outside call on hold and simultaneously make intercom call to internal station. Permits attendant to page one of 3 zones with single depression of a button. Attendant can also automatically place an outside call on hold and make a page. Allows attendant to disconnect calls while off-hook and go on to a new call. Permits an attendant to transfer an intercom or outside call which is on hold to an internal station in the system. Allows attempt of one transfer after another simply by pressing another DSS key. Each station appearing on the DSS console has a corresponding indicator which shows whether the station is idle, busy or in DND. 3 direct Call Park keys enable the attendant to park up to 3 incoming calls simply by pressing a single key. The indicator next to the calling stations key will flash rapidly on attendants DSS console. The attendant may signal a station in DND. When a station fails to respond to a hold recall, the recall will automatically revert to the attendant. BENEFITS Allows rapid handling of incoming traffic and avoids the expense of callbacks and annoying no answer for customers.
DIRECT PAGE
Direct page keys simplify the the paging procedure and save the attendant valuable time. Speeds call handling. Simplifies the call transfer process.
RELEASE KEY ATTENDANT SEARCH
INDICATORS
Allows an attendant to see at a glance which stations in the system are busy and to inform the caller immediately and take a Expedites call handling by eliminating the need for attendant to dial multi-digit codes. Allows DSS attendant to see which station in the system is calling and respond immediately. By pressing 1 key the attendant can inform a busy station of an important or emergency call. Assures that a calling party is neither forgotten nor forced to wait too long about his/her calls status.
DIRECT CALL PARK KEYS CALLING STATION INDICATION ATTENDANT OVERRIDE ATTENDANT RECALL
SECTION 2. NOVEMBER
8.3 DSS CONSOLE FEATURES (CONTD) FEATURE CAMP ON DESCRIPTION The DSS console provides a Camp-On key which allows the attendant to notify a busy station of a waiting call by simply pressing a button. The DSS console has 3 keys that enable the attendant to direct incoming calls a particular hunt group by simply pressing a single key. The DSS console may be programmed in one of ways: a. stations 1 W-135 b. stations 136-171 c. lines l-36 d. stations e. lines l-24 and 24 flexible buttons** BENEFITS Expedites call handling by eliminating the need for the multi-digit codes. attendant to Speeds up call processing by eliminating the need for the attendant to dial multi-digit codes. Provides flexibility in the use of DSS consdes.
HUNT GROUPS
MAPPING
l l
36 72 only * Feature Package V only
101-13
SECTION 101
9. FEATURE PACKAGE V
The following additional features are provided by Feature Package V software installed on the Enhanced Processor Board (EPB). Feature Package V also provides all the features available in Program Module 3 (PM-3) in the CX 616 system. See for features. The Central Processor Board (CPB) not support Feature Package V software.
10.4 CUSTOM MESSAGES Up to ten (10) custom messages can be programmed system-wide by the first attendant station. These messages supplement the ten available pre-selected messages. A station user can leave any of the custom be messages on his/her phone. The message displayed on the LCD of an internal party calling that station. Custom messages can contain up to 24 characters.
10. STATION FEATURES (FP5)

10.1 ADDITIONAL STATION SPEED DIAL BINS Feature Package V software expands the total number of available station speed dial bins in the system from 640 to 1260. A station still will be able to store and access a maximum of 20 station speed dial numbers.
10.5 DAY/NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE (COS) Allows stations to have a different COS at night than they have during the day. When the attendant puts the system into night service mode, stations go to their programmed night COS. Prevents the misuse of phones after hours.
10.6 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP OF AN INTERCOM PHONE BOX 10.2 AUTOMATIC HOLD A station user can automatically put one CO call on hold by selecting a second CO line. For if you are talking to outside party A, you can make or answer another outside call by pressing another CO line button. Party A will be put on hold automatically. This system-wide option makes it easier and faster to handle multiple calls. This feature is denied in default. The type of hold (system or exclusive) is determined by the systems Hold Preference. Allows you to pick up an intercom call that has been made to an intercom phone box.
10.7 DISPLAY SECURITY Allows a station user to program a number that not appear on the phones LCD when This feature is in applications where codes must security access codes or The number to be kept is stored in a speed bin.
10.3 CALL FORWARD
OFF PREMISE 10.8 FORWARDING CALLS TO UCD, HUNT AND VOICE GROUPS to forward busy no answer Enables a to a UCD, hunt calls, and both busy/no answer or voice group. Initially ringing CO cannot be forwarded to these groups.
Stations can intercom and transferred CO a calls to an off-premise location. to reroute calls that normally lost: can now be forwarded to home or another off-premise site. ringing CO cannot be forwarded with this feature.
SECTION 101
10.9 LEAST COST ROUTING PRIORITY Allows route entry priorities to be assigned on a per
10.13 TRUNK GROUP ACCESS ON
CALLS
station basis. This allows or disallows specific stations the ability to access certain trunk groups. In LCR admin programming, each trunk group in the route entry of a route list can be assigned a priority number. The highest priority number is 1 and the lowest is 7. Ttiis number, when compared against the stations LCR priority number (specified in station programming), determines whether or not a station can access a trunk group. If the station LCR COS number is higher than or equal to the LCR route priority number, access to that group in that entry is allowed.
callers can now select an outgoing line via a group dial code (9-88) or via an individual line dial code. LCR is not available through DISA. In systems where LCR is activated. callers must dial to access group 1 (instead of dialing 9).
10.14 UCD AGENT IN/OUT
A station user can remove from a group without placing his/her phone in DND. By dialing a special code the station user no longer receives UCD calls but will receive other calls. The code can also be programmed under a flex button. This feature is also available to SLT users.
10.10 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO THE LCD
DISPLAY 10.15 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) In previous software, the letters and could not be programmed into a stations LCD display. Feature Package V software now allows and As its name implies, Uniform Call Distribution is a means of routing an equal number of calls to station in a group. This is accomplished by placing the lest station to receive a call at the end of the groups list. For example, if stations and 3 are in a call group, and 1 handles a call and then hangs up, station 1 is placed at the end of the groups list. Station 2, followed by station 3, will be the next to receive calls. Incoming CO calls, transferred CO and intercom calls can all be routed to a group. Up to eight (8) groups can be in the system. Each group can contain up to (8) An alternate group and an overflow position
11 REMOTE MAINTENANCE
The Remote Maintenance feature allows authorized personnel to survey system and configuration information. This can be done through a modem or data terminal connected to the system EPB the RS-232 port. The commands are entered from the keyboard of the remote terminal device.
10.12 REMOTE PROGRAMMING The Remote Programming feature authorized personnel to the mode via a terminal device (portable terminal or personal computer with package). The feature permits the review and entry of the customer data base in the same manner vie the telephone at extension The terminal device can be connected directly to the RS232 connector on the or can be accessed by a telephone modem linking the RS232 connector (via a CO line) to a remote location. Recorded announcement devices can be assigned to provide up to two (2) The messages are available to all (8) groups.
10.16 VOICE MAIL The voice mail feature automatically handles unanswered calls. Messages can be retrieved by station users directly from the system with no assistance from the attendant. Up to eight (8) voice mail groups can be configured in the system. Each group can contain up to eight voice mail stations, each of which intermail faces with a port on a SIB board. Each can be shared by a number of actual users. Transferred CO calls and intercom calls can be routed to a voice mail group. An optionally mail system must be connected to the ENCORE CX for this feature to be available. The ENCORE CX has special codes assigned, enabling voice mail systems to turn on and off message waiting indication at users stations.
11.4 SELECTING BACKGROUND MUSIC AT AN INTERCOM PHONE BOX The first attendant station can turn on background music at an intercom phone box . No music, music channel 1 or channel 2 can be selected from the attendant station. In earlier software versions this could be accomplished only through admin programming.
12. SLT FEATURES

12.1 ACCOUNT CODES SLT stations can now enter account codes to identify calls for billing/tracking purposes. The account code will be recorded on the SMDR printout.
11.
FEATURES
12.2 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME Permits you to program your name on your SLT station. When a station with a display calls you, your name (not your station number) will appear on the ing stations LCD. Your name is stored in bin 00. This reduces, from 29 to 19, the total number of station bins available to you. speed
11.1 CUSTOM MESSAGES The first attendant station can program up to ten (10) custom messages that are available to station users.
11.2 DSS/DLS CONSOLE MAP A fiih map is now available for the Direct Station Selection Line console. The new map provides 24 fixed CO buttons and 24 flexible buttons. Map 5 is programmed admin, but flexible buttons are programmable by stations. following features cannot be programmed under a flexible button on Map 5: loop button, dial memo, voice mail groups, CO lines, and hold.
11.3 FORWARDING INCOMING CO CALLS OFF PREMISE Allows the first attendant to forward incoming CO calls to an off-premise location. The attendant must have a direct appearance of the CO line to be This feature requires the optional APL card.
FIGURE 3.
MAP 5
101-16
ENCORE
13. FEATURE PACKAGE VI (FP6)

The following feature descriptions are provided by Feature Package VI in addition to features which exist in Feature Package V. This feature package is a composite of all previously described features for PM-l, of the Encore CX 816 system PM-2, and SLT Features defined in section 102. Feature Package VI is offered in the same four versions as Feature Package V. BASIC EPB EPB software package to support the basic system feasystem. ture set for the 2886301 ENCORE CX 1832-3672 EPB SOFTWARE WITH LCR EPB software package to support the basic system feature set for the 1832-3672 system with Least Cost Routing (LCR). ENCORE CX 183236112 BASIC EPB . SOFTWARE (SOFT/361 12). EPB software package to support the bask system feature set for the 183286112 system.
2996303
14. SYSTEM FEATURES: (FP6)

1 4 . 1 PROGRAMMABLE KEY STATION
ANNOUNCE TONE The key telephone intercom announce tones can have three different modes. By default, the standard 3 tone bursts handsfree announce tone is provided. The other two options are 1 tone burst and no tone preceding voice cut-through. This is assigned in administration programming using the FLASH 45 code. It is system wide and cannot be changed by the station user. 14.2 LCR ROUTING FOR TOLL INFORMATION CALLS This feature allows for common call routing for all toll information calls. Both 1 -XXX-555-l 212 and xXx-5551212 calls will be intercepted and sent to a selected information call with route. If determined to be a an area code, the call will be sent to the route list assigned in programming for LCR.
1 4 . 3 FLEXIBLE UCD NEW CALL TIMER
ENCORE CX
ENCORE CX 183286112 SOFTWARE WITH LCR EPB software package to support the basic system feature Cost Routing
The duration of the UCD agent new call timer can be flexibly assigned in programming. At the end of each UCD call, the UCD agent will be idle for the duration of the New Call timer. This allows the agent to access other facilities (such as IN/OUT, DND or make a call) calls again. The timer is before being subject to 37 set in administration programming using is 4 seconds.
1 4 . 4 EXPANDED CO RINGING ASSIGNMENT
These software must be hanced Processor Board Processor Board (CPB, ture Package VI.
on the EnThe Central will not support Fea-
Each CO line may be programmed so that ringing CO calls may be assigned to one of the following destinations: to one or more or to a UCD, Mall, Hunt Group, or to a tern Speed Bin for off-net call
101-17
14.4 EXPANDED CO RINGING
ASSIGNMENT (CONTD) When ringing is assigned to a a direct line appearance or an idle Loop button must be available to receive the call. Station call forwarding of initially ringing CO call is possible and can be directed to other with an available Loop button or direct line appearance. an initially ringing CO call cannot at the destination assigned, it will ring at the first Attendant station. Note: You cannot Station Call Forward an initially ringing CO call to UCD, Voice Mail, or Hunt groups if it is assigned ringing at more than one station. 14.5 INTERCOM TRANSFER Any key telephone station can transfer intercom calls. Many various methods can be performed. Without DSS buttons assigned, by pressing the TRANS button and dialing the station number you can execute a supervised transfer. With DSS buttons you can Express Transfer Intercom calls with Search and Recovery. 14.6 DISABLE SLT ADD-ON CONFERENCE Single line telephone station extensions can have the add-on conference feature disabled. This feature can be used to prevent an undetected conference condition initiated by an automatic attendant. Some automated attendant units, while a call transfer, may to abort the transfer attempt after the called station has answered. This can set up an unwanted add-on conference condition. feature is programmed in the station attributes administration routine (Flash 40). is programmable on a station by station basis.
15. STATION FEATURES: (FP6)

15.1 DISPLAY CALLS IN QUEUE FOR GROUPS There are 2 methods of viewing UCD Group call queue status. In-service agents can see the quantity of calls in queue for their group on the LCD of their station. Any other display set user can dial the code 279 plus the UCD pilot number to view the calls in queue for that group. 15.2 SLT PERSONAL PARK Single line telephones can be connected to 2 outside calls at the same time and between the 2 calls. This can be done with either outgoing or incoming calls. This feature is also used with the SLT line conference feature. 15.3 SLT MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE Single line telephones can initiate a conference between two CO calls. The Personal Park feature is . used with the new CO conference dial code to make this possible. A combination of features are derived these new dial codes (Personal Park, and Multi-line Conference). 15.4 FORCED TONE RINGING INTERCOM CALL A new dial code has been added. code can be dialed in front of a key telephone statbn extension tone ringing intercom calls. This will number to override the destination key telephones Intercom Mode Selector Switch. This is useful when supervised call transfers from automated attendants requiring tone for proper call handling.
ENCORE 36112 FIELD CONVERSION KIT
SECTION 102 ISSUE 1, JULY 1968

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ENCORE CX 36112 Field Conversion Kit (2993505) is designed for the medium-to-large size business market. It supports a maximum of 36 outside lines and internal telephone stations. The Field Conversion Kit includes following: the one Expansion KSU and one power cage. The Expansion KSU is installed in addition to the Basic KSU used in the 3672 system, and replaces the 3672 Expansion KSU. Adding this equipment makes the ENCORE CX 3672 system expandable to an ENCORE CX 36112 system. The 36112 is a modular expandable system with all of the same features as the ENCORE CX 3672 system. All of the peripheral cards in the 3672 are interchangeable 36112. Instead of the Processor Board (CPB) the 36112 uses the Enhanced Processor Board (EPB). Depending on the software ordered and installed separately, the EPB can provide CX 36112 features or 38112 features and Least Cost Routing (LCR). The (Expanded Interface Board) expands intercom the capability from one group of 8 paths to 2 groups of 8 paths, bridges the two intercom groups, and enhances processor capability. Customers who are upgrading from the The Direct Station/Line Selector (DSS) console used in the 3672 system can continue to be used in the 36112 system. An additional map has been added to include the increased number of stations
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION A basic system (required for system include must operation) the following:
Basic KSU (same as 3672) Enhanced Processor Board Expanded Interface Board Central Office Interface Board Key Telephone Interface Board Power Supply (24 volt) Converter 36112 Field Conversion Kit Section 101 discusses all of these units except the Enhanced Processor Board (EPB), Expanded Interface Board and the 36112 Field Conversion Kit.
3672 system will find that their

existing ENCORE CX phones can be used in the 36112 system.
102-l
SECTION 102 ISSUE 1 , JULY 1988
2.1 ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (EPB) AND FOR 36112 FEATURES The Enhanced Processor Board (EPB, Cent rat 2994402) replaces the Processor Board (CPB, 2994401) in the KSU. The EPB is shipped without software. The capabilities of the EPB card are controlled by the software package installed on the card. The software enabling the 36112 features is a PROM chip set (2996302) that is installed on the 36112 Software providing EPB. features and Least Cost Routing (LCR) is also available (2996303). Refer to Section 701 in the Technical Manual for LCR information. 2.2 EXPANDED INTERFACE BOARD The (Expanded Interface Board) is an extension of the processor capabilities. The EIB expands the total number of intercom links in the system from one group of 8 paths to two groups of 8 paths. The EIB connects the 8 intercom paths from the Basic cabinet to slots Switching is allowed between the 2 groups through the In addition, if a business has unusually heavy intercom use, the last CO line card can be removed and the matrix paths for that card can be used as intercom paths instead (adds 6 paths). This will be controlled by software. 2.3 POWER SUPPLY This unit supplies the 24 volt power required for system operation. One power supply is required for the
Basic KSU; a second power supply is required if 5-8, the second APL, the EIB 4-6 are added to the Expansion cabinet. If more than 56 stations are and/or installed KIB slots 15 through 21 are used, a third power supply is required. The third power supply is installed in the power cage mounted to the right of the Basic KSU. 2.4 DC/DC CONVERTER A modular unit that converts the 24 VDC power into the system 5 VDC and 14 VDC voltages. The first DC/DC converter will support the entire system until cards are installed into KIB slots 15 through 21. Then the second . converter must be installed.
2.5 DIRECT STATION SELECTION (DSS) CONSOLE one-button access to stations and 12 fixed feature buttons. Three units can be
direct connected to provide access to 108 Fully modular for provides console that
stations. The DSS station buttons can also be programmed for direct
line access for lines l-36. Up to 4 DSS units can be associated with a key telephone.
101 Section for Refer to discussion of optional equipment. a
SECTION 102 ISSUE 1. JULY 1988
3.1 36112 EXPANSION KSU The Expansion KSU is housed in a wall mount cabinet and contains card slots for 18 lines, 80 stations, the second APL, the EIB, third power and the second DC/DC converter. The Expansion cabinet is installed to the right above the Basic KSU. 3.2 SECOND APL CARD When a 36112 is configured with two APL cards (both with RSM units added), a total of twelve (12) DTMF receivers and six (6) senders are and DTMF receivers available. senders are required for unsupervised conference, and Single Line Telephone applications. The decision to use a second APL card should be based on the usage of DISA, conferences, unsupervised and/or in the system. The matrix in Table 1 shows maximum numbers of SLT stations that can be supported in the system, and the cards required to support those configurations. I t a l s o s h o w s t h e number of DTMF senders and receivers provided by APL cards with and without
data base printing. Only 300 and 1200 baud were allowed previously. Default is 4800 baud.
4.2 PROGRAMMABLE PAGE WARNING TONE

A page warning tone may be broadcast before a (internal and external), if desired. By default, page warning tone is allowed.
4.3 SLT RING CADENCE

Ring burst duration on SLT stations for incoming CO calls is one (1) second. This makes the system compatible with devices such as modems and FAX machines that require a one (1) second burst for detection.
5. EPB SLT STATION FEATURES 5.1 ANSWERING CAMP-ONS AT SLT STATIONS

SLT stations can transfer a CO call in progress before answering a. second call.
4. EPB ADDITIONAL SYSTEM FEATURES 4.1 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING BAUD RATE
A new option on the port of the EPB enables 4800 baud for SMDR and
5.2 CANCELLING CALL FORWARD OR DND FROM AN SLT

Allows you to cancel call forward or DND on your SLT station with just one code to remember. This feature is especially convenient if youve forgotten whether you programmed DND or call forward.
SECTION 200 ISSUE 1, MAY 1987
ENCORE CX 816 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System has a wide variety of features and flexible programming, allowing each telephone user to program his/her own individual needs. telephone to meet This section of the manual contains the operating instructions for key telephone users and includes illustrations of key telephones used in the ENCORE CX 816 system and descriptions of the keys on the telephones and their functions. This section is designed to provide step-by-step instructions for operating the key telephones in the system. Visual and audible cues which accompany the various steps in the operation of the feature are also included. Literature similar to these operating instructions has been prepared for use by the customer in the form of Station, Attendant, and SLT Users Guides. INTERCOM CALLS can be tone ringing or voice announced. If it is voice announced, the receiving station will receive 3 bursts of tone prior to the announcement. If it is a tone ringing call, the receiving station will hear a tone ring every 2.4 seconds. FLEXIBLE BUTTONS are used to access idle outside lines, provide for internal stations, access speed dial numbers and activate features. These buttons are programmed by the individual station user. MONITOR (MON) button enables you to make a telephone call without lifting the handset. It turns the telephone on and off when using the speakerphone. HOLD button enables you to place an outside caller on hold. button is used to terminate an outside call and restore dial tone without having to hang up the handset. It is also used to transfer calls behind a PBX or within those systems and to complete the programming of flexible buttons. CONFERENCE (CONF) button is used to establish conference calls. TRANSFER (TRANS) button is used to transfer an outside call from one station to another. MUTE button allows you to switch the built-in microphone on or off when using the speakerphone, or the handset microphone when using the handset. button serves a function of allowing you to place your telephone into Do Not Disturb or allowing you to your phone calls to another station. CALLBACK button allows you to leave an automatic callback message at another station and return a message left for you by another station. It also allows you to queue for an outside line. SPEED button provides you with access to speed dialing, save number and last number redial.
2. KEY TELEPHONE STATION FEATURES

Each ENCORE CX 616 key station provides the following keys, indicators and features: HANDSET AND SPEAKER are located at the left side of the front panel. A handset is provided to . allow confidential conversation when desired. Lifting the handset from its cradle (going off-hook) disengages the stations built-in speaker. The speaker is located below the center portion of the handset. The may be operated with the handset on-hook. When this occurs, audio is transmitted to the station user through the stations speaker. OUTSIDE CALLS are announced by a tone signal repeated every 3.2 seconds. The corresponding outside line indicator will flash slowly.
200-l
ENCORE SECTION 200 ISSUE MAY 1987
816 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FIGURE 1. ENCORE CX
ENHANCED TELEPHONE
ENCORE CX 8 1 6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 200 ISSUE MAY 1987
2.1 PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL a. Press outside line button or pool button. (MON button lights) b. desired party. c. When called party answers, lift handset for privacy or use speakerphone. Station user can also dial 88 and the individual outside line number to access a particular outside line. Dialing a number in the numbering plan activates the speakerphone automatically. 2.2 ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL a. Press flashing outside line button or loop button. (If your telephone has been programmed with Ringing Line Answer, you may answer an outside line by just lifting the handset.) or use speakerphone by button. 2.3 MUTE BUTTON (Provides privacy during speakerphone or handset operation by disabling the microphone.) a. Press to activate (button lights). b. Press again to deactivate (button extinguishes). The mute feature automatically deactivates upon call termination. 2.4 SPEAKERPHONE a. Pressing an outside line button, a speed button, a station button, or dialing a number in the system numbering plan will automatically activate the speakerphone and light the monitor key your set is programmed as a speakerphone. NOTE: For further references in this section where lift handset is specified, you may also use the method of pressing key if the telephone is programmed to be a true two-way speakerphone.
2.5 PLACING A CALL ON HOLD If your system is programmed to have exclusive hold preferred press once for exclusive hold and twice for system hold. 2.6 ANSWERING A RECALL a. When an outside line has remained on hold for an extended period of time, you will be reminded with a recall ring. b. Press outside line, loop or pool button flashing at a very fast rate. c. Lift handset to converse. If you do not answer a recall within a programmed period of time, the call will be transferred to the attendant. 2.7 GROUP LISTENING One person can speak through the handset while others can listen to the connected party through the telephone speaker. a. Lift handset and dial desired party. b. While connected to the other party, press (the key lights). c. The voice of the other party will come through the speaker. 2.8 PLACING AN INTERCOM a. intercom number or press the preprogrammed station button. b. You will hear: 1. tones if the called station is in the TN mode. Wait for called station to answer. 2. 3 bursts of tone if called station is in the HF or PV mode. Begin your announcement after the tones. Intercom boxes are called by dialing corresponding intercom number or pressing the preprogrammed station button. a number in the number plan NOTE: activates the telephone automatically.
200-3
ENCORE CX 8 16 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2.9 ANSWERING AN INTERCOM CALL With your intercom signal switch in the: a. TN position, you will hear intercom ringing. handset or move selector to HF to reply. b. PV position, you will hear of tone and a one-way announcement. Lift handset or switch intercom selector to HF to reply. c. HF position, you will hear 3 bursts of tone and an announcement. Reply handsfree or lift handset for privacy. 2.10 BACKGROUND MUSIC a. Remain on-hook. b. Dial or press preprogrammed feature access button. c. To remove the music, dial or press the preprogrammed feature access button. 2.11 flash disconnects present outside line and restores outside line dial tone. a. While connected to an outside line, press The duration of the flash is automatically timed. Therefore, the length of time the button is held does not affect the function. A station denied access to a line can receive a transfer and make a transfer but cannot on that line. 2.12 CALL TRANSFER a. While connected to an outside line, press The call is put on exclusive hold. b. Dial station number ( 100-l 7 1) press appropriate preprogrammed station button. C. At this point you can make either a screened or unscreened transfer. SCREENED TRANSFER a. The called extension is b. When the extension announce transfer. c. Hang up to complete transfer.
UNSCREENED TRANSFER a. When the called extension begins to ring, hang up to transfer call. (Recall timer starts.) ANSWERING SCREENED TRANSFER a. After the transferring internal party hangs up, press outside line button flashing on hold to access the transferred outside call. 2.13 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY TRANSFER a. If you are designated the Executive station and your phone is busy or in DND, all calls will be routed to your programmed Secretary station. b. If you are designated the Secretary station, you can signal the Executive that is busy or in DND by using the Call Wait feature. 2.14 DO NOT DISTURB If your phone has been programmed to have Not Disturb: a. Press while on-hook or while your phone is ringing. The button will light. Your telephone will be placed in Do Not Disturb and ringing will be silenced. NOTE: Attendant station has no DND. REMOVING DO NOT DISTURB a. Press while on-hook. The LED extinguishes. 2.15 CALL WAIT (CAMP-ON) You call an extension that is busy to them to your call. a. After receiving intercom tone, press preprogrammed CALL WAIT button or station will receive 1 burst of ringing. b. When called answers, consult with them or hang up to transfer the call.
200-4
ISSUE
200
MAY 1987
ANSWERING A CALL WAIT If you hear 1 burst of ringing and your button is , you have a call waiting for you.
a. Press HOLD to consult with calling station. First call will be placed on hold. b. Press flashing outside line button if a call is being transferred. NOTE: An internal caller cannot be put on hold. Pressing the will cause an internal call to be dropped. 2.16 PAGING If you have been given the ability to make pages: a. Lift handset. b. Dial desired page zone. Your will hear warning tone. c. When the tone ends, make your page announcement in a normal tone of voice. d. Hang up when you are finished paging.
PAGE ZONES
ANSWERING A MEET ME PAGE a. Go to nearest key telephone. b. You are connected to party who paged you. 2.18 CALL FORWARD a. handset or press b. . c. Dial station number or press the preprogrammed button of the station to which calls will be button flashes) d. Hang up or press Line queues, callback request, message wait requests and preselected messages are cancelled when a station places itself in forward. Callback requests are not allowed at the station where a call is forwarded. CO line calls can be transferred by the receiving station back to the original station. A station in call mode can still make outgoing calls. REMOVING CALL FORWARD a. Lift handset or b. Press The extinguishes. c. Hang up or press
All Call Internal Zone 1 Internal Zone 2 (3672 only) Internal Zone 3 (3672 only) Internal Zone 4 Internal All Call External Zone 1 (3672 only) External Zone 2 (3672 only) External All Call Phones in DND will not receive paging announcements. When making an All Call page, the page initiator will get tone if any zone is busy. tone continues zone becomes available. You will then hear a tone and can make your page. 2.17 MEET ME PAGE. a. lift handset. b. desired page zone. c. Request that the desired party meet you on the d. Wait for called party to answer (DO NOT hang up). As soon as the paged party answers and is connected to you, the page circuit is freed.
button
2.19 MESSAGE WAITING Up to 5 messages can be left at one telephone. a. If you dial a telephone that is unattended or in DND, you can leave a callback request. b. After receiving DND tone or no answer, button. Your will hear confirmation tone. c. Hang up or press ANSWERING A MESSAGE INDICATION a. Press flashing button. b. Station that left message will be signalled with tone ringing. button will continue to flash until all The messages have been answered. First message left will be first one
200-5
2.20 CALLBACK If you dial a telephone that is busy, you can leave a callback indication. a. b. When the busy station hangs up, you will be signaled. d. When you have answered the callback signal by lifting handset or pressing MON button, the station you originally called will be signaled.
C.
RETRIEVING A PARKED CALL a. handset or press b. Dial q . c. Dial parking location. 2.24 CONFERENCE NPES OF CONFERENCE a. Add-On: 1 outside party and 2 internal parties. b. Multi-Line: 1 internal party and 2 outside parties. A CONFERENCE a. Call internal or outside party. Button lights and party is placed b. Press on exclusive hold.
2.21 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP a. You hear intercom or outside line ringing at a particular station. b. Lift handset. Dial d. Dial station number of the ringing phone. e. You will be connected automatically to the calling party. You must have access to the specific outside line or Loop key to do a directed call pickup. 2.22 GROUP CALL PICKUP a. You hear an unattended phone in your group ringing. b. handset. c. Dial d. You will be connected automatically to the calling party. You must be in the same pickup group. 2.23 CALL PARK Allows you to place an outside on hold and consult with, page or an internal party and/or transfer the outside call. a. While connected to an outside line, press The caller is put on exclusive hold. b. Dii parking location Hear confirmation tone. c. If you hear busy tone, press and dii another parking location.
EXITING AN ADD-ON CONFERENCE

a. Hang up, or press . Conference remains active.
RE-ENTERING AN ADD-ON CONFERENCE

a. handset or press b. Press TO DROP AN OUTSIDE a. You must be actively in the conference. b. Press outside line of arty you wish to drop. c. Hang up or press MON . d. Re-enter the conference.
TERMINATING AN ADD-ON CONFERENCE

a. Hangu. b. Press CONF .
TERMINATING A MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE

a. Hang up. 2.25 NUMBER
1. Svstem will automatically select the original line used to place the and redial the number. 2. If that line in busy, the system will automatically select another line from the same group and redial the number.
2.25 LAST NUMBER (CONTD) 3. If no lines in the group are available, station will receive busy tone and can queue for a line. 4. If the station user preselects a line before activating the feature, the preselection will override the line which was used originally.
a. Press (SPEED]. b. Press a button programmed for an outside line or a line group. (If no outside line is specified, line group 1 will be used). speed number location ( 00 19). Dial telephone number you wish to store
2.26 SAVE NUMBER

The last number dialed on an outside line is saved. If you wish to save the last number you dialed: a. After dialing an outside party, keep handset off -hook. b. Press c. Hang up. TO DIAL A SAVED NUMBER a. Press b. 1. System will automatically select the original line used to place the call and redial the number. 2. If that line is busy, the system will automatically select another line from the same line group and redii the number. 3. If no lines in the group are available, station will receive busy and can queue for a line. 4. If the station user preselects a line before activating the feature, the preselection will override the line which originally. 2.27 NOTE: To program a pause in speed dialing, press HOLD button; to program a flash, button: and to program a pulse-to-tone switchover, press To program several speed numbers in a row, press speed button twice to conclude programming a number and then just enter the next speed number location to be programmed. If a station has no line appearance for the line programmed into the speed bin, that line will come up under the loop button or pool button. 2.29 QUEUING a. You see that a particular outside line is busy and wish to be placed on a list waiting for a line in that line group to become available. b. Press busy outside line, or dii group access code or press programmed pooled access button.
OR SYSTEM SPEED ,
A station may make only 1 queue request at a time. A queue request the queue request.
a. Press . b. speed number location or depress the preprogrammed speed dii bin access button. 2.28 STORING STATION SPEED NUMBERS a. Press b. Dial speed number location (00-l 9). c. Dial telephone number you to store
ANSWERING A QUEUE REQUEST

a You hear ringing and an outside line of the line group you queued (or a loop key) is flashing. b. button lights steady. c. outside line or key to answer.
or
200-7
ENCORE CX 816 OPERATING
2.30 NIGHT SERVICE

a. Attendant presses to activate or deactivate. b. Any other telephone can place the system into or remove from night service by dialing
2.31 PRE-SELECTED MESSAGES

If you wish to leave a message so that anyone with YOU: a display telephone can see it when they a. Dial b. Dial number of desired message (01-l 0). button. C. Press OUT TO LUNCH ON VACATION OUT OF OFFICE-BACK OUT OF OFFICE-BACK PM OUT OF OFFICE-BACK TOM OUT OF OFFICE-BACK UNKN OUT OF TOWN IN A MEETING AT HOME AT BRANCH OFFICE Cancels message. NOTE: This feature is not available to the attendant.
When entering an account code while a call is already in progress: a. You must have a preprogrammed account code entry button to enter an account code. b. Inform the party you are speaking with that he/she is being put on hold. C. Press the programmed button. d. Enter the account code (up to 12 digits). e. If the account code is fewer than 12 digits in to close the account code. length, enter
2.33
NIGHT ANSWER
signal, lift handset. a. When you an b. UNA access code 7 7 . c. You will be connected to ringing outside line.
2.34 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO THE DISPLAY

a. You can program your phone so people using display phones will see your name instead of your station number when you call them or they call you. b. Press speed number location Press e. Enter your name (up to 7 letters) using the patterns below. again. f. Press Press A=
2.32 ACCOUNT CODES

assigned a. You must have the feature to a flexible button on your key telephone. b. Press that button. Enter account code (up to 12 digits). If account code has fewer than 12 digits, enter to close the account code. be entered before or NOTE: Account codes be during a call. Account codes can entered during an incoming call originated by outside party.
D=
To erase your name: a. Press b. Dial speed number location c. Press d. Press Press
2.35 PROGRAMMING YOUR FLEXIBLE

Depending on the size of your system and whether or model, your you have the telephone may or may not have all outside lines appearing on it. In some cases, your system may be programmed so that no outside lines appear on your phone. Your telephone has either 12 or 24 buttons which may be programmed in one of several ways. Upon installation, l-1 1 are programmed as outside lines and button 12 as a LOOP button (ENCORE CX 3672) or buttons l-8 as outside lines and the rest as DSS stations (ENCORE CX 816). There are several ways to access outside lines which do not appear as buttons on your phone. There are also many ways you can individually program the buttons on your phone not assigned for specific outside lines. Outside lines can be accessed through a POOL button, which will give you access to a particular group of lines such as WATS lines. Or a particular outside line can be accessed by dialing 88 and the line number desired. (01-08 for 8 16 systems; for 3672 systems.) An outside line you do not normally have appearing on your phone can be transferred to you through a LOOP button. One LOOP button is assigned on every key telephone upon installation.
If -you have buttons on your telephone which have not been assigned as outside lines, you may program them to suit your own individual needs. There are 5 possible functions you may assign to these buttons. This button, when pressed, will automatically signal the assigned intercom station. FEATURES: This button can be programmed so that when pressed will activate a particular feature, thus eliminating the need for dialing the feature code. SPEED DIAL: This button can be programmed to automatically access a speed number location for one-step. operation. PBX and codes can be programmed into a speed dial bin and accessed by one button depression. A group of outside lines POOLED OUTSIDE can be placed under one button. When this button is pressed, the system will select an available line from this group for the user to place a call on. LOOP: This button will act as the direct appearing button for outside lines that do not appear on the users individual telephone. Any phone that doesnt have all lines appear on it must have a loop key.
TO PROGRAM FLEXIBLE BUTTONS

a. b. Press the unassigned button you wish to program. c. See the following table and enter the desired code to assign a function to the button. d. TO ERASE A FLEXIBLE a. Press b. Press button to be erased. c. Press d. Press
200-Q
BUTTON PROGRAMMING CODES
Direct Station Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......................... Last Number Save Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meet Me Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pm-Selected Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Wait .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Station Speed Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Speed Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Internal Zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Zone 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal All Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................. Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access to Specific Outside tine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Account Code Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pooled Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
number 100-l 15 for 818)
0 1 - l
0 )
(XX=bins (XX-bins . no . 100-l 15 for 818; (pound plus 1)
q
(XXX park location 250-255)
Number telephone number. roup 2) + telephone number. Group 3) + telephone number. Group 4) + telephone number. Group 5) + telephone number. Group 8) + telephone number. Group 7) + telephone number. (Group telephone number (816 only) .
ENCORE CX
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 200 ISSUE 1. MAY 1987
3. PROGRAM MODULE 3
Program Module 3 software provides a number of new features the ENCORE CX 816 system. The features described on the fdlowing pages are also available in Feature Package V software for ENCORE CX 3672 and 36112 systems.
4.2 CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER Permits a station user to forward busy calls, no or a combination busy/no answer calls. answer a. handset or press MON . b. Press . c. Dial the desired code: 4 = no answer calls* 5 = busy calls busy and no answer 6 d. the extension number of the station to receive the forwarded calls. You will hear confirmation tone. e. To cancel, go off-hook and press .
l
4.
STATION FEATURES
4.1 AUTOMATIC Allows you to save an outside number you have had difficulty reaching (busy or no answer). The system will ring your phone after a programmed time period the number for you automatically. and will Programming Auto a. b. c. d. Press SPEED SPEED. Press one of your flexible buttons. LED flashes. Dial 2 9 4. Hear confirmation tone. Press MON .
NOTE: No answer intercom calls will forward only when the intercom selector switch is in the mode.
4.3 DIAL MEMO can dial a telephone number into your phones that memory as a reminder to yourself to your in progress in completed, number. you can prompt the system to automatically dial the number you stored. Prognmming Dial Memo a. Press SPEED SPEED. b. one of your flexible keys. LED flashes. c. Dii293. d. Hear confirmation tone. e. MON . This flexible key will now be used to store Dial Memo numbers. Storing A Number a. Press the programmed flexible key while on a CO or intercom call. See note. b. Dial the number you want to save. c. Press the key again.
Using Auto a. After receiving busy or no answer on a CO call, press the flexible button you programmed for this feature. b. Hear confirmation tone through the handset. C. Go on-hook. This starts the auto timer. When it expires, you will be called back. d. Hear Queue Callback ring torte. e. Go off-hook. The line is seized and the number is dialed automatically. See note. f. If the number is still busy/no answer, press the flex key again and go on-hook to reset the timer. NOTE: The line is accessed and the number is dialed as soon as you go off-hook, regardless of whether or not Preferred Line Answer is activated at your station.
200-l 1
SECTION 200
4.3 DIAL MEMO (CONTD.) NOTE: The first depression of the flexible key mutes the DTMF tones, so the party to whom you are speaking will not hear them. The second depression restores DTMF capability. Checking The, Stored Number a. Press the flexible key while on-hook. b. The display shows the number stored in the . Memo bin, but does not dial ft. c. Press MON to cancel.
a. Press SPEED SPEED. b. Press a flexible button. LED flashes. c. Dial 7 6. d. Hear confirmation tone. e. Press MON.
Placing An Intercom Call On Hold a. Press HOLD button while on an Intercom call.
The flex key flashes at the exclusive hold rate. b. Press the flashing flexible button to retrieve the call. An intercom call on hold will recall your station after the exclusive hold recall timer expires. The recall will sound like a tone ringing intercom call.
Dialing The Stored Number

a. Select a CO line. b. Press SPEED. c. Dial # . or a. Press SPEED. b. Dial The stored number is dialed automatically for you. 4.6 ONE-TIME DO NOT DISTURB (DND) Allows you to prevent calls from ringing at your station while youre on a call. The One-Time DND condition will automatically cancel when you end your call. a. Press the button while youre off-hook and connected to a CO line or internal call. The button lights and off-hook tones at your station are cancelled. b. To cancel, simply go on-hook. LED extinguishes and DND cancels. NOTE: If the button Is pressed while on-hook, DND is activated and must be cancelled by pressing the button again while on-hook.
Cancelling The Number

a. Go off-hook and access a CO line. b. Press SPEED SPEED . c. Hang up.
4.4 FLASH ON INTERCOM CALLS Disconnects a page or intercom call in progress and returns intercom tone. a. While connected to an intercom or page call, press FLASH button. b. Intercom dial tone Is returned.
4.7 PROGRAMMING CODE 72 ON A FLEX KEY You can program code 72 on a flexible key to speed of messages. a Press SPEED SPEED . b. Press the desired flex key. LED flashes. c. Dial 7 2 . d. Hear confirmation tone. e. Press MON .
4.5 INTERCOM CALL HOLD You can program a flex button to allow an intercom call to be put on hold.
ENCORE CX 816 OPERATING INS I
I 3, NOVEMBER
4.7
PROGRAMMING CODE 72 ON A FLEX KEY (CONTD.)
6. 6.1
PM-3: PHONE BOX FEATURES

BLOCKING BACKGROUND MUSIC Press the button while receiving background music. Music is cancelled. Press again to return background music.
Leaving A Message Press the flex key you programmed. Dial the code for the desired message Hear confirmation tone. a Press the flex key you programmed. Dial 0 0. Hear confirmation tone. 0).
a. b.
C.
7. 7.1 SPEAKERPHONE
FEATURES
c.
5. PM-3: ATTENDANT FEATURES

5.1 DISABLING OUTGOING ACCESS
Speakerphone activation is automatic when pressing an outside CO Line, POOL, DSS, programmed Flexible button, or dialing any dial code. Using the Speakerphone without a MON button programmed on a flexible button is allowed, but requires you to lift and replace the handset to terminate the call. 7.2 PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL
The attendant station can disable CO lines, preventing outgoing CO calls. Lii handset or press MON. Dial 2 9 8. Hear confirmation tone. Depress the line button of the CO to be disabled. You will hear confirmation tone and see the CO indicator flashing. To re-activate the CO line, repeat the steps followed to disable it.
With a programmed MON button Press desired CO line button or dial pooled group access code. Dial telephone number. b. Press MON button to terminate call. C. a. (or with no MON button programmed)
C.
e. f.
Lift and replace handset to terminate call. ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL a programmed MON button
5.2 SELECTING BACKGROUND MUSIC AT AN INTERCOM PHONE BOX Lii the handset or MON. Dial 2 9 7. Dial the station number of the phone box (or press the DSS key, if programmed). 1 channel 1 Hear confirmation tone and hang up. NOTE: Only the attendant station has this
7.3
C.
a. b.
d.
Press CO line or LOOP button with incoming call. Press MON button to terminate call. (or with no MON button programmed)
b.
and replace handset to terminate call.
200-l 3
7.4
PLACING AN INTERCOM CALL
a. b.
With a programmed MON button a. b. Press programmed DSS button or dial station extension number. Press MON button to terminate call. (or b. 7.5 no MON button programmed)
Press MUTE button to activate (LED will illuminate steady). Press MUTE button again to de-activate (LED will go off).
7.7 CONFERENCE A Conference button can be programmed on a flexible button to allow the same method of conference as on the full-sized key telephones. However, an abbreviated method of add-on conference can be performed using the TRANS button on the Button Enhanced Key Telephone. A conference with outside and 2 Internal parties can be established. The outside call must be established first. Also, there are many different options available for the conference feature. Only the methods marked will operate on your telephone. There are two basic types of conferences: ADD ON 1 outside party with up to 4 inside parties.
Lii and replace handset to terminate call. ANSWERING AN INTERCOM CALL
With a programmed MON button Call In Tone Rlnglng Mode Press MON button to answer. Press MON button to terminate call. (or with no MON button programmed)
MULTI-LINE 2 outside parties with inside party. Lii handset to answer. Replace handset to terminate call. Establlshlng a Three-way Add On Conference Without a programmed CONF button Recelvlng Call In a. b. Upon hearing Intercom announce tone, speak in a normal voice. Call is automatically terminated when caller hangs up.
C.
d.
Receive or make an outside call. Press the TRANS button (hear IC dial tone). Dial the station to add to the conference. if station user answers: Press the TRANS button (conference alert tone is heard and all are connected).
Note: Call connection is indicated by the illuminated condition of the LED for the programmed MON button. There is no visual call connection indication if the feature code not assigned to a button. 7.6 MUTE BUTTON If a flexible button has been programmed with the MUTE programming code, it can be used provide privacy during speakerphone or handset operation by muting the microphone.
or station user Is not available Press the TRANS button (youre reconnected to your caller). Hang up to exit conference in progress. Note: to the conference is not allowed.
200-l 4
ENCORE
SECTION 200 NOVEMBER 1989
7.7 CONFERENCE Establishing a Three-way Add On or Multi-line Conference With a programmed CONF button Make or receive a call (outside or internal party). Press the CONF button (call is placed on exclusive hold). Call next party. Press the CONF button (conference alert tone is heard). Conference is established. Hang up to exit.
7.8
SPEED DIAL BIN PROGRAMMING
Without a programmed SPEED Button handset. Dial 55. Dial bin number (00-l 9). Dial telephone number. Press TRANS button (hear confirmation tone). Replace handset.
C. d.
c. d.
7.9 SPEED DIALING Without a programmed SPEED Button Lii handset. 5. Dial desired speed bin number (00-19). Your call will be dialed. Replace handset to terminate call.
Dropping An Outside Party From A Conference With a programmed CONF button (As the originator of the conference and connected as a conference party member) Press the button of the outside line to be dropped. Hang up. An Add On Or Multi-Llne With a programmed CONF button (As the originator of the conference the conference in progress) has exited e.
7.10 PLACING A CALLBACK REQUEST Without a programmed CALLBK Button (Upon calling another internal station and busy signal) Press TRANS button dial tone heard). Dial 56. Hang up. (When goes on-hook, you will be signaled). Answer by the handset: the station you called will then be signaled. a
C.
Lii handset. Press the flashing CONF button (conference alert tone is heard). You are reconnected to the conference in progress.
d.
7.11 LEAVING A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION Terminate An Add On Or With a programmed CONF button (As the originator of the conference while connected as a member of the conference) : C. Hang up (conference button flashes). Press the flashing CONF button. Ail parties are disconnected. a programmed CALLBK Button (Calling another station and receiving no answer or DND tone) Press TRANS button Dial 56. Hang up. dial tone heard).
c.
200-l 5
7.12 LEAVING A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION a programmed CALLBK Button (Calling another station and receiving no answer or DND tone)
7.17 USING DO NOT DISTURB Without a Lift handset. Dial 53 (hear confirmation tone). Hang up.
C.
a. b.
Press programmed CALLBK (hear confirmation tone). Hang up.
To Remove handset. Dial 53 (hear confirmation tone). Hang up.
7.13 ANSWERING A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION Without a Programmed CALLBK Button Lii handset. Dial 57 (the station that left the message will be signalled). 7.14 ANSWERING A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION With a Programmed CALLBK Button handset. Press the Programmed CALLBK button. (The station that left the message will be nalled). 7.15 CALL FORWARDING
C.
7.16 HOOK FLASH ON OUTSIDE CALL Without a programmed FLASH Button (While on a CO line) Press TRANS button (IC dial tone is heard). Dial 51. A FLASH signal is sent to the CO line. Youre to the CO line. 7.19 QUEUING Without a Callback Button Press line button (hear busy tone). Press TRANS button (hear IC dial tone). Dial 56 (hear confirmation tone MGS LED illuminates steady). Hang up.
c. Without a programmed : c. d. Button d. Lii handset. Dial 54 + (optional codes or Dial destination number where your forwarded (hear tone). Hang up. are to
7.20 ANSWERING A QUEUE CALLBACK Without Callback Button (Hear ringing and CO line button LED flashes at fast rate)
7.16 CALL FORWARDING Without a Programmed Button
a.
b.
(To Remove Call Forward Without a programmed Button) handset. Dial 54 (hear confirmation tone). Hang up.
Press flashing CO line button (you are connected to line). MSG LED will extinguish.
c.
200-l 6
ENCORE
SECTION 200 3, NOVEMBER 1989
7.21 PROGRAMMING A FLEXIBLE BUT-TON

Without SPEED button
7.24
NUMBER
Without a programmed SPEED button The last number dialed on an outside line is saved. To redial the number: Lii handset. Dial 5.
C.
d.
Lift handset. Dial 6. Press flex button to be programmed (flex button will flash). Dial code for desired feature (see Table A). Hear confirmation tone. Hang up.
8. TRANSFER RECOVERY
7.22 ERASING A PROGRAMMED FLEXIBLE BUTTON Without Speed button Lift handset. Dial Press flex button to be erased (flex button will flash). Dial code 51. Hear confirmation tone. Hang up. 8.1 TRANSFERRING CALLS While connected to an outside call: Press the TRANS button (hear dial tone). Dial the station number or press the DSS button for the transfer destination. Receiving set busy, in DND or no answer in Tone mode: Press TRANS button (you are call staged for transfer). or call is answered: Make transfer announcement. Hang up (call is transferred). to
c. d.
7.23 RING CONTROL set does not have an intercom mode The selector switch like the full-sized key telephones. In defautt, intercom calls placed to the set will be . received in the handsfree mode. By dialing a code, you can switch between to the tone ing mode and versa. A flexible button can also be programmed to function for this feature. (To Toggle Between Handsfree And Tone Ringing Mode) a. b. Dial 699 (steady tone is heard and is in tone ringing mode). Dial 699 (ICM announce tone is heard and set is mode). in handsf
200-l 7
ISSUE
SECTION
MAY 1987

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2
PAGE ......................................................... ADDITIONAL 3672 KEY TELEPHONE FEATURES

2.1 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 PAGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BACKGROUND MUSIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMINGYOURFLEXIBLE ........................... 2 LEAST COST ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 1 1 1
3. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES

3.1 3.4 3.5 3.6
3.2 3.3 CALL PARK
PLACING AN INTERCOM CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
................................ 2
2
3.7
3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14
UNSCREENED TRANSFER . : : : : : : : : : : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREENED TRANSFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP PICKUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECTED CALL PICKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALL FORWARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TO REMOVE CALL FORWARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................................................. ................................................. STORING SPEED NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................................. ................................... ...... A CALL
2
2 2 3
3
3
3.15 A MESSAGE INDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................... 3.16 3.17 QUEUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 PAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 UNIVERSAL ANSWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. WITH CONSOLE 4.1 PAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 CALL PARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 HUNT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 CALL WAIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 NIGHT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................................
4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
5. DIRECT INWARD
201 -A
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTD.)
DESCRIPTION 6. 7. FEATURE PACKAGE V
PAGE ..........................................
STATION FEATURES 7.1 AUTOMATIC HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 CALL FORWARD OFF PREMISES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUSTOM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECTED CALL PICKUP OF A PHONE BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISPLAY SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORWARDING CALLS TO UCD, HUNT AND VOICE MAIL GROUPS . . . . . PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 CALLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK GROUP ACCESS ON 7.8 UCD AGENT IN/OUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7.9 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 FEATURES(FP5) CUSTOM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISABLING OUTGOING ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FORWARDING INCOMING CO CALLS OFF-PREMISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECTING BGM AT A PHONE BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.
9.
SLT FEATURES (FP5) ACCOUNT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 CALL FORWARD OFF PREMISE .... 9.3 ........................... PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 UCD AGENT 9.5 ............................................ 8 FEATURE PACKAGE VI (FP5) SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 STATION FEATURES (FP5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 DISPLAY CALLS IN QUEUE FOR UCD GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 INTERCOM TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 FORCED TONE RINGING INTERCOM CALL 11.4 SLT PERSONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11.5 SLT MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 OF FIGURES
10. 11.
1.
PATTERN
LCD DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX 3672 system has access to all features available to the ENCORE CX 816 system (except alarm) and all features operate the same way. In addition, the 3672 system has access to a number of other advanced features and can use Single Line Telephones and Direct Station/Line Selector units.
CONFERENCE TYPES OF CONFERENCES

a. Add-On: 5 internal parties, or 4 internal and 1 outside. b. Multi-Line: 1 internal and 2 outside.
ESTABLISHING A CONFERENCE
a. b. internal or outside party. (button lights and party is placed on exclusive hold). Call next Press -again. e. When all parties are on hold, press a second time and conference is established.
2. ADDITIONAL 3672 CAPACITIES 2.1 OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE (OHVA)

a. If your telephone has been programmed for off-hook voice announce and you are already talking on a call, another station using the CALL WAIT feature to notify you of a waiting call will result in a warning tone and an immediate voice cut-through to your speaker. NOTE: If you are using your speakerphone, monitoring a call through your speakerphone or are in DND, the standard CALL WAIT signal of muted ringing will result. The called station must be programmed for OHVA for this feature to work. A user can disable OHVA by placing his/her telephone in the TN answering mode. However, the attendant csn voice announce off-hook to an OHVA telephone set to TN by using the OVERRIDE button.
EXITING A CONFERENCE (Initiator)

a. Hang up.
RE-ENTERING A CONFERENCE handset. a. b. Press TO ADD CONFERENCE PARTIES Press .

C.
TO DROP OUTSIDE PARTY a. You must be actively in the conference. b. Press appropriate outside line. c. Hang up. TERMINATING A CONFERENCE
2.2 PAGING the 816 system.

Paging in the 3872 system functions the same as in 3672, however, access to 3 additional zones: Additional Page External Zone 2 7
Internal Zone 3
Internal Zone 4 4 See Section 200, 816 Operating Instructions, paragraph 2.16 for detailed operating instructions for the paging feature. .
2.4 BACKGROUND MUSIC Two music channels csn be connected to the 3672 system. a Remain on-hook. b. or press preprogrammed feature access button. c. If only one music channel is connected, dialing or pressing the feature access button a second time turns the music off.
201-l
SECTION 20 1 ISSUE MAY 1987
2.4 BACKGROUND MUSIC (CONTD) d. If 2 music channels are connected, dialing or pressing the feature access button a second time will access the second music channel. To remove music, dial or press the button a third time. 2.5 PROGRAMMING YOUR FLEXIBLE BUTTONS Your telephone has either 12 or 24 buttons which may be programmed in one of several ways. Upon installation, buttons l-1 1 are programmed as outside lines and button 12 as a loop button. See Section 200, 816 Operating Instructions, Paragraph 2.35 for details about programming your flexible buttons. 2.6 LEAST COST ROUTING
a. d. e. h ndset. Dial area code if required. Dial telephone number desired.
3.4 UNSCREENED TRANSFER a. Briefly press and release hookswitch. b. Dial desired intercom number. c. Hang up to complete transfer. 3.5 SCREENED TRANSFER a. press and release hookswitch. b. desired intercom number. c. Announce call. d. Hang up to complete transfer. 3.6 GROUP CALL PICKUP Upon hearing an unattended telephone in your group ringing: a. Lift handset. b. Dial You will be connected to calling party. NOTE: Must be in the same pickup group. intercom calls and transferred outside line calls can be picked up. 3.7 DIRECTED PICKUP Upon hearing an unattended telephone ringing: a. handset. b. Dial c. Dial station number of ringing phone. You will be connected to calling party. 3.6 FORWARD Lift handset. Oiai station number where forwarded. are to be
b. Dial (confirmation tone). . c. Dial if required.
3. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES 3.1 PLACING AN INTERCOM CALL a. handset. b. Dal intercom number. 3.2 PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL a. handset. b. appropriate group access code: (9, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86) 88 and desired line number to access a specific line. c. Dial desired telephone number. 3.3 CALL PARK
a.
C.
d. 3.9 TO REMOVE CALL FORWARD a handset. b. Dial

c. Hang up.
b. c.
While connected to an outside line, briefly press and release Dial one of the call park locations To retrieve a parked call, q and the desired call park location
3.10 DO NOT DISTURB

a. Lift handset.
b. c. up. d. Repeat to remove
Not Disturb.
ISSUE
SECTION 20 MAY 1987
3.11 USING SPEED DIAL a. Lift handset. b. c. Dial desired speed number bin (00-99). NOTE: You will not hear dial tone or digits being dialed when using speed dial.
3.16 ANSWERING A MESSAGE WAITING
INDICATION
You see your message waiting light is lit: a. Lift handset. b. The station that left the message will ring. NOTE: Only Single Line Telephones equipped with a Message Waiting lamp will have access to this feature.
3.12 STORING STATION SPEED NUMBERS

a. Lift handset. b. Dial Dial speed number bin (00-l 9). Dial telephone number you wish to store. e. Briefly press and release hookswitch. You will hear confirmation tone.
3.17 QUEUING
If you find that a particular outside line is wish to be placed on a list waiting for a line in that grouo to become available: a. Dial outside line access code. b. Receive busy tone. Briefly press and release hookswitch. You will hear confirmation tone. Dial
3.13 PLACING A CALL WAIT (CAMP-ON)

You can signal an extension that is busy to alert them to your call. a. After receiving intercom busy tone, briefly press and release the hookswitch and The called station will receive 1 burst of ringing. b. When the called party answers, consult with them or hang up to transfer a call. You can signal an extension that is busy to alert . them that you are attempting to transfer a CO line call to them. a. After receiving intercom busy tone, briefly press and release the hookswitch to return to your CO line call. b. After informing the calling party of the busy extension, briefly press and release the hookswitch again and dial to camp-on the call.
3.18 PAGING
a. handset. page zone. b. Dial desired You will hear a warning tone. Deliver page in normal tone of voice. d. Hang up to terminate page. PAGE internal Zone 1 Internal Zone 2 Internal Zone 3 Internal Zone 4 All Call External Zone 1 2 System All Call NOTE: Phones in DND will not receive paging announcements. When making an All Call Page, the initiator will get busy tone if any zone is busy. ZONES 1 2 3
3.14 RECEIVING A CALL WAIT

a. Receive call watt warning tone through handset. b. Choose desired call. (Hang up on present and take new one or ignore the call wait signal.)
3.15 LEAVING A MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION

If you dial a telephone that is unattended in DND, you can leave a message waiting indication. a. After receiving no answer, briefly press and release hookswitch. b. Dial m. You will hear confirmation tone. c. Hang up.
SECTION 20 1 ISSUE MAY 3.19 CONFERENCE (A single line telephone can be part of a conference consisting of one external and two internal stations.) a, Place the outside call on hold by pressing and releasing hookswitch. b. Dial the station you wish to add to the conference. c. When the internal station answers, briefly press and release hookswitch again and all 3 parties will be connected. 3.20 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) a. Upon hearing an incoming signal, lift handset. b. Dial UNA access code c. You will be connected to ringing outside line.
d. When that station presses their button or lifts the handset, you may converse. The attendant can use Override on a key telephone programmed with OHVA, but which has the switch set to TN, to make an off-hook voice announcement. 4.5 CALL WAIT (CAMP-ON) a. While connected to an outside line, press the desired station button. b. When busy tone is heard, press C. Hang up, access another line, or press 4.6 NIGHT SERVICE a. Attendant presses to activate and deactivate night service.
4. ATTENDANT WITH
CONSOLE
5. DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)

5.1 SYSTEM ACCESS a. Dial the number assigned to a line. The call is answered by the system and system dial tone is heard. b. Dial the access code. If valid, dial tone resumes. *NOTE: Calls must be made from telephones sending DTMF dialing. 5.2 ACCESS OUTGOING TRUNKS AND DIALING a. Dial 8 8 X X . (where XX outside line positions You will be connected to the line dialed and will hear new dial tone if the line is not busy. b. Dial the desired telephone number. 5.3 CALLING SYSTEM STATION USERS a. Dial the desired station number.** If the station is not busy, the called station receives indication and ringing for the line. The caller hears tone until the call attempt expires. If the station is busy, you will hear system busy tone for 5 seconds. Then dial tone Is restored. Upon hearing new dial tone, you can repeat the steps in 5.2 or 5.3. **NOTE: The station dialed must have a line line or a Loop appearance of the button assigned. 201-4
4.1 PAGING a. Press desired (INT, EXT) button. You will hear a warning tone. b. Speak in normal tone of voice to deliver message. c. Hang up handset. If you depress a paging key on the DSS console while you are conversing on an outside line, the outside line will automatically be put on hold and you can make your page announcement. 4.2 CALL PARK a. While connected to outside line, press desired button. b. At time you can page or call another internal station. When the party you called responds: Announce call. Hang up, press or access another outside line. e. To retrieve a parked call, and the park location number (253, 254, 255).
4.3 HUNT GROUPS a. While connected to an outside line, press HUNT group button. b. Hang up, press access another outside line. c. Call will circulate among stations assigned to that hunt group. 4.4 OVERRIDE a. Press button of station to be overridden. b. You will receive DND tone. c. Press The station will receive ringing.
SECTION ISSUE MAY 1 9 8 7
6. FEATURE PACKAGE V (FP6)

The following additional features are provided by Feature Package V software. Feature Package V also provides all the features available in Program Module 3 200 for
a. Dial 7 2. b. Dial the number of the c.
message (1 l-20).
Ask the attendant for a list of available
Press MON . The message is now programmed on your phone. d. 7 2 0 0 to a flashing button twice while on-hook.
7.
FEATURES (FP5)
7.4 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP OF AN INTERCOM PHONE BOX Allows you to pick up an intercom call terminated at a phone box. a. b. c. d. You hear a handsfree call at an intercom phone box. Dial l . Dial the extension number of the phone box. Speak to calling party.
7.1 AUTOMATIC HOLD You can put one CO call on hold by selecting a second CO line. a. You are talking to an outside patty. b. Press a second CO line to make or answer another outside call. The first outside party is put on hold automatically. c. To cancel a call, hang up. Other calls on will remain on hold.
7.5 DISPLAY SECURITY Allows a station user to program a that not on display when dialed. Storing a. Press SPEED SPEED. b. Dial the desired bin number. c. button. d. Dial the to kept prlvate. 8. Press SPEED. g. NOTE: Depressing the entry blanks from button as the first display dlgii that follow.
7.2 CALL FORWARD OFF PREMISE Allows you to forward intercom and transferred CO calls to an off-premise location. Forwarding Calls Off the handset or press MON . a. . b. Press Press SPEED button. Dial the bln (01 the phone number Hear confirmation tone. f. To cancel, go off hook and
NOTE:
LCD
The forward destination must bin for med under a possible. to
programfeature
Accessing a. SPEED. b. Dial bin number.
7.3 CUSTOM MESSAGES You can leave a message so that anyone with a display telephone can it call you. dial the number. The display will The system show DISPLAY SECURITY.
7.6 FORWARDING CALLS TO UCD, HUNT, AND VOICE MAIL GROUPS Enables a station to forward transferred CO calls. no answer calls, and both busy/no answer calls to a UCD, hunt or voice mail group. a. Lift handset or press MON. b. Press . c. the desired code: 4 = no answer calls 5 = busy calls 6 = busy no answer calls. d. Dial the 3digit pilot number for the group where calls are to be forwarded: 270-277 = groups 1-8 269-267 = hunt groups 1-8 voice mail groups l-8 e. Hear confirmation tone. f. To cancel, go off-hook and press . NOTE: Skip step for immediate forwarding.
7.8 TRUNK GROUP ACCESS ON
CALLS
users can now from a group of lines instead of choosing a specific line. a. Call the number of the line. b. The system answers and returns intercom dial tone. c. Enter the access code, if applicable. d. Hear dial tone. 8 1 8 7. f. Hear CO dial tone. g. Dial the desired telephone number. NOTE: LCR cannot be used from DISA. If LCR is enabled, users may dial 8 0 to access lines in trunk group 1.
7.9
AGENT IN/OUT
7.7 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO THE LCD DISPLAY In previous software, the letters and could not be programmed into a stations LCD display. Feature Package V software now allows and a. Press SPEED SPEED. b. Dial 00. c. Press SPEED button. d. Enter your name (up to 7 letters) using the pattern shown In 1. e. Press SPEED again. f. Press MON. Erasing your a. Press SPEED SPEED. b. Dial 00. c. Press FLASH. d. Press SPEED. e. Press MON.
a. handset or press MON . b. Dial 2 7 8 or press flex key, programmed. c. Hear tone. d. Hang up. The phone not receive calls but continue to ring for other calls. Repeat the above procedures to cancel.
A =
12
2l
D= m l 1 3
15
FIGURE 1. PATTERN FOR LCD DISPLAY
2016
SECTION 2 0 1
8.
FEATURES (FP5)
NOTE: 9 80
81
8 . 1 CUSTOM MESSAGES
Up to 10 custom messages can be programmed by the first attendant station. a. Dial 29 2. b. H e a r confirmation tone. c. You will see this display:
82 83 84 86 89
CO access codes include: Group 1 CO lines Group 1 CO lines Group 2 CO lines Group 3 CO lines Group 4 CO lines Group 5 CO lines Group 6 CO lines Group 7 CO lines co line, xx co lines
Call
d. Dial the bin number ( 1 l - 2 0 ) . e. Enter the desired message, via the pad, using the pattern shown in Figure 1. Press HOLD . Hear confirmation tone. NOTE: Custom messages may be up to 2 4 characters in length.
Off Premises
a. Dial 2 9 6. b. the CO access code. Dial .

Hear confirmation tone.
8 . 4 SELECTING BACKGROUND MUSIC AT AN
INTERCOM PHONE BOX

a.
8.2
OUTGOING ACCESS
b.
C.
The first attendant station can disable CO lines, preventing outgoing CO calls. See 200.
2 9 7. the station number of the phone box (or the DSS key, if programmed). 0, 1 or 2 . 1 1
8.3 FORWARDING INCOMING CO CALLS PREMISE the first attendant to caiis to an off-premise location. incoming
d. Hear confirmation tone and hang up. NOTE: attendant station 1
9. SLT FEATURES (FP5)

9.1 ACCOUNT CODES codes can be for
Storing Numbers
in a speed bin, store the number of the where caiis are to be forwarded. provided for storing speed
Forwarding Calls a. Diai 2 9 6. b. the CO access code a.

CO line button. c. the speed bin number that contains the number where calls are to be forwarded. d. Hear confirmation tone.
Account Cod.
Call
b. 7 1 . c. Diai the account code (see note). d. Hear diai tone. e. Diai 9 and the desired number.
SECTION 201
9.1 ACCOUNT CODES NOTE: If the account code contains fewer than 12 to return to intercom diai tone. digits, dial a Call
9.4 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME You can program your phone so using display phones will see your name instead of your station number.
Entering Account Code
a. Depress and release the hookswitch briefly. b. Dial 7 1 . c. the code. If the account code contains fewer than 12 digits, dial l to return automatically to the call.
Programming Your Name a. Lift the handset. b. Dial 2 9 .

Enter your name (up to 7 letters), via the dial pad, using the pattern shown in Figure 1. d. Briefly depress and release the hookswitch. Hear confirmation tone. Hang up. Erasing Your Name a. Repeat the above steps, skipping c.
9.2 CALL FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
Calls
a. b. Lift the handset. Dial 4 . C . Dial the desired code: 4 no answer calls 5 = busy calls 6 = busy and no answer calls d. Dial the 3digit extension number of the forward destination. e. Hear confirmation tone. f. hang up. Cancelling a. Lii the handset. b. Hear stutter dial tone. c. Dial 4 . d. Hear confirmation tone. e. Hang up.
9.5 UCD AGENT
Removing Station From

a. Lift the handset. b. 2 7 c. Hear confirmation tone. d. Hang up.
While Idle
Removing
With A Call In Progress
a. Depress and release hookswitch b. 2 7 8. c. Hear tone. d. Depress and release briefly to return to NOTE: Stutter tone is heard when user goes on-hook as a reminder that station has been removed from UCD.
9.3 CALL FORWARD OFF PREMISE a. Liftthehandset. , b. Dial 5 4 . c. Dial 7. d. the speed Hang up.
Group
number.
a. Repeat the procedures station from UCD.
to remove the
ENCORE
3672 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 201
3, NOVEMBER
10. FEATURE PACKAGE VI (FP6)

The following feature operations are provided by Feature Package VI in to features which exist in Feature Package V. This feature package is a composite of all previously described features for PM-l, PM-2, PM-3, of the Encore CX 816 system and SLT Features defined in section 102. Feature Package is offered in the same four versions as Feature Package V. 2996300 ENCORE CX 1832-3672 BASIC EPB SOFTWARE (SOFT13672). EPB software package to support the basic system feature set for the 1832-3672 system. ENCORE CX 1832-3672 EPB SOFTWARE WITH LCR LCR). EPB software package to support the basic system feature set for the 1832-3672 system with Least Cost Routing (LCR). ENCORE CX 1832-36112 BASIC EPB 12). EPB software package to support the basic system feature set for the 1832-36112 system. ENCORE CX 183236112 SOFTWARE WITH LCR (SOFT/361 EPB software package to support the basic system feature set for the 1832-36112 system with Least Cost Routing (LCR).
11. STATION FEATURES: (FP6)

11 DISPLAY CALLS IN QUEUE FOR UCD GROUPS display key telephone:
From an
Dial 279 or press pre-programmed button. Dial UCD group number (270-277). C. Your display will tell you how many calls are in queue for that group. d. Dynamic update of display occurs as queue changes. Press the Monitor button to teninate mode. NOTE: This feature cannot be used a call in progress. 11.2 INTERCOM TRANSFER
2996301
Transfer
DSS Buttons
2996302
Receive or make an intercom call. dial tone is heard). Press the TRANS button Dial the station where the call is to be transferred. When 2nd station answers, you are in a supervised transfer mode (1 st station is staged for transfer). Hang up (station 1 and 2 are connected). ICM Transfer Using DSS Buttons a. b. c. Receive or make an intercom call using a DSS button. Press DSS button where call is to be transferred. Hang up (station 1 and station 2 are connected). Transfer Uslng DSS Buttons a. Search and
2996303
These software kits must installed on the Enhanced Processor Board (EPB, 2994402). Central Processor Board (CPB, 2994401) will not sup-
Receive or make an intercom call using a DSS button.
11.3 FORCED TONE RINGING INTERCOM CALL When calling a key telephone station: a. b. Dial 5%. Dial 3digit station extension (call tone rings station). f.
or up to terminate call in progress. Go off hook and dial 52 to retrieve call in personal
11.5 SLT MULTI-LINE CONFERENCE 11.4 SLT PERSONAL PARK While connected to first call: a. b. e. Hook flash (hear IC dial tone). Dial 52 (1 st call is placed in personal park). Place 2nd call. Hook flash (hear dial tone). Dial 52 (returns 1st call and places 2nd call in personal park). While connected to outside call: a. b. Hook flash (hear tone). Dial 52 (1 call is placed in personal park). Place 2nd outside call. Hook flash. Dial 60 (all three parties are Hang up to terminate conference.
201-10
ENCORE CX 36112 FIELD CONVERSION KIT
SECTION 202 ISSUE 1 , JULY

TABLE OF DESCRIPTION 1. PAGE ............................................................. 1 2.1 ANSWERING AT SLT ................................... 1 2.2 CANCELLING CALL FORWARD OR DND FROM AN SLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. ADDITIONAL 36112 SLT FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
202-A
ENCORE 36112 FIELD CONVERSION KIT

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX 36112 system has access to all features available to the ENCORE CX 3672 system, and all features operate the same way. In addition, the Enhanced Processor Board (EPB) used in the ENCORE CX 36112 system a l l o w s a c c e s s t o additional features for Single Line Telephones c. When you hear or HF announce tone (call transfer) or confirmation tone (call park), hang up the handset. d. second call will now begin to ring. Lift the handset and you are connected to the second call. NOTE: This operation is necessary for automated attendant operation.
2. ADDITIONAL 36112 SLT FEATURES 2.1 ANSWERING CAMP-ONS AT SLT STATIONS

SLT stations can now transfer or park a CO call in progress before answering a second camped-on call. If the SLT station has a CO call in progress and a second call is on: a Hookflash. Hear intercom dial tone. b. Dial the extension number of the station to which you want to transfer the call, or the desired park zone number.
2.2 CANCELLING CALL FORWARD OR DND FROM AN SLT

In the 3672 system, DND is activated m. by dialing q cancelled and is forward activated and Call m. This cancelled by dialing q is also true in the 36112 system, but you can also cancel either feature by dialing just one code. To cancel DND or Call Forward: a Dial This code is especially convenient if you forget whether you had or call forward programmed on your phone.
202-l
SECTION ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER
ENCORE CX 816 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION 1. TECHNOLOGY. 2
PAGE ...........................................
SYSTEM CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. VISUAL SIGNALS

4.1 4.2 4.3 ............................................... STATION CO LINE BUTTONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................................
3 3 3 4
5. AUDIBLE SIGNALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENVIRONMENTAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS AND ........................................ PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMDR CALL RECORD BUFFERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMDR PRINTED MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 6 7 7 7 7
7. LCD DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. NUMBERING PLAN.. ...................................................
LIST OF TABLES
1.
CONNECTION REFERENCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
300-A
SECTION 300 ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1 9 8 8

1. TECHNOLOGY The ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System is a microprocessor controlled, solid state electronic switching system which distributes communications in a non-blocking format. All control, switching and interface circuitry is condensed onto a single printed circuit board (PCB) located inside the key service unit (KSU). Switching is accomplished through a solid state crosspoint matrix that provides voice path connections for 4 (8) central office lines, 8 (16) key telephones and 8 intercom paths. The CO interfaces are equipped with transformer barriers for system classification as an FCC fully protected system. Each CO circuit supports rotary or DTMF dialing under software control. The DTMF tones are generated tones and system in each The central microprocessor is a Z-80 and controls the crosspoints and central office line relays. It also controls communications between slave microprocessors located in each ENCORE CX key telephone. The 816 contains all system memory, which is composed of 64K of Read Only Memory (ROM) and of Random Access Memory (RAM). The RAM is subdivided so that part is used as CPU working area and part is used for customer data base. The customer data base memory is protected from loss by a long-life lithium battery. The system generic memory (ROM) is contained in a Program Module (PM) that is interfaced to the KSU through a modular connecting arrangement. This allows access for removal of system software when upgrading software feature packages. The system power is regulated by a linear power supply. A shielded transformer converts the 117 VAC into 24 on a separate power mounted within the KSU cabinet. supply The 816 system is UL listed. Each key telephone contains a microprocessor and circuitry to monitor button activity and control lamp (LED) indications. A built-in speaker permits voice or tone calling to the station. Every telephone has a flexible button field which can be individually programmed for 1 of 6 functions. The key telephone sets are equipped with 9 fixed function buttons and either 12 or 24 flexible buttons which can be individually programmed by individual users, 2 volume controls, an intercom mode selection switch and integrated speaker. For emergency applications, a stand atone battery assembly may be connected to the battery input terminals on the KSU. This retains system power in the event of commercial power failure. The system offers automatic cut-through of 3 central office lines to three optionally provided single line telephones. These instruments can make and receive calls during a commercial AC power outage or following a CPU failure.
2. SYSTEM CAPACITY
8 CO (Outside) Lines 8 Intercom Channels 16 Key Telephone Stations 1 Music Source Input 1 External Paging Port 2 Loud Bell Controls Input 1 24 VDC Battery Connector OPTIONAL 1 Port for SMDR 1 Time Clock
ENCORE CX 8 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION The ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System is designed to meet the telecommunications needs of small to medium sized businesses. The KSU is a wall mountable unit that contains Key Service Board (KSB), power supply and pre-wired connectors for station and CO line interfaces. This unit comes equipped for 4 outside lines and 8 stations. are 8 intercom channels, 1 external paging port, and 2 loud bell control ports. The music input allows connection of an external source that can be used for Music-On-Hold and Background Music. The alarm input allows the connection of an external alarm or other sensing device. When activated the alarm will signal designated telephones.
The system can be expanded from a 4 x 8 system to an 8 x 16 by adding the modular interface board to the KSU. This board provides interface circuits to expand the system by an additional 4 outside lines and 8 stations. The KSU contains a connector that allows an external battery package and charging unit to be joined with the system. This battery package supports the system in complete operation during a power failure.
4. VISUAL INDICATIONS
4.1 STATION BUTTONS Off Hook/Busy Incoming Intercom Ring Call Announce Message Wait Callback Do Not Disturb Door Box Calling Steady 120 ipm flutter 120 ipm flutter 120 ipm flutter 60 ipm flash 30 ipm flash
4.2 CO LINE BUTTONS (OUTSIDE LINES)
Incoming Outside Transferred Outside tine Recall Queued Line Exclusive Hold System Hold I-Hold In Use
30 ipm flash 120 ipm flash 480 ipm flutter 480 ipm flutter 120 ipm flash 60 ipm flash 30 ipm double flash Steady
4.3 FUNCTION BUTTONS Call Forward Message Waking (active) (CALLBK button) Call Waiting (active) Line Queue (active) (CALLBK button) Do Not Disturb Mute Monitor (speakerphone on/on-hook dialing) Conference (active) . Hold (call wait) Hold (intercom paths busy) Speed/Save- (during dialing) Preselected Messages button) Intercom Call (hold button) 30 ipm flash 15 ipm flash 60 ipm flash Steady Steady Steady Steady Steady 120 ipm flash Steady Steady 15 ipm flash 15 ipm flash
300-3
5. AUDIBLE SIGNALS
TONE SIGNAL Intercom Dial Tone
KEY TELEPHONES
TIMING CHART FREQUENCY 701 Hz sec. DUTY CYCLE (Seconds) Continuous
Busy Tone
ON
701 Hz 0 1 2 3 4 5 121511471 Hz (701 Hz for 3672)

12 0 1 3 2 3 4 4sec.
on/.5 off
Ring Back Tone
off
intercom Call Announce
935 Hz 3 bursts
off
Error Tone
701 Hz
on/.25 off
Intercom Call Tone

01 2 3 4 5sec.
Hz
off
Incoming CO Line Ring Tone 0 Transferred and Recalling CO Line Message Wait Call Back Queue Call Back ON OFF 0 1 2 3
4 sec.
Hz on/l 1 2 3 4 Hz on/l
012 3 4 5sec.
off
off/ off
Hz
off
300-4
5. AUDIBLE SIGNALS TONE SIGNAL Camp-On
KEY TELEPHONES (CONTD) TIMING CHART

FREQUENCY DUTY CYCLE
(Seconds) off once
Hz OFF
0 1 3 4 sec.
Paging Alert
0 1 2sec. 345
935 Hz
1 sec. burst once
DND Tone
ON
1 2 3
701 Hz
off
3 times
pause 3 times 701 Hz 3 bursts off
Conference Time Out

0 1 2 3 4 sec.
Programming . Confirmation
0 2 3 4 5 sec.
1471 Hz
1.5 sec. burst once
Programming Error Tone 5 sec.
1471 Hz
6 times
off
6. SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS AC Input to Power Supply Power Consumption Output Voltage Station Cable Lengths (Max.) (twisted 2-pair) Fuse AC Input 100 Watts 28 VDC, 2.0 A
500 ft. of 26 AWG Cable 1000 ft. of 24 AWG Cable 1500 ft. of 22 AWG Cable 1.0 A, 250V
600 Ohms 0
Music Source (Input) Contact Rating External Page Control Loud Bell Control Alarm External Page Port (Isolated Output Impedance Output Power
1 .O A, 24 VDC 1 .O A, 24 VDC 1 .O A. 24 VDC

600 Ohms 0 1 Maximum
6.2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

Operating Temperature Recommended Humidity 32 to 122F 78F 5% to 90% non-condensing
6.3
DTMF Dialing Frequency Deviation Rise Time Duration of DTMF Signal Interdigit Time- 1.5% 3 msec.
70 msec. Minimum 130 msec. Minimum
PULSE Dialing Pulse Rate (programmable) Percent Break/Make (programmable)

Dialing Memory System Speed Dialing
or
Station Speed Dialing Save Number CO Type
numbers (24digit) 20 numbers 1 number (per station) Loop start only
ENCORE CX 8 16 TECHNICAL
6.4 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

KEY SERVICE UNIT Height Width Depth Weight KEY TELEPHONE Height Width Depth Weight 16.5 11.75 3.0 17.6 lb. 8.75 8.75 2.75 3.4 lb. PHONE BOX Height Width Depth Weight EXPANSION MODULE Height Width Weight 1.75 5.5 4.0 1 lb. 11 5.5 1 1.76 lb.
6.5
DATA FORMAT DATA RATE
PORT
Asynchronous, bits, 2 stop bits, no parity baud (bps) A high signal on pin 4 and pin 20 (DSR) l nabios output and a low signal inhibits output A high signal is provided on pin (RTS) and pin 6 (DTR) at times. Character set data provided in the form of standard numerical code (ASCII). and format is and/or programmable.
DATA PROTOCOL
PRINTER OUTPUT
6.6 SYSTEM TYPE
BUFFERING
CALL RECORD BUFFER BUFFER FULL HEADER YES
TABLE 1. KSU
CONNECTION REFERENCE CHART
816
2 3 6.7
SMDR PRINTED
l
SMDRMTALOBT*g*
4 5 6
4 CTS 6
This message is printed if more than 16 call records are generated by the phone system while the printer is off-line; the system can store a maximum of 16 call
CTS DTR
Data Transmit Data To Send Data Terminal Ready signal Ground To
7. LCD DISPLAY
The display is arranged into an upper and lower field. The upper field displays the current activity of the telephone. The lower field is divided into 2 sections. The right section of the lower field displays the date, speed bin number, connected intercom station or outside line number. The left section of the lower field displays current time or elapsed time on an outside call.
FUNCTION
STATIONS DISPLAY STATION 100 01 SEP 86 am
CALLED STATIONS DISPLAY
Idle Station
Manually Dialing Outgoing Calls
Recalling tine from Hold
LINE 06
am
Recalling tine from Another Station
Connected to incoming Line
Intercom Call CALL TO am 01 SEP 86
300-8
ENCORE CX 8 1 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
7. LCD DISPLAY (CONTD)

FUNCTION STATIONS DISPLAY CALLED STATIONS DISPLAY CAMP-ON BY STA 100 am 01 SEP 86 CAMP-ON BY ..(name).. am CONFERENCE 21 SEP 86 am
Conference
86
Internal Page
INTERNAL PAGE am ZONE 1
86 PAGE FROM . .(name). . am 21 OCT 86
External Page EXTERNAL PAGE ALL CALL am
All Call Page
86
Message Waiting
Replying to a Message Waiting
86 CALL TO am
30 SEP 86
Station Call (Originating Station)
3672 system.
SECTION 300 ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1 9 8 8

FUNCTION CALLING STATIONS DISPLAY CALLED STATIONS DISPLAY
Forwarded Call
Preset
Hunt Groups
Queuing
Outside tine Transfer
Programmed Flash Command (F) Programmed Pause Command (P)
10

FUNCTION Programmed Tone Switchover (S) STATIONS CALLED STATIONS DISPLAY
Call Pickup
Exclusive Hold
Meet Me Page
Do Not Disturb
Ringing tines
Call Back
For Intercom Call
initiator only:
hdd initiator only:
Automatic Callback** * I nese features are available with PM-3 software only. 300-l 1
ENCORE
cx 8 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
8. NUMBERING PLAN
1 0 0 - l 15 250-255 260-267 3 70 71 73 75 77
9 0 x2 X6
1XX
SPEED
Station Numbers Call Park Hunt Group Pilot Numbers Camp-On (Call Wait) Night Service Code Enter Pre-Selected Messages (XX= 00-10) Background Music Alarm Reset Universal Night Answer Loop Key Group Access Individual Outside Line Access (XX= 01 Line Group Access Attendant Page Zone 1 Internal Page Zone 2 Internal All Call External Zone Meet Me Page Answer Directed Call Pickup station number) Group Pickup Save Number Last Number
300-l 2
SECTION 30 1 ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER 1988

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION 1. 2
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM CAPACITY

2.1 2.2 ENCORE CX 3672 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 1
3.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT

3.1 3.2 3.3 KEY SERVICE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSS CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 2 4
4. 5. 6.
AUDIBLE SIGNALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NUMBERINGPLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PORT SMDR CALL RECORD BUFFERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURE PACKAGE 5 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 7. LCD
6 6
8. ADDITIONAL SPEED DIAL BINS . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF TABLES 1. CONNECTION REFERENCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
301 -A
ISSUE
SECTION 30 NOVEMBER
ENCORE CX 3672 TECHNICAL

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX 3672 Key System is a modular expandable system engineered for growth through modular card (KTU) expansion as well as KSU module expansion and provides a flexible assortment of features through software options and optional circuit cards. The systemis divided into 2 one Basic and one Expansion KSU. The Basic KSU is housed in a wall-mountable cabinet that contains the backplane, two 24 VDC modular power supply slots, and wired connectors for an Emergency Transfer Unit, station and CO line boards, DC/DC Converter, Application Card and 90 generator unit. This basic KSU has a capacity of 18 CO lines and 32 key telephone phone boxes. can be installed in place of any key telephone. Standard single line telephones can be installed by exchanging key station interface boards with single line interface boards. Eight single line telephones can replace 8 for each board exchanged. The Expansion KSU is also housed in a wall-mounted cabinet that contains pre-wired connectors for an Emergency Transfer Unit, station and CO line boards and an interconnection to extend matrix connections of the Expansion KSU to the Basic KSU. The Expansion KSU has a capacity of 18 CO lines and 40 stations. The system can be equipped with an optional DC/DC converter that contains the necessary circuitry for complete battery charging to external batteries for backup operation. NOTE: The following parts of Sec. 300 are also applicable to the ENCORE 3072 system: 4, 5, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, and 7. Mount for additional Receiver, Sender Module 1 DC/DC converter, equipped with Battery Charging Board and Tone Emitting Unit 1 Emergency Transfer Unit, including: 1 Loud Bell Control Handles 6 CO tines
2.2 ENCORE CX 3672 (Basic and Expansion Cabinets) 36 CO

8 Intercom Channels
72 Key Telephone Stations

2 Music Source Inputs Port 1 OPTIONAL 1 Applications Card, including: 2 External Paging Ports 2 DTMF Receivers
2 DTMF Senders
Mount for additional Mount for additional Receiver/
Sender Module
DC/DC converter, equipped with Battery Charging Board and Tone Emitting Unit 2 Emergency Transfer Units, including: 2 Loud Bell Control Handles 12 CO Lines 1
3. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT 3.1 KEY SERVICE UNIT Height 14 20 15% Weight 52.9 lb. EXPANSION KEY SERVICE UNIT Height 14 13 15% 35.3 lb. Weight CONSOLE Height 8% 5 2% 2 lb. Weight
2. SYSTEM CAPACITY 2.1 ENCORE CX (Basic Cabinet Only) 18 CO tines Intercom 32 Key Telephone Stations
2 Music Source Inputs Port 1 OPTIONAL 1 Applications Card, including: 2 External Paging Ports 2 DTMF Receivers 2 DTMF Senders Port Mount for additional
301-l
4. AUDIBLE SIGNALS TONE SIGNAL Incoming CO tine
SINGLE LINE TELEPHONES TIMING CHART FREQUENCY

CYCLE
(Seconds) off
Intercom Ring 0 Transferred and Recalling CO Line Queue Call Back Intercom 0 Announce to a Busy Tone
0 1 2 3 4 5 sec.
1 on/4 off 1 2 3 4 5 sec. off 0 1 3

4 sec.
440 1 3
4 sec.
off
440 Hz 3 bursts 0 1 3
4 sec.
off
440 Hz
on/.5 off
Error Tone
0 1
440 Hz 2 3 4 440
1 2 3 .
on/.25 off
DND Tone
off
Paging Alert 0 1 2 3 4
440 Hz
1 sec. burst
4. AUDIBLE SIGNALS (CONTD) TONE SIGNAL Call Warning Tone TIMING CHART FREQUENCY 440 Hz CYCLE (Seconds) 1 sec. burst
DND Warning Tone sec. Conference Time Out 0 Camp-On 1 2 3
440 Hz 3 bursts
off
440 Hz
on/.2 off
440 Hz
sec. burst
Conference Warning Tone
440 Hz
1 sec. burst
Confirmation Tone
440 Hz
1 sec. burst
I IUN
3 . NOVEMBER
5. NUMBERING PLAN Station numbering 100-199 Station Numbering 200-211 Voice Mail Group Numbers 240-247 Call Park Locations 250-255 Hunt Group Pilot Numbers 260-267 UCD Group Numbers 270-277 UCD DND (Toggle On and Off) 270 UCD Status Display (Calls in 279 Queue) EPB Software Version (Attendant 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299
3
694 695 696 699
71
73 75 76 77 78 79 80 61 82 84 85 86 67 9 0
Custom Message Programming Dial Memo Button (Assignment Auto Button (Assignment Only) Program Name in Display Forward CO Line Off-Net (Attendant Background Music (Attendant Only) CO Line Outgoing Call Disable/ Enable (Attendant Only) Set System Clock (Attendant Only) Camp-On (with busy signal from intercom call attempt) Queue Cancel (LCR) Voice Mail MSG Indication On (Voice Mail Stations Only) Flash Command to CO Line Personal Park DND (Toggle Call Forward Speed Dial Programming Message Wait/Callback Message Wait/Callback Return Voice Mail Indication OFF (Voice Mail Station Cancel DND, Call Forward, Message Speed Dial Access Last Number Redial Ringing on Intercom Force Calls Conference with Personal Park Button (Assignment Only) Button (Assignment Only) Button (Assignment Button (Assignment
FLASH Button (Assignment Only) MUTE Button (Assignment Only) Button (Assignment Only) Answer Mode (Toggle for Tone Ringing or Hands Free) Program Station Flexible Buttons Night Service Account Code Enter (Button AssignmentOnly) Background Music (Toggle BGM) Alarm Reset Only) Intercom on hold Button (Assignment Only) Universal Night Answer Attendant Override (Assignment LOOP Button (Assignment Only) CO Group 1 Access LCR Version Software) CO Group 2 Access CO Group 3 Access CO Group 4 Access CO Group Access CO Group 6 Access CO Group 7 Access CO Group 8 Access Only) CO Group Access or LCR Access With LCR Active Attendant Directed Call Pip Directed Call Piiup Programming Mode (Extension 100 Only) Group Call Pickup All Page External Zones) Page Internal Zone1 Page Internal Zone 2 Page Internal Zone 3 Page Internal Zone 4 All Page (Internal Zones Only) Page External Zone 1 Page External Zone 2
59
60 690 691 692 693
All Page (External Zones, Only) Meet Me Page Last Number Redial SPEED l SPEED + SPEED Save Number Dialed SPEED + Saved Number Redial
6.
bits, 2 stop DATA RATE 1: Port 1200 baud
no parity (CPB only) on APL
DATA PROTOCOL
A high signal on pin 4 output and low inhibits output if CPB switch 2 in position. CPB 2 is in ON position signal on pin 4 is ignorrd. A high signal is provided on pin 6 (DTR) at
pin
PRINTER OUTPUT
data is provided in (ASCII).
form of standard is and/or
TABLE 1. KSU I SIGNAL NAME RD TD CTS PIN NO.
CONNECTION REFERENCE PRINTER/TERMINAL KEY: PIN NO. , TD SIGNAL NAME RD DTR Data Transmit To Data Ready Signal Ground To
3
6.1
CALL RECORD BUFFERING
5
SYSTEM TYPE PULL HEADER NO , I I
DSR
7. LCD DISPLAY: FEATURE PACKAGE FEATURES
FUNCTION
CALUNG STATIONS DISPLAY
CALLED STATIONS DISPLAY
Automatic Callback
Intercom Hold
Call I
For hold initiator only:
For hdd initiator only:
I
Display Security
STA 105 HOLDING
1 -i
STA 111
Station Call (Off-Premise) . . I . FORWARDED10 SPEED 01 PM .
Voice Mail (station calling station forwarded , to voice mail) Voice Mail (station calling voice mail to pick up mail)
PM
CALLED118
8. ADDITIONAL SPEED DIAL BINS
3016
ENCORE CX FIELD CONVERSION KIT

TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION PAGE
1
1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. SYSTEM CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 OPTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 1 1 1 2 2
3. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 BASIC KEY SERVICE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 POWER CAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 EXPANSION KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302-A
SECTION 302 1. JULY

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX 36112 Field Conversion Kit is a modular expandable system engineered for growth through modular card (KTU) expansion as well as KSU module expansion. I t p r o v i d e s a features flexible assortment of through software options and optional circuit cards. The Field Conversion Kit includes the following: one Expansion KSU and one power cage. Adding this equipment makes the ENCORE CX 3672 system expandable to an ENCORE CX 38112 system. The system is divided into 2 one Basic and one Expansion KSU. The Basic KSU is housed in a wall mountable cabinet that contains the backplane, two 24 VDC modular power pre-wired and slots, connectors for an Emergency Transfer Unit, station and CO line boards, DC/DC converter, Application Card and VAC ring generator unit. This is the same Basic KSU that is used for the ENCORE CX 3872 system. The Basic KSU has a capacity of 18 CO lines and 32 key telephones and/or phone boxes. can be installed in place of any key telephone. Standard single line telephones can be installed by exchanging key station.. interface boards with single line Eight boards (SI interface single line telephones can replace 8 for each board exchanged. The Expansion KSU is also housed in a wall mounted cabinet that contains pre-wired connectors for an Emergency Transfer Unit, station and CO line boards and an interconnection to extend matrix connections of the Expansion KSU to. the Basic KSU. The Expansion KSU also includes a power cage which mounts to the right of the Basic KSU and houses the third power supply which controls card slots The Expansion KSU has a capacity of 18 CO lines, 80 stations, a second APL card and an EIB card. It also contains a second DC/DC converter, which is required if KIB card slots 15-21 are used.
2. SYSTEM CAPACITY 36 CO lines

16 112 Intercom Channels Key Telephone Stations Music Source Inputs External Paging Ports Port Option Card Ports (See Section 402)
2.1 OPTIONAL
Port System Battery Backup Emergency Transfer Circuits SLT Ring Generator 2 APL Cards 1
3. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT 3.1 BASIC KEY SERVICE UNIT

Height Width Depth Weight 14 20 15 52.9 lb.
302-l
3.2 POWER CAGE

Height 14 6 114 Width 314 Depth Weight 14.5 lb.
3.3 EXPANSION KSU Height 13 314 Width 26 114 15 Depth Weight 70.75 lb.
ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
DESIGN AND CONFIGURATION

TABLE Of CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.8 5.
PAGE ...................................................... 1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SITE PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STRUCTURAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CABLING CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TELCO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 5 5
PROGRAMMING WORKSHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 CO LINE PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STATION PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUTTON ASSIGNMENT CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIALTABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
10 11 13 14 15 18 19
8. 7.
FEATURE PACKAGE V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 7.2 REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 21 22 22 23 24 . 24 24 .
8. 9.
VOICE MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 ................................................. 9.2 CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 VOICE MAIL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE: 9.4 REMOTE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 EXIT MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 FEATURE PACKAG; VI PROGRAMMING WORKSHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.
11.
400-A
SECTION 400
ENCORE CX DESIGN AND CONFIGURATION
OF FIGURES
SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3672 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3. KEYPAD/TERMINAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2 1 4. SAMPLE ENCORE CX 3672 CONFIGURATION (WITHOUT LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. SAMPLE ENCORE CX 36112 CONFIGURATION (WITH LCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. .......... 7. SAMPLEOFWHATISPRlNTEDWHENTHElNSTALLERENTERSDS4.. . . . . . . . . . . 8. SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS D S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS D ............ 10. SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF TABLES
SURVEY DATA REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2. INSTALLATION SEQUENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. LIST OF COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . .. . ... . . . ... . .. . . . ... . . . . . ... . . . .. . ... 8
ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM

1. INTRODUCTION Proper planning minimizes the time required and costs incurred during an installation. Maintenance, changes and expansion can be accomplished efficiently when planned prior to the initial installation. This results in customer satisfaction and good will through a minimum of disruption to their business activities. This section is presented in 3 parts. The first provides a survey of planning details that should be considered prior to installing an ENCORE CX system. The second part presents a typical system layout for use in developing a detailed system plan. The third part briefly discusses system programming and the information required to plan a customers system. Worksheets are provided to assist in gathering this information. 2. GENERAL Normally a survey of the customers facilities is made for the purpose of developing a cost the installed system. This survey develops preliminary data that is often insufficient to allow for detailed planning of the actual installation. approaching this survey in a manner designed to highlight required information, the cost estimate survey can be more effectively used in the detailed planning state. This will eliminate, in most cases, the need for a second visit to data.
A cost estimate details what equipment is required and how many of each type. However, realistic placement of the equipment and area dimensions are sometimes overlooked. It is here where major cost savings can be made since the time factor required to accomplish the installation is a major variable. Each factor affecting system planning is discussed in detail in this section. Table 1 presents in question format the type of data required to convert a cost estimate survey into a detailed system plan. Prior to completion of the initial visit, review the questions in the table to ensure that all pertinent data has been obtained. 3. POWER REQUIREMENTS The system requires a power source capable of providing 117 VAC single phase power at 60 Hz. The power source must have the capacity to deliver 15 amperes. The facility power line must be a dedicated line equipped with a surge protector in order to help protect the system against erratic operations and damage. In addition, the outlet of the facility power source must be located within reach of the 6 long power cord supplied with the system power supply.
400-l
ENCORE CX DESIGN AND
TABLE QUESTION SEQUENCE NUMBER 1
SURVEY DATA REQUIREMENTS DATA REQUIREMENT CHECK
Telephone types: 2 1 -button: 2 1 -button/executive display: display: Phone box: In what type of facility will the system be installed? Single-floor, multi-office facility Single-building, multi-floor facility Single-floor, single-off ice facility
3 4
Have you obtained a blueprint of the facility? If no blueprint is available, have you sketched out an approximate map of the facility? Have you obtained correct dimensional measurements of the facility? Have you determined the optimum each piece of equipment? Has the customer agreed to the use of the location? for
Yes Y e s
Y Y
e e
s s
8 7 8 9 10
Have you determined the layout and length Of required cable runs? Are there special environmental relating to the site? there special customer power requirements? Are there special power requirements necessary to operate the power Facility construction information: Type of ceiling construction Access between offices Type of wall construction Access between floors Y Y e e s s
Comments:
4. INSTALLATION PLAN
TABLE 2. INSTALLATION SEQUENCE
There are many approaches to developing a system installation plan. The following section describes a general approach for a typical installation. Included will be standard considerations that affect equipment placement, environmental and cabling requirements, and interface information between telephone company equipment and the ENCORE CX system. A better understanding of the various stages of a job normally results in more careful planning, preparation and coordination of the job efforts. 4.1 GENERAL APPROACH An overview of the system installation process can provide sates personnel with greater insight into the kind of information needed to develop a detailed system plan. Each customers facility is different and requires a tailored approach to ensure that the job runs smoothly. Each facility will have its own combination of circumstances which must be addressed. Table 2 summarizes the major stages of a typical telephone installation. The order in which the steps are performed can be reflect the particular circumstances of each installation. However the general approach should include all the installation steps provided in Table 2. 4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS The environment where a telephone system is located affects the reliability and of system. These factors, if not properly monitored, may lead to system failures, can result in excessive customer service calls and customer dissatisfaction. A summary of the environmental factors affecting the ENCORE CX Telephone System is presented in Table 3. These factors must be considered when developing a system
plan.
STEP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
INSTALLATION STAGE Site survey and data collection. Plan major equipment layout. (MDF, KSU, system power supply and position of the attendants.) Plan MDF block layout and cable routing. Preparation and preassembly of KSU, power supply and MDF at shop facility. Site work: a. Running of station cables. b. Equipment mounting. (MDF, KSU, power supply, etc.) c. MDF and remote terminal connections. d. Telephone and DSS e. System programming. System checkout. Customer introduction and training.
6. 7.
4.3 SITE PLANNING Site preparation is dependent upon the customers facilities. In many cases, there may be only one where the KSU, power supply and MDF can be mounted. However, when several locations are possible, the advantages and disadvantages of each location should be considered. Non-structural considerations: A The KSU is designed for wall-mounting only. of the majority of Locate the KSU so that the length of cable runs can be minimized.
TABLE 3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS Ambient light TOENCOREEQUIPMENT Sufficient light should be readily available to enable inspection, testing, and other functions to be performed at the common equipment location. The equipment contains semiconductors and other electronic components that are very sensitive to heat. Adequate ventilation is required for the KSU to allow upward circulation of air through the cabinet grills. The KSU does not require any special cooling considerations, except to avoid mounting it near any heat generating objects, such as heat registers. F Sustained average temperature should not be greater than nor less than The telephones and DSS contain semiconductors; care must therefore be taken to avoid placement in areas producing excessive amounts of heat. The customer (end user) should be cautioned, at the time of installation, about repositioning stations. Avoid excessive humidity, which may cause condensation on metal surfaces and consequently produce corrosion. The maximum permissible humidity is 90% (non-condensing) and the minimum is 5% (relative). Avoid placing equipment in areas where dust or other airborne contaminants are present. Chemical fumes or vapors will cause or oxidation of electrical contacts. the equipment where the possibility of water damage Avoid exists: for instance, directly under overhead plumbing or on floors where flooding could occur. The common equipment must be located where working room is available for two people. Locations where the equipment may be inadvertently hidden or blocked by placement of bulky items (such as packing cases) should be avoided. The equipment, (telephones, KSU, etc.) should be in an environment free of electrical interference. from transmitters, copy machines, arc welders, and other electrical apparatus can disturb the operation of control circuits. The equipment should be installed in a location free Of vibration disconnecting or loosening components.
Temperature
Humidity
Dust and airborne contaminants Water flooding
Accessibility
Electrical interference
Vibration
4.3 SITE PLANNING

C. Location of existing telephone ducts or conduits. D. The AC line should be dedicated exclusively B. Using the proper fasteners to attach backboard
E.
F.
G. H.
to the system. If the line is equipped with a circuit breaker at the service entrance panel, this switch should be labeled Do Not Turn Off. The equipment should be installed in a well ventilated area having a temperature range of degrees F with a recommended temperature range of degrees F and a (non-condensing). humidity range of A good earth ground must be provided using 8 gauge or larger wire. A cold water pipe with insulated joints or meters by-passed with 8 gauge or larger straps will also provide suitable ground. Appropriate lighting conditions and adequate working space should be provided for future service calls. Consideration must be given to those conditions that may cause damage to the equipment. For example, dust or vapor from flammable or corrosive solvents may cause damage. The installation site should not be located in an area likely to be flooded or damaged by moving objects nearby. The KSU should not be located in an area near. electrical interference including equipment such as heavy motors, welders, dimmers, radio transmitters, copy machines, etc.
to wall. C. Using the proper fasteners to attach ail equipment to the mounting surface. 4.5 REQUIREMENTS cabling used must conform to industry standard gauge inside wiring cable or twisted cable. (OHVA requires 3 pair). Efforts should be made to stay within the following prescribed cable lengths: 500 26 AWG Cable 24 AWG Cable 1000 1500 22 AWG Cable Station and DSS console cables are terminated at the MDF by connecting blocks and associated bridging clips. The bridging clips are used to establish continuity between the KSU side of the block and station side. These clips permit station leads to be opened conveniently for testing and troubleshooting purposes. Station cables are terminated at the station by standard modular jacks. The modular jacks permit the station leads to be opened conveniently for testing and troubleshooting purposes. 4.6 TELCO INTERFACE Telco lines must be terminated in an X jack for the 3672 and C jacks for the 816 system. At the time the 11 C or the 1 X is ordered from the telephone company, you must the sequence in which the central office lines are to be connected to the terminal. Telco will wire these lines to the terminal in accordance with the specified sequence. The 3672 KSU is equipped with an type connector that complies with USOC X described in FCC regulations Title 47, Chapter Part 68. Connect this plug to the jack-terminated cable provided by the telephone company. required by regulation, the X will be placed within 25 of the KSU location by the telephone
4.4 STRUCTURAL Wall mounting will proceed easily when equipment is fastened to a mounting surface that has been securely attached to the wall. (A backboard such as plywood makes it convenient and safer for fastening the KSU, connecting blocks, cable and wire hangers, etc.) Refer to the Technical Specifications section of this manual for loaded weights of each KSU to determine type of fastener and fastening technique required for the wail material and surface. Increase the safety and security of this installation by: A. Mounting the KSU on. a directly on a wall surface. and not
400-5
SECTION 400 MAY 1987
TABLE 4. SYSTEM COMPONENT LIST PART NUMBER 2993501 2993502 2993614 2993802 2993803 2993604 2993611 I P M - 2 SMDR RCU BBU ABBREVIATION I I I DESCRIPTION 818 BASIC SYSTEM 818 EXPANSION MODULE 616 PROGRAM MODULE III-ENH 818 PROGRAM MODULE II 818 SMDR MODULE I I I I I Y I I SYSTEM 818 3872 I I
816 REAL TIME CLOCK MODULE
BACKUP UNIT 3672 BASIC KSU 3672 EXPANSION KSU
2993503
I I I I I
I I I I
I I I I I
2994101 2994102 2994103
3672 POWER SUPPLY
I
COB
DC/DC CONVERTER W I T H
Y Y Y
2994402 2993701
I I
ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD
2993704 2993608
SIB
SLT INTERFACE BOARD WITH MESSAGE WAIT ADDITIONAL
Y Y
SECTION 400
ISSUE 2, NOVEMBER 1989
TABLE 4. SYSTEM COMPONENT LIST PART NUMBER 2993610 2992509 2992501 2992502 2992503 2992504 2992505 2992506 2996300 2996301 2993705 2993706 2993505 2993612 2996302 2996303 2997301 EXP-36112 EIB COB-A DSS-46 PB-1 ABBREVIATION ETU DESCRIPTION EMERGENCY TRANSFER MOD. ENHANCED KEY TELEPHONE ENHANCED KEY TELEPHONE 21 EXECUTIVE KEY TELEPHONE ENHANCED KEY TELEPHONE EXECUTIVE KEY TELEPHONE DIRECT STATION SELECT CONSOLE PHONE BOX 3672 BASIC 3672 SOFTWARE WITH LCR AMPLIFIED CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD SINGLE LINE OPX BOARD 36112 EXPANSION CABINET EXPANDED INTERFACE BOARD 36112 BASIC SOFTWARE 36112 SOFTWARE WITH SINGLE LINE ADAPTER systems on/y
Y
SYSTEM 616 3672
1
Y Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y
Y Y Y Y Y . . .
l
361
400-7
LOUD
CTL
1. CPU 2. 3. 4. 5. CLOCK 6.
I .
PAGE
I-
ENCORE CX DESIGN AND CONFIGURATION ISSUE
FIGURE 2. 3672 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
5. PROGRAMMING WORKSHEETS Each customers system can be programmed to meet individual needs. All programming (or data entry) is done at station 100 using a key telephone. Programming can be done with a 21 button display telephone. However, using a display phone will make programming easier. See Section 700 for more detailed explanation of programming procedures.
Customer data base preparation sheets should be filled out before data entry. Following are customer worksheets designed to aid in configuring a customers system to meet their individual needs. After these worksheets are filled out, they should be used by the programmer to enter the data into the system memory. A copy remain at the customers premises for use during a repair calf. updated copy should remain as of the customers file at the serving distributor location.
5.1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS PROGRAM CODE, FLASH 01 FLASH 02 FLASH 03 FLASH 04 FLASH 05 FLASH 06 07 FLASH 08 09 FLEX BUTTON FUNCTION System Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Transfer Recall Preset Forward Timer Pause Timer Call Park Timer Conference Timer MSG Wait Reminder Tone Paging Timeout Timer 00000-60s FORMAT 000-300s 000-300s 000-300s 00-99s 1-9s 000-600s DEFAULT 0 180 045 10 2 180 10 000 15
1
CUSTOMER DATA 0
l l l
ENCORE CX 3672 only. ENCORE CX 816 only.
5.1 SYSTEM PARAMETERS (CONTD)
CX 3872 only. Encore CX 818 only.
SECTION ISSUE MAY 1987
5.2 CO LINE PROGRAMMING (FLASH 30)
only.
400-l 3
5.3 STATION PROGRAMMING (FLASH 40) DATA FIELD PAGING DND SYSTEM SPEED QUEUING RINGING LINE ANSW OHVA
l
PAGE/ Ail
STATION NUMBER DEFAULT Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No
CALL FWD ALARM SIGNAL STA ID
cos
SPEAKERPHONE PICKUP GRP (O-4) PAGING ZONE (D-4) PRE FWD (3 digits) CO LINE GRP See Button Assignment Chart 0 1 1 None 1 Square*
l l
ASSIGNMENT
l l l
Square means that each button is assigned the corresponding line; ie. button 1 is line 1, etc. Page A is selected by pressing Button 10 of the flexible field. Page 8 is selected by pressing Button 11 of the flexible field. l 816 only. l 3672 only.
5.4
ASSIGNMENT CHART
This chart is to be used to assign CO line access and ringing. Any button to be assigned as a CO line , needs a numerical entry. as follows: BB button assigned 01-24.00 LL = line assigned Ol -36,OO Ringing codes are: O-no ringing 1 ringing 2 -night ringing and night ringing .
By default, buttons 1 are assigned as CO lines l-l 1 and button 12 as a loop key on the 3672. The remaining buttons on the phone are programmed as unused buttons by default. On the 816, buttons l-8 are CO lines l-8; the rest will be DSS buttons by default for stations 100 to 103 ( 2 1 -button set), or- 1 0 0 to 1 1 5 sat). To unassign a button, enter the button number and 3 pounds instead of the number: To assign a button as loop key, enter 00 for LL. When an SLT is being assigned to ring on an outside line, enter 00 for BB one entry is necessary since have no flexible buttons). l NOTE: Unassigned buttons can be programmed by individual station users.
400-l 5
5.4
ASSIGNMENT CHART (CONTD)

NUMBER I
24
ENCORE
5.5 SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS

Programmed from first attendant station. Digits (up to 24)
5.6 EXCEPTION TABLES (FLASH 50)
ALLOW TABLE A (BTN 1) Digits (8 max.)

02 03 04 06 I 07 08 09 10 I
ALLOW TABLE Digits (8 max.)

I 02 03 04 05 07 08 I
3)
09
17 18 19 20
20
I
4)
DENY TABLE A (BTN 2) Digits (8 max.)

01 02 03 04
DENY TABLE B Digits (8 max.)
I I I
02 03
I I
I
06
I 05 I
06
I
I 10
07
10
ENCORE CX
AND CONFIGURATION
5.7 SPECIAL TABLES SPECIAL TABLE 1 (BTN 5) Area Code Off ice Codes:
SPECIAL TABLE 2 (BTN 6) Area Code Office Codes:
SPECIAL TABLE 3 (BTN Code Office Codes:
SPECIAL TABLE 4 (BTN 8) Home Area Code Office Codes:
Office Code+ 1 Code+O-Deny
codes set by
to deny)
SECTION
ENCORE
AND CONFIGURATION
6. FEATURE PACKAGE V
Feature Package V (FPS) software provides a number of additional features to ENCORE CX system users. The following features are available only when Feature Package V software is installed on the EPB.
If the call remains unanswered at the end of that time then the caller will receive a recorded announcement, if assigned, for the specified message length time. After receiving the announcement the call will be placed on hdd for the specified message timer period and will hear Music On Hold. If the call has not been answered at the end of the message interval time then the call will receive the recorded announcement again and will again be placed on hold. The cycle continues until: 1. the call is answered by a member of the UCD group, or 2. the overflow timer expires and the call is routed to the overflow station. NOTE: The timer starts when the recorded announcement is applied to the call.
7. UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)

As its name implies, the feature is a means of uniformly distributing incoming calls among stations in a group. Incoming CO calls, transferred CO calls and intercom calls can all be routed to a UCD group.
7.1 OPERATION When a call is routed to a UCD group the system will search for an idle station, starting at the beginning of the groups idle list. When an idle station is found, the system removes the station from the idle list and rings it. After the call is completed and released, the station goes to the end of the groups list. Up to eight (8) groups can be configured in the system. Each group can contain up to eight (8) stations. A group is accessed via a number assigned to group. The pilot numbers and the corresponding groups are as fdlows:
CO
CO that are transferred to a busy UCD group an ongoing cycle of Musk on Hold
until (MOH), announcement, MOH, answered or routed to the overflow station. Intercom
calls to a busy group receive busy tone.
a. A
placed In DND is considered busy and is

groups list
removed from b.
c. 7.2 CONDITIONS
UCD groups can be
together by
d. for a
CO UCD Wait
Incoming CO
If all stations in a group are busy, tine calls to ring for the Answer period.
number.
considered busy.
ENCORE CX DESIGN AND
SECTION
f.
Four timers are applicable: ringer answer timer; recorded message length timer: message interval timer; and overflow timer. A maximum of two announcement devices may be assigned to the 8 groups. The first device The second is used to answer incoming CO device is used to answer transferred and holding co calls..
FLASH
TERMINAL ENTER ,
FLEX 3
h. The overflow timer will not be started unless an overflow station is in programming. i. The overflow station cannot be a member of the UCD group. To start the recorded announcement one of the following must be used: an external device (connected to a trunk port) to detect loop current; or a ring start device connected to a SIB card. k. If no device is assigned for recorded announcements then the answer timer will not be started and calls to the UCD group will continue to ring until a member of the group available. Transferred CO calls hear Music On until answered. Incoming CO lines assigned to the UCD group may be linked to a direct CO line or a loop button appearance.
W
FIGURE 3.
Entering ? at Remote
I
EQUIVALENTS
prompt will display the Key Definitions table.
VOICE MAIL REMOTE PROGRAMMING

Complete programming be done from a terminal. This allows changes to the database for feature and the terminal, the Changes can be made, system is being The terminal a I/O device connected to the port on the EPB. Access to this feature the use of the password SMOKE. Certain buttons on the terminal compare to the buttons on the telephone keypad that are normally used to program the system on-site. See Figure 3. The voice mail feature autometlcelly handles unanswered calls. be retrieved by users from the system wlth no the attendant. Up to eight (8) voice .
be
group
In the syetem. Each up to eight mail
number of
SECTION 400
ENCORE CX
AND CONFIGURATION
9.1 INSTALLATION
An optionally system must be connected to the ENCORE CX for this feature to be available. Voice mail be connected
a SIB card. The number of voice mail stations is dependent upon hardware limitations of the ECX the system (the number of available SIB ports) voice mail system. A voice mail station can support a number of station users depending upon usage. Refer to the individual voice mail systems for the of ports to station users recommended (mailboxes). 9.2 OPERATION Stations can forward calls to a voice group for leaving mail, or may call the voice mail group directly to retrieve mail. A voice mail group is accessed by dialing the pilot numbers number assigned to that group. The for the voice mail groups are as
When station ID is complete the audio connection is made between the calling station and the voice station. When the call is released the system will return the voice station to the end of the groups list and dial the appropriate digits (SO + sta to light a message waiting indication. And Canceling Indication There are two methods by a ECX system user can retrieve mail and cancel the message waiting indkatkn left by the mail system: Method 1 a. The station user presses the flashing CALLBK button. The ECX system back the group number of the voice system that left the message waiting indicatkn. Once the voice mail system answers, the ECX system automatically sends the DTMF digits of the extension calling back digits programmed in the group. The digits(s) assigned to the voke tells the system that the station user is . entering personal The ECX system then provides cut-through. b. The user listens to the voice systems prompts and follows the instructions provided. c. user exits his/her the ECX cancels the message system waiting Method2 mailbox an off-premise another ECX station), the message the ECX accessed the or
Transferred CO idle stat&n removed from the station
and at the list and it
can groups
the extension
the sands tone& At the same the calling station continues to if the call was forwarded to group (for identifkation and communication device. the
ENCORE
DESIGN
CONFIGURATION
SECTION ISSUE 1. MAY
Transferring CO Calls TO A Voice a. A station is connected to a CO line.
To
9.4 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE: SYSTEM
VOICE MAIL
b. The station presses and dials the extension number of the station forwarded to voice mail.
240
P U T
0 1
124
c.
The transferring station hangs up. The CO call will be directed to the mailbox of the station. If the transferring station attempts to the transfer or just until the voice mail system answers then it becomes necessary to reaccess the CO line and m-transfer them and go on-hook before the voice mail system answers. This will ensure that the CO party will hear the personal greeting of the mailbox user and any applicable instructions.
VOICE MAIL OUT TABLE 0

1
SUFFIX
0
NOTE:
9.3 CONDITIONS a. If all stations in a voice group are busy, intercom calls will hear ring back until a voice mail station becomes available. Transferred CO lines will hear music on hold.
In the programming example above, ringing is sent to extension 124 (or 125) when a station user (i.e. station 00) When the voice mail system answers ringing at extension 124, the ECX system dials DTMF digits corresponding to the calling extension number followed by a 0. The extension number followed by a 0 tells the voice mail system that the calling station is a mailbox user. The voice mail system will then ask the mailbox user for his password. If extension 101 is forwarded to voice mail group249 and another station attempts to call 101, ringing is sent to extension 124 (or 125). When the voice mail system answers ringing at extension 124, the ECX system corresponding to the forwarded extension number (101). This extension number tells the voice mail system that the calling party needs to be connected with mailbox 101. Next the voice mall system the calling party the of user 101 and record the message. This eliminates the need for a to enter a number.
b. Voice mail groups can be joined together by specifying an voice mail group in programming.
C.
A flex button can be programmed wlth a group pilot number.
SECTION ISSUE 1, MAY 1987 REMOTE MAINTENANCE GENERAL OVERVIEW The Remote Maintenance feature authorized to survey system and slot configuration information. This can be done through a modem or data terminal connected to the system EPB the RS-232 port. The commands are entered from a keyboard and are limited to those listed.
10.2 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
ENCORE CX
AND CONFIGURATION
10.3 MAINTENANCE PASSWORD
The Remote Maintenance feature, like Remote Programming, is entered Via a sixcharacter alphanumeric string. The password prompt is given by entering a return at the device connected to the EPB RS-232 port After the prompt is printed out, the password should be entered followed by a return. Proper entry of the password in the maintenance prompt. The Remote Maintenance password is: BRANDY
10.4 EXIT
There are three (3) basic commands available in the Remote Maintenance feature. All commands begin wlth a single character, followed by a space, another character and an optional or digits. All commands are terminated with a carriage return. Basic format of the commands is: dump system configuration data ds d s(n) dump slot configuration data ? menu X maintenance Note: n slot number on KSU front
The command terminate the current Remote Maintenance feature session. The Exit command is:
Figure 4 is an example of what is printed out when: a. The installer presses carriage return. b. The installer enters BRANDY. c. The installer enters S.
SLOT ------
---------
TYPE ----------
----------
INS
CDL 4 6 7 e 9 10 11 3 3 3 SIB 3 0 0 SIB COB I i I? 3 M S INS COB 0 1 INS INS INS INS
FIGURE 4. SAMPLE ENCORE CX 3672 CONFIGURATION
SECTION 400 ISSUE 1. MAY 1987 APL option 0 = standard APL APL option 1 APL + APL option 2 APL + RSM APL option 3 APL + + RSM Column 6 lists card status: means not present or switched out of on card means present and INS
Figure 4 is a configuration of a 3672 system without LCR, where: Column 1 lists the card slot. Column 2 lists card type of that card slot. Column 3 lists the firmware version of the card. Column lists card type and if that card is installed. Column 5 lists card options: option 0 standard KIB option 1 OHVA
5 is an example of a configuration for a 36112 system with LCR.
TIME: ENTER
SLOT
TYPE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EFB
4 4
TYPE ----------
OPTS ----------
SERV STAT INS INS
..
7
3
3
COB COB COB KIB KIB

KIR
0 1 1
0
INS
INS
SIB 9 11 12
14 :: MSC
UNPOPULATED :: UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNFOPULRTED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED COB 3 3 DATE:
14: 13 UTILITY.. .
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00s 00s 00s 00s
COB
FIGURE S SAMPLE ENCORE CX
CONFIGURATION (WITH LCR)
SECTION
: 4 ----------------SLOT TYPE : HPL TYPE: TYPE
DTMF
FIGURE
SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS D
D SLOT : 4 ----------------SLOT TYPE BOARD TYPE: COB -----------------------13 14 16 17 ED OUTGOING ENABLED ENABLED OUTGOING ENABLED ENABLED -----------DTMF DTMF DTMF DTMF DTMF DTMF -------co co co co
FIGURE 7 SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS D
SECTION
: : TYPE: TYPE STATUS ---------INS I INS INS INS -------LCD -------
24
N N N N
FIGURE 8 SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Column 4 Column
indicates station number. station type DSS, phone box). indicates status: status can indicate the entire card is out of service or a station is not installed or installed but not operational. INS status can Is and operating correctly. indicates s&e. indicates display at set.
SECTION
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
PULSE DTMF DTMF
PBX CO CO CO CO CO
NT> FIGURE 9 SAMPLE OF WHAT IS
WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS
denotes Central Office line number (l-36) denotes card in service or out of and CO line available Column 3 denotes dialing type denotes line type Column 4
Column 1 Column 2
for outgoing by the attendant or
?
LIST: SYSTEM OR SLOT A N INDICATES S S2
NO
THE ENTIRE SYSTEM E N TIRE SYSTE M <DUMPS SLOT 2
BE DUMPE ETC.>
?
X
HELP MENU
EXIT
FIGURE10 SAMPLE OF WHAT IS PRINTED WHEN THE INSTALLER ENTERS
11. FEATURE PACKAGE VI PROGRAMMING WORKSHEETS SYSTEM PARAMETERS Enter new attributes only if default is unacceptable;
FLASH
FLASH06
FLASH09 FLASH 10 FLASH 11 FLASH 13 14 1 1 1 1
. FLASH16 FLASH 17 I FLASH 18 FLASH 18 18 19 19 19 FLASH 19 19 19 19 FLASH 19 1 2 FLASH 20 FLASH 20 FLASH20 3 4 6 7 : 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 up . . . . 1
System
Hold Recall Timer

l
thr number of
on
l
hold
station. station. it end
Exclusive Hold
l
Recall
the number of on l xolusive hold
Call Transfer Ring/Recall

l
Enter the number of that transferred line will ring the telephone to station transferred it. Enter the number of seoonds new is to ring before being
Preset Forward Transfer

l
to l
predetermined
System Pause
l
Call Park
Timer
Enter the number of before perked ail wiii the originating after the initiating hu left the
Conference Timer
l
Enter the Enter the Enter the
of minutes
Message Wait Reminder lone

l
between reminder tones for station with message before will be to deteot ringing on on hold.
Page Automatic Timeout

l
CO Ring Detect Timer

l
Enter the number of tenths of second Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter if one of the if it to put line on if if liner key is to put l hold.
Hold Preference
l l
Automatic Privacy
l
to be intrude on my line at my to for night ring.
UNA to LBC 1
l l
if loud bell control 1 if it is not.
Attendant Override
l
Enter if attendant is to be PV or TN position. Enter if not. Enter number(a) for Maximum is 3.
to override station in
or
OHVA
the
in the
Attendant Assignment
PBX Dialing Codes

l
Toll
then
Station Hunt Groups

l
up to station numbers
pibt hunt
SMDR
l
Account Codes
l l
Enter
if not.
FEATURE PACKAGE VI (183296112) SYSTEM PARAMETERS Enter new attributes only if default is unacceptable
DEFAULT
FLASH36 FLASH36 FLASH36 FLASH36 FLASH36
2. 3 4
GROUP 272
6 7
.
l
if if
ration is to to
or 10
technician.
LCR Enable
.
.
l o l n8bb LCA LCR features. digit DTMF. which must by on to gain to
Security Access Code

.
Intercom Box Ring Timer

Enter number of station will ring path is to not. to any box button.
Dedicated Attendant Intercom

if
Music
l
Select
is to with background musk is to be no background of installation.
.
l
if sot at
Time
Group Listening Enable
l l
mode)
on Monitor to
Enter
to l to
nablo station to
Hook Switch Timer

l
number of flash. Entor thr numkr of Entor numkr of
of a
to
long
sot
must
in
for it to
Hook Switch Bounce

l
of call will
to attendant
valid on-hook or off-hook from being by
2500
Attendant Recall Timer

l
Tone
allow Pago
Additional Intercom
l l l
l This
additional last COB cud slot
of
COB cud b
UCD-Ring Answer
l
UCD-Music
l
UCD-Overflow
l
Auto Save Hold Timer

l
wud
designated
FEATURE PACKAGE VI (1632486112) SYSTEMPARAMETERS Enter new attributes only if default is unacceptable
DATA
43 FLASH 43 FLASH 43 FLASH44 RASH 45
8 VOICE
OR3 3
RASH 51 FLASH 51 FLASH
2 3 4
FLASH 51
6 7
Announce for no CM
l l
Enter l
for 1 tone burst for 3 tone burst
tom. tone.
FEATURE PACKAGE VI CO LINE PROGRAMMING (FLASH 30) Enter new CO attributes only if default is
NO. N O . 01 02
Phone Number
. . 7 digit circuit in all if the line is to send if Enter if is dial. to (this WATS, to right for
that
Tone/Pulse
l
.
l
Universal Night Answer (UNA)

l l
if
is to
by dialing
at night.
Loop Supewision
l l
to in use. Enter if it is not
with thr ability to
loop current
no
if thr is to Enter if me line is to be l Enter if it not to be a (Maximum of 3 liner per Enter the number of tenths of to 2
a line 24 at night only. line.
day.
Flash Timer
l l
press of
PUSH key is to
CO Line Group
l l l l l l l l
Enter if to be in a group that group dial 81. group dial 4 group dial group dial group dial group dial
by dialing
CO
l l
Class of Service
Enter if no restrictions to to if me is to governed by A station of 2 and 4.
Direct Ring
Enter UCD group or
of 1) and or
FEATURE PACKAGE VI (1832036112) STATION PROGRAMMING (FLASH 40) Enter new attributes only default is unacceptable
PAGING
NO A A NO ADD-ON NO
Station
Type .21 .
l l l l
12 24
buttons 9 function bunons. above with LCD buttons 9 function buttons. with LCD display. Select. box with 2 buttons (DND and this
Cable Number Dial Page Access

l
if a station is station is not to be ii station is permitted to not, enter no.
have
paging
DND Access
l
Not
System Speed Dial Access

l
if station is permitted to have If not, enter if station is not, enter to
to system speed dial numbers, enter
Trunk Queue Access

l l
for busy group of
ntsr
Ringing Line Preference

l
if a station automatically not. l ntor if station is to be If not, if SLT station is denied if enter to
ringing
by going
Off-Hook Voice Announce

l
SLT Add-On Conference Disable

l
. enter
Call
l l
Access
station is permitted to not, a if LCR COS is 1 and I; 1 being the to or
LCR Class of Service Priority

l l
priority. in
list table,
that group is
Station Identification
l
of the following: 0 2 3 4 NOTE: NOTE 8 box

l
line
l l
first
bs l
is
background
Station Class of
l
3 6
Speakerphone/Headset
2
Operation
disabled 1 operation)
FEATURE PACKAGE VI (1832-36112) Contd. STATION PROGRAMMING (FLASH 40) Enter new attributes only if default is unacceptable
DATA Sk PICKUP GROUP
NONE (3 1 1
Call Pickup Group

l
.
l
pickup group station is not in pickup group

page tones station will not station will
Zone Page Group

.
Preset
l
station Timor for
to which now incoming is
which
will forward.
Dial Line Group Access

l
Enter the
1 3 5 dial
groups to
station
to
dial
82 dial 84 dial
2 4
8
dial dial dial
FEATURE PACKAGE VI (1832036112)

ASSIGNMENT CHART
Enter new attributes only if default is unacceptable
10 11
14
ONBACKOFPAGE
By default buttons l-1 1 are assigned as CO lines phone are unassigned.
1 and button 12 as a loop key. The remaining buttons on the
To unassign a button (remove the CO line programming), enter the button number when programming and 2 pounds To assign a button as a loop key, enter 00 for line number.
EXAMPLE
36112 Default
50 EXCEPTION TABLES WORKSHEET
TABLE A
ALLOW TABLE B
16 I 17
19 20
DENY
01
02 03
DENYTABLEB
1
J
04
NOTE: There are no default values in
Privileges
Should the customer special exceptions to unrestricted, the information should be input on the Dialing form.
restricted
and/Or
intercom
Only
of service,
To customize dialing privileges, enter from one to eight digits in the Allow column (e.g., 69299622) and/or one to (e.g. 0 and 1). You may Specify up to 20 8digit allow entries and up to 10 deny eight digits in the Deny entries in each table. If you do not have enough entries on this form for your customers special dialing needs, see your Operations Manager for assistance. The following entries are samples of a customers dialing ALLOW calls to l-896 calls to Calls to area code 305 704 Calls to area to Calls to 494441 exchange Local calls who wishes to accomplish the following: DENY (0 + and 976 calls 411 calls dialing)
SAMPLE
TABLE A ALLOW 1. l-890 2. l-555 3.305 4. 764 5. 6.494441 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
TABLE A DENY 1.976 2.411 4.0 1 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
UCD GROUPS
Alternate Group
Table
NOTE:
A call will not be transferred to an ovefflow station unless an announcement has been programmed. An overflow station cannot be part of a UCD, voice mail or hunt group.
Refer to system programming for UCD timers.

l
Alternate
Of
which is to
if
in
origin& group
Overflow Station
l
Enter station for station This station cannot a of NOTE: This will not a miximum of 8 Y if RAN If not. to be station
sot and
RAN
programmed.
Stations
l
Announcement Table
l
Announcement Table (RAN)

l
must is CO is port
ithof CO
port or
pott
index
l
lime
l
Value entered depends on
of
on
LEAST COST ROUTING
1. 2. 3. 4.
Does customer have more than one carrier?
If yes, which
Is customer using
access? l-700-55541 41 to find out carrier for each individual line.)
Who is the equal access carrier? (If customer doesnt know, you may
5. 6.
Does customer dial international calls? Does the customer have FX lines? Fx to Fxto How does customer dial FX from from area code area code offlce code offlce code
7.
Does customer have WATS lines? Band 1 (quantity) Band 2 (quantity) Band 3 (quantity) Band 4 (quantity) Band (quantity)
8.
Does customer have a 24 hour operation? Does customer operate on weekends? Does customer diai for long distance
9.
10. Are there any local long distance exchanges the customer wants to allow or
Will
lines be to, be
a choke in any route? to local lines?
12. Are there any
VOICE MAIL
Does the customer if so, how many ports? to have a voice system?
ISSUE
SECTION 401 FEBRUARY 1988
LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2 3. 4. 5. 6.
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...............
ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (2994402) AND LCR (2996301). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROUTE LIST TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME OF DAY ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERT/DELETE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 EXCEPTION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 T. TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 .
9. 10. 11.
TABLE (OFFICE CODES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 WORKSHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
LIST OF FIGURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10.
ROUTE LIST TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO GROUPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAILY TIME TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERT/DELETE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-DIGIT OFFICE CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCR OPERATION FLOWCHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTING LCR TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 7 7 8 8 9
SECTION 401 ISSUE 1, FEBRUARY 1988

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature is a cost-saving enhancement which selects the most economical programmed route for an outgoing call. When a station user dials an outside number, the LCR feature analyzes the number and then automatically chooses an outside line from the group that has been programmed as least costly. LCR feature puts the responsibility of choosing the least expensive route for each area code and exchange code on the system, not on the station user. Route List Table Daily Start Time Table Weekly Schedule Table Insert/Delete Table 5. Exception Table Table 6. Office Code Table. 7.
1. 2. 3. 4.
2. ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (2994402) AND LCR SOFTWARE (2996301)

In order to have access to the LCR feature, the ENCORE CX 3672 KSU must be equipped with an EPB (Enhanced Processor Board) card that has LCR software (2996301) installed. The card replaces the Central Processor Board (CPB) in the KSU, and is inserted in the same card slot. The EPB is shipped without software. The software enabling 3872. LCR is a PROM chip set that is installed on the EPB.
4. ROUTE LIST TABLE Up to 16 different routes can be programmed. Each route can contain up to 4 route lists one for each of the 4 time periods. Up to 7 CO line groups (routing choices) and their corresponding Insert/Delete Tables may be programmed within each route list. Route List Table should be programmed in sequence so that the first line group entry is the least costly (and first selected) and the last CO line group is the most costly (and last selected). (See Figures .&
5. TIME OF DAY ROUTING

The least costly route for a particular dialed number may be different at different times of the day and on different days of the week. To accommodate this situation, there are 2 time-of-day tables (Daily Start Time Table and Weekly Schedule Table). These tables work together to: A. Dii each day into 1-4 time periods, and B. Specify the list number to be used for all routes based on the time of day and day of week. By default, the Daily Start Time is set at the standard diisions of 8 AM, 5 PM and 11 PM. In addition, the route lists specified by the Weekly Schedule are consistent with the Interstate DDD discount structures for those time periods. However, both tables can be changed depending customer requirements. (See Figures 3
3. FEATURES CHARACTERISTICS
In order to make the routing decision; the ENCORE CX LCR feature uses a data base. data base is programmed by field personnel at the time of installation. The operation of the feature is completely upon the accuracy of the programming. 7 different tables are set up to monitor the dialing of digits and to select the best route for the call depending on time of day. The tables are:
SECTION 401 1. FEBRUARY 1988
ENCORE CX 3672 LEAST COST ROUTING
6. INSERT/DELETE TABLES
There are 20 Insert/Delete Tables (00-l 9). Up to twenty digits, including pauses, can be inserted and up to sixteen digits deleted. Digits can be inserted before or after the number dialed, but can be deleted only from the beginning of a number dialed. For instance, if a user dials a long distance call that should be placed on a home area code foreign exchange line, the digit dialed by the user must be deleted before the call is placed on that line. Insert/Delete Table can be programmed to do this. Digits can also be added to a number that has been dialed by the user. access codes, for instance, can be automatically inserted by the system. (See Figures 61 to
This table provides routing based on the first three digits of the number dialed including: area codes; service Codes such as 911,411, etc.; office codes for the home NPA and direct International dial access It should also include, for each 3digit code, the route to be used, the number of digits likely to be dialed and if the Table is to be checked. table can include 1000 entries from (See Figure
CAUTION: All local office codes must be included in this table or local calls cannot be completed through LCR.
The number of digits likely to be dialed controls routing of calls as follows: A. Fewer than the programmed number of digits dialed: The system pauses seconds after the last digit is dialed before routing. B. Exactly the programmed number of digits dialed:. The system routes the call as soon as it sees the last digit it is programmed to expect. C. More than the programmed number of digits dialed: System routes the call as soon as sees the last digit it is programmed to expect, ignores all digits in excess of the programmed number. NOTE: A minimum of 3 digits is required for route selection by the Table. the has routed the call and sent all digits, the keypad is live and digits can be if required. A default table been established for area codes, and for both the Leading and Non Leading sections of the for service codes and office codes associated with the home refer to the LCR default data for detailed information. See Exhibit I for the Default Data Base.
7. EXCEPTION TABLE
table is used to route operator assisted calls any other calls which would use a 1 or number rather than a 3-digit area code. There are 20 available entries in this table. Each entry contains both the exception code (1 or 2 digits) and the two-digit route number (00-l 5) to be used for that code. (See Figure 5) There are no default data entries in the Exception Table. CAUTION: The Dialing Privileges tables are not checked for any calls routed via the Exception Table.
8.
DIGIT TABLE
This table is divided into 2 sections: Leading is dialed before the and Non Leading (no is dialed before the number). This gives the system the ability to handle call routing in areas that require a before a long distance number, as well as in areas that do not require the
SECTION 4 0 1 ISSUE FEBRUARY
9.
TABLE (OFFICE CODES)
The Table must be referenced by an area code in the Table. It is used to determine the route for individual office codes when preceded Table can by that specific area code. The include 20 office code maps. Each map can be programmed to route up to 600 office codes to one of the 15 possible route lists. Each map must be associated with a specific area code in the Table. Several different office code maps can be used with the same area code to provide additional routing flexibility. There are no default entries in any of the 20 different office code maps. (See Figure 8) If the office code dialed is not found in the Office Code Table, the call is then routed according to the route programmed in the Table.
If the office is found in the Table, the number is then checked against Dialing Privileges. When LCR is enabled, Dialing Privileges are determined only by station Class of Service. CO line of Service is no longer applicable. CO lines are considered Class of Service 1. If the call is not allowed through Dialing Privileges, the call is denied. If it is allowed, the call goes to the Route Table to be sent by the route indicated in the Table. After a call is sent to the Route List Table, it can no longer be denied; a station cannot be programmed to dial on some line groups in a route but not on other groups in the same route. If the office code is not found in the Table, the call is referred back to the Table. The call is checked against Dialing Privileges. If the number is denied there, the call is denied. If it is allowed, the call then goes back to the Route List Table to be sent by the route indicated in the Table. If a line is not available in the first CO line group in a list, the system advances to the next choice in the list and searches for a free line. The process continues until an available line is found or the last available line group is searched. If no lines are available in any of the CO line groups programmed for that list in the route, the call can be queued on to the first choice (least costly) line group. If the user waits 3 seconds after dialing the number, he/she will hear confirmation tone, which indicates that he/she is queued on to the first choice line group. The user must hang up after hearing confirmation tone to be placed in queue. Queuing is on a FIFO (First Out) basis. There is no Queue Priority. queue can be canceled by dialing the digit 4. The queue will be canceled automatically after the system tries three times unsuccessfully to call back a busy station. The queue will also cancel automatically after queue callback is unanswered for fifteen (15) seconds. To answer a queue callback, press the line or pool key flashing at the queue callback rate (480 flutter). The call will be dialed automatically.
10. OPERATION
To access the LCR feature: a. Lift the handset. b. Dial 9. Hear dial tone. c. Dial. if required. d. Dial area code, if required. system first checks to see if the number dialed is more than 2 digits. If it is 2 digits or less, the call is processed according to instructions in the Exception Table. If the number is not found in the Exception Table, the call is denied. If the number is more than 2 digits it then goes to the Table where the first 3 digits are checked, whether office or area code, to see if those digits are found there. If not found, the call is denied. If the digits are found in the Table, the system then checks this table to see if the Table must be referenced; If the column is marked yes, the system checks to see if the office code of the number dialed is found in this table.
401-3
SECTION 401 ISSUE FEBRUARY
10.1 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS Restrictions in a system with LCR apply only when a station attempts to access a line in a group through a direct key appearance of that line or by dialing the Trunk Group Access Code. A station is not restricted from access to a line group if that group is part of a route which is accessed by the station via the LCR feature access code (dial This is true regardless of whether or not LCR access is forced in the system. See Figure 9 for an LCR operation flow chart.
It is suggested that the worksheets be completed in the following order. First fill out the CO line group table, then the Exception Table (as this is the first table the system will check when a number is dialed). Then determine time of day routing by completing both the Daily Start Time Table and the Weekly Schedule Table. These times are used in the Route List Table. Next determine time and line group priority for the various routes to be used. complete the Insert/Delete Table and, using this table, complete the last column in the Route List When the Route List Table has been completed, Table. Area codes can be then fill out the broken into specific office codes by using the Table. Refer to Figure 9 for a flow chart on the operation of LCR.
11.
WORKSHEETS
It is extremely important that the worksheets be completed before programming the LCR tables.
401-4
ISSUE
SECTION 401 1988
ROUTE TIME CHC
C O
CO
INS/ CO
DEL CHC 2
DEL CHC 3
DEL CHC
4
DEL
CHC
DEL CHC DEL CHC 7
DEL
I 00 I I
01
KEY: CHC Choice
ROUTE LIST TABLE FIGURE l-1
SECTION 4 0 1 ISSUE FEBRUARY
ENCORE
3672 LEAST COST ROUTING
ROUTE LIST TABLE FIGURE
SECTION-401 ISSUE 1. FEBRUARY 1988
Enter what type lines are programmed in each group.
CO LINE GROUPS FIGURE 2
TABLE 1 2 3 4
DEFAULTTIME
CHANGED TIME
DAILY START TABLE FIGURE 3
401-7
SECTION 401 ISSUE 1. FEBRUARY
ENCORE
3672 LEAST C O S T ROUTING
2. 3.
4.
(17:00)
--a--------------------------B-m---
table is set up with default programming. WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE FIGURE 4
CODE ROUTE
TABLE
401-8
SECTION 401 ISSUE 1. FEBRUARY 1988
TABLE
DIGITS DIALED
PRE INSERT 00 POST DELETE (PAE) PRE INSERT 01 POST DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT 02 POST DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT 03 POST DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT 04 POST DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT 05 DELETE (PRE) PRE 06 DELETE
TABLES FIGURE
401-Q
TABLE PRE INSERT

07
DIGITS DIALED
POST DELETE PRE INSERT
08
POST DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT
09
POST DELETE (PRE) INSERT
10
11
12
13
POST
SECTION 4 0 1 ISSUE 1, FEBRUARY 1988
TABLE PRE INSERT

14
DIGITS DIALED
15
POST DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT I I I
16
17
I DELETE
POST (PRE) P INSERT R E . .
18
I DELETE INSERT
POST (PRE)
I
19
DELETE (PRE)
INSERT/DELETE TABLES (CONTD) FIGURE
401-11
LEADING 1 is dialed) CODE RR I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I
NON-LEADING 1 is not dialed) PP I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I
RR
PP
I I I I I I I I I I I
I I
I
I
I I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
I I I
I
I
I
I I I I I II I
I I I
I I
II I
I
I I
I
I I I I I I
I
I
II I I
I
I I I
RR = Refers to route list in the route list table; PP = Maximum no. of digits likely to be dialed; table (Y/N). 6 = Refers to TABLE FIGURE 7
401-l 2
ENCORE CX 3672 LEAST COST ROUTING ISSUE
AREA RTE NO. CODE OFFICE CODES
AREA RTE NO.
OFFICE CODES
OFFICE CODE TABLE FIGURE
401-13
SECTION 401 ISSUE FEBRUARY 1988
OFFICE CODE TABLE FIGURE
Q
DIAL SEARCH FOUND ROUTE ASSIGNED FROM EXCEPTION NOT FOUND , NOTFOUND MATCH
S Y S T E M r
I COMPARE DIALED STATIONS DIALING PRIVILEGES LIST SELECTED FOR ROUTE FROM DAILY
FOUND
ROUTE FROM TABLE
YES
ASSIGNED
LCR FLOWCHART FIGURE 9
401-t 5
SECTION 4 0 1 ISSUE FEBRUARY 1988
PROGRAM BUTTON 1 2 3
l
LCD DISPLAY PRINT 3 DIGIT TABLE *ENTER RANGE, PRESS HOLD PRINT 6 DIGIT TABLE *ENTER RANGE, PRESS HOLD PRINT EXCEPTION TABLE ENTER RANGE, PRESSHOLD
DISPLAY WHILE PRINTING PRINTING 3 DIGIT ROUTING TABLE PRINTING 6 DIGIT ROUTING TABLE PRINTING CODE TABLE PRINTING ROUTE LIST TABLE PRINTING DIGIT INSERT/ DELETE TABLE PRINTING DAILY START TIME TABLE PRINTING WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE
4
l
PRINT ROUTE LIST TABLE *ENTER RANGE, PRESS HOLD PRINT DIGIT INSERT/DEL ENTER RANGE, PRESS HOLD PRINT DAILY START TIME PRESS HOLD PRINT WEEKLY SCHEDULE PRESS HOLD
6 7
l l l
Enter area code range to be printed. Enter range of tables to be printed. PRINTING LCR TABLES FIGURE 10
401-l 6
The following is an example of a printout for LCR tables.
ROUTE LIST TABLE TIME ROUTE - - - - - - - - - - - - -CO - -GROUP - - - - - - - - - - 00 5 02 3 19 2 16 6 03 1 2 06 4 12 3 5 02 4 6 07 2 18 01 1 2 3 3 4 5 3 2 6 5 6 01 03 06 18 12 02 19 16 07
CODE LEADING 1 RR - - - - - - 213 01 253 08 303 05 411 03 602 818 14 911 PP 11 08 11 11 6 Y N N N N Y N
NON-LEADING 1 RR PP 6 - - - N N N 03 N N ## N 03 N
## 00
DIGIT TABLE AREA CODE 213 818 ROUTE NO 00 13 224 249 255 OFFICE CODES 225 333 318 245 456 458 246 561 459
INS/DEL TABLE TABLE 01 DEL PRE DEL PRE POST DIGITS 1602 345 12144921687 1214306 8545
CODE 09 20
ROUTE NO 0 15 13 START TIME TABLE 0
02
WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE T W - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -F - 0 8 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1700 2 2 2 2 2 2300 3 3 3 3 3 2300 3 3 3 3 3 S - 3 3 3 3 -S3 2 3 3
TABLE TIME - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0800 1700 3 2300 2300
401-17
SECTION 4 0 1 ISSUE FEBRUARY 1988
ENCORE CX 3672 LEAST COST R O U T I N G
3 DIGIT TABLE CODE 200 00 210 212 00 219 220 01 299 300 00 310 312 00 319 320 01 399 400 00
4 1 0 411 412 11 11
LEADING 1 RR PP 6 RR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N N N N N N N N N N N 01 ## 01 01 01
NON-LEADING 1 PP
6 N N
08 11 11 08 . 04 11 08
07
N N N
07
01 00
03 ## 07 N N
419 420 01 499 500 510 512 00 519 520 01 599 N 01 07 N 11 N ## N
CX LCR DEFAULT DATA BABE EXHIBIT 1.1
401-l 8
ENCORECX3672
SECTION 401 FEBRUARY1988
CODE RR 600 00 610 612 00 619 620 01 699 700 00 710 712 00 719 720 01
799
LEADING 1 PP 11 11
6 ------ -N N N
NON-LEADING1 RR PP 6 ___________________
N
01
07 ##
11 11 08 11 11 08
11
N N N N N N N N N N 01 ## 01 ## 01 ## ##
07
N
800 00 810 812 00 819 820 01 899 900

N N
##
910 911 912 919 920
01 01
04 11
03
N N
01
08
07
LCR DEFAULT DATA BASE (CONTD) EXHIBIT 1.2
401-19
SECTION 401 ISSUE FEBRUARY 1988
ROUTE 00
TIME
1
2 3
4 01 1
GROUP -CO - - - - - - -INS/DEL - - - 2 2 2 ## 2

1
2 3
4
1
1 1 ## ##
ROUTE LIST TABLE EXHIBIT 1.3
401-20
SECTION 402 ISSUE JULY 1966
ENCORE CX 36112 DESIGN AND CONFIGURATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION PAGE
1. INTERCOM PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..................... 1
LIST OF TABLES
1. SYSTEM COMPONENT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2
402-A
ENCORE CX 36112 DESIGN AND CONFIGURATION

1. INTERCOM PATHS
Three groups of intercom paths are possible in the ENCORE 36112 configuration: a. Group 1: eight (8) intercom paths for extension numbers b. Group 2: eight (8) intercom paths for extension numbers 156-211. c. Group 3: six (6) optional paths to only; not . Paths in Group 3 are possible when the last COB card position is programmed for intercom use. Calls between Groups 1 and 2 are bridged by a path from each group or one of the optional paths available in Group 3. Different combinations of calls will result in different totals of simultaneous conversations by the system. The supported following scenarios assume key phones only and additional intercom paths enabled. 1.1 8 8 6 EXAMPLE 1 intercom conversations in Group 1 intercom conversations in Group 2 intercom conversations between Groups 1 and 2 total intercom conversations in progress 1.2 EXAMPLE 2 4 intercom conversations in Group 1 4 intercom conversations in Group 2 4 intercom conversations between Groups 1 and 2 total intercom conversations in progress paths available for Group 1, or paths available for Group 2, or paths available for calls between Groups 1 and 2 1.3 EXAMPLE 3 intercom conversations in Group 1 (2 paths borrowed from Group 3) intercom conversations in Group 2 intercom conversations between Groups 1 and 2 total intercom conversations in progress paths available for Group or paths available for Group 2, or paths available for calls between Groups 1 and 2
2 2
0 paths available for Group 1 0 paths Group 2 0 paths available for calls between Groups 1 and 2
402-l
ENCORE CX 36112
AN0 CONFIGURATION
TABLE 1 . SYSTEM COMPONENT LIST PART NO. 2993503 2993505 EXP-36112 ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION Basic KSU (same as ENCORE 3672) 36112 Field Conversion Kit: one (1) Expansion KSU one Power Cage Enhanced Processor Board Expanded interface Board 12 2996303 2993701 2993702 2994101 2994102 2994103
l
2994402 2993612
EPB EIB
Software for 36112 features Software for 36112 features LCR
COB KIB
Central Office Interface Board Key Telephone Interface Board Power Supply DC/DC Converter BCB
DC/DC Converter with BCB
Replaces CPB (2994401) TABLE 2. POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS CONFIGURATION POWER SUPPLIES 1 2 3 DC/DC CONVERTERS 1 1 2 ,
Basic KSU Add second APL, EIB, and/or Add (slots
402-2
ENCORE CX 8 1 6 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM
SECTION 500 ISSUE 2, SEPTEMBER 1988
GENERAL REGULATORY AGENCY INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION 1. INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED TO USER

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
PAGE
USERS RESPONSIBILITY TO TELEPHONE COMPANY. HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY RIGHTS OF TELEPHONE COMPANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 IN CASE OF TROUBLE NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CANADIAN REGULATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500-A
SECTION ISSUE 2. SEPTEMBER 1988
GENERAL REGULATORY AGENCY INFORMATION

1.2
1. INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED TO USER

The information in the following paragraphs must be provided by you (the Executone Distributor) to the ENCORE CX Key Telephone System user in accordance with FCC Regulations, Sections: 68.218 (b) (d); 68.2; 68.108; 68.110 (b). 1.1 USERS TO TELEPHONE COMPANY It is the users responsibility to notify the telephone company of the connection or disconnection of the Executone ENCORE CX Key Telephone System. In addition, the user must provide the following information to the telephone company: a. Make and Model: Executone ENCORE CX Key Telephone System. l b. FCC Registration Number: ENCORE CX 816: ENCORE CX 3672: for 3672 C. Ringer Equivalence Number: 0.48 for 816 d. Type of jack to be ordered from the telephone. company: RJ21 X for 3672 or 1 C for 816. e. OPS Facility Interface Code (FIC): f. OPS Signaling Type: Loop
AID COMPATIBILITY a. The ENCORE CX Key Telephone System cannot be used with party line service or coin b. The ENCORE CX Key Telephone System is hearing aid compatible.
NOTE
You, the Executone Distributor, must provide the above information to the user. Alternately, the user may allow you (the Executone Distributor) to deal with the telephone company on his behalf. It is then your responsibility to provide above required information to the telephone company. To deal with the telephone company on the users behalf, you must have received from the user a Letter of Representation. See sample letter on
l
1.3 RIGHTS OF THE TELEPHONE COMPANY Should the ENCORE CX Key Telephone System cause harm to the telephone, network, the telephone company shall, where practical, notify the customer that temporary discontinuance of may be required. However, where prior notice is not practical, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service if such action is reasonable in the circumstances. In case of such temporary discontinuance, the telephone company shall: a. Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance. b. Give the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise to the temporary discontinuance. C. Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Commission pursuant to the procedures set forth in Subpart E of Part.68 of the FCC rules. The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations of Part 68 of the FCC rules. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customers terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service. 1.4 IN CASE OF TROUBLE if any problem should develop with the ENCORE CX Key Telephone System, the user must not attempt to make any repair. User contact his local Executone Distributor for service.
If no single line telephones are installed in the system or if no key telephones are programmed to use a group access code, KF-E (3672) may be used.
500-l
SECTION 500 ISSUE 2, SEPTEMBER 1988
ENCORE CX 816
3672 GENERAL REGULATORY AGENCY INFORMATION
SUGGESTED LETTER OF REPRESENTATION

Distributors Note: This letter should be typed by your customer on his letterhead and signed by him. You will use the letter in your dealing with the Telephone Company on his behalf. Gentlemen: Please be advised that we have employed (your company name) as our agent in matters pertaining to communications. We have authorized Executone to issue necessary orders and coordinate with you matters relating to telephone service required by our firm. Please acknowledge this notice and direct any subsequent questions to: Your company name Street Address. City and State Phone Number Thank you for your past service. We will appreciate your continued cooperation with Executone.
Signature
500-2
ENCORE CX 816
3672 GENERAL REGULATORY AGENCY INFORMATION
2. SEPTEMBER 1988
SECTION 500
1.5 NOTICE OF COMPLIANCE

The CX Key Telephone complies with rules regarding radiation and radio frequency emission by Class A computing devices. In accordance with FCC Standard 15 (Subpart J) the following information must be supplied to the end user: WARNING This equipment generates and uses energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction Manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device, pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference, when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above condition may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be important in rural areas. CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
1.6 CANADIAN REGULATIONS

NOTICE The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction.
500-3
816 KEY SERVICE UNIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PAGE 1. SITE PLANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3. 4. 5. 6. UNPACKING THE KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSU GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSU INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 STATION CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LINE CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. KEY TELEPHONE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. WALL MOUNTING THE TELEPHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g 10. INTERCOM BOX .......................................... g .
EXTERNAL MUSIC SOURCE . : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ALARM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. BACKUP UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL PAGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOUD BELL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 EMERGENCY TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE EXPANSION MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10. INSTALLING THE REAL CLOCK UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19. INSTALLING 20.

21.
...................................................... 18 ...............................................
HEADSET
RS 232C PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
600-A
ENCORE CX 816 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
OF FIGURES MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KSU MOUNTING DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 KEY SERVICE ....................................... 816 KEY SERVICE UNIT- RIGHT SIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 WITH ALL EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEY TELEPHONE WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALL MOUNTING THE TELEPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................................................... ..g BACKUP UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMERGENCY TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPANSION MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING REAL CLOCK UNIT AND SIU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g TYPICAL STATION CABLE TERMINATION BLOCK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXAMPLE DESIGNATION AND CUT-DOWN FOR BLOCK THE MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3. 4. 5. 6. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
OF BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2. J-l CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3. J-2 CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4. CO CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 .
600-B

1. SITE PLANNING
The ENCORE CX 816 Electronic Key Telephone System, like most electronic office equipment, should not be subjected to harsh environmental conditions. To ensure easy servicing and reliable operation, several factors must be considered when the system installation. Always consider the following BEFORE installing the KSU and wiring: The KSU is designed for wall mounting only. The internal power supply operates on 117 VAC, single-phase electricity. A (parallel 60 blade with ground) receptacle must be provided on a dedicated, separately fused 15 AMP circuit. Location(s) of telephone conduits or cable runs. The KSU should be within 25 of central office lines. The KSU should be centrally located and assurances should be made to keep station runs within prescribed cable lengths. 1000 1500 26 AWG Cable 24 AWG Cable
A well-ventilated area having a recommended

temperature range of 70-78 degrees F and a humidity range of 590% (non-condensing). and accessibility of KSU for servicing. Protection from flooding, flammable materials, excessive dust and vibration. Proximity of radio transmitting equipment, arc-welding devices, copy machines and other
electrical equipment that are capable of

generating electrical interference. Access to a good earth ground such as a metallic COLD water pipe. inspect the pipe for non-metallic joints.
22 AWG Cable twisted
It Is recommended that 24 AWG cable be used.
600-l
ENCORE
CX 816 KSU INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
OFF SPOOL S FLAT PACK J.2
FIGURE 1. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
URE 2. KSU MOUNTING

REV
ENCORE CX 8 16 KSU INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2. UNPACKING THE KSU

Remove the KSU from the shipping carton and place it on a level working surface, face up. Inspect the KSU for physical damage. The KSU has limited serviceable parts.
3. KSU To ensure that the system will operate property,

a good earth ground is necessary. A metallic COLD water pipe will usually provide a reliable ground path. Carefully check that the pipe does not contain insulated joints that could isolate the ground. In the absence of the cold water pipe, a ground rod or other source may be used. A No. 8 AWG copper wire should be used between the ground source and the KSU. The ground wire should be kept as short as possible and should be connected to the ground lug located on the bottom of the KSU. See Figure 3.
The power cord should not be used with a plug adapter. A surge protector should be used to protect the power supply from electrical surges. The surge protector shouid be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and applicable local electrical codes. See Figure 5.
5. STATION CONNECTIONS
There is one Amphenol-type female connector on the left side of the KSU (J-l When the expansion module is added, there will be a second Amphenol-type connector on the left side of the KSU (J-2). Both J-l and J-2 connectors require plug cables for proper attachment. The cables should be terminated on a connecting block for cross connection to the distribution cabling to the telephones. When connecting cable tails to the KSU, make sure the designation on the AMP hood matches the designation at the connectors input on the KSU. After plugging in the required cables, a horse shoe should be placed around the mated AMP connectors to secure the cable to the KSU
4. KSU INSTALLATION
The KSU is designed for wall mounting only. The KSU should NOT be mounted directly on a masonry surface. If the KSU is to be mounted on a masonry surface, a wooden backboard of sufficient size should be attached to the wall and the KSU mounted on the backboard. Mount the KSU on the backboard using 4 fasteners. (The fasteners should be selected carefully so as to be capable of supporting the KSU.) Refer to Figure 2 for mounting hole locations and KSU dimensions. The key system should be grounded using an insulated 8 AWG copper wire. Attach one end to the grounding lug on the KSU cabinet and fasten the other end to a good earth ground. See Figure 3. The KSU power supply is located within the
connector. Verify that the wires are properly cross-connected. Observe the telephone standard wiring color codes
whenever possible. The J-l cable contains the connections for the first 8 stations and the
miscellaneous connections for paging, loud bell control, music-on-hold, etc. The J-2 cable contains the connections for the last 8 stations and has no miscellaneous connections. See Figure 5. CAUTION is NOT recommended that power be applied to the system during the cable termination process.
KSU. Because the KSU is a self-contained unit, all electrical connections are provided externally.
The power cord exits the KSU at the bottom. Also at the bottom is a fuse holder that contains a 0.7 Amp. slow-blow fuse. Power for the system is distributed internally. The power cord exits the at the bottom and, for installer convenience, the cord 9 feet long.
600-3
ENCORE CX 816 KSU INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
CONNECTOR
. ADJ. ADJ. PROGRAM MODULE
FUSE
FIGURE 3. KEY SERVICE UNIT-LEFT SIDE
C CONNECTORS FOR CO LINES
-EMERGENCY TRANSFER
REQUIRES INTERFACEMODULE
FIGURE 4. KEY SERVICE
SIDE
11 C CONNECTORS CO LINES
STATION ON HOLD EXTERNAL PAGE ALARM LOUD CONTROL 2 3 2 C

EMERGENCY
MDF (J-2)
I I
FUSE
AC CONNECTION WITH SURGE PROTECTOR
FIGURE 5. ENCORE CX 818 SYSTEM WITH ALL EXTERNAL
6.
LINE CONNECTIONS
8. KEY TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

A maximum of 16 key telephones may be installed with the ENCORE CX 816 Key System. Each telephone requires P-pair (4 wires) for proper wiring. In order to obtain the maximum loop lengths and to provide for possible expansion to a 3672 system, it is recommended that twisted pair cable be used to connect the telephones to the system on a home run basis. The telephone end of the cable should be terminated on a modular jack. At the MDF end of the home run, the cable should be terminated on a separate station connecting block for cross connection to the cables. This method of cabling will allow for easy isolation of station equipment during troubleshooting procedures. See Figure 6. Cabling to the telephones should be routed to avoid fluorescent light fixtures, electric motors and generators, welding equipment and radio transmitters. Additionally, care should be taken to avoid hot locations such as steam pipes and furnaces, and areas where wiring is subject to be taken to avoid routing abrasion. Care should cables where data from other equipment such as computer terminals and cables, modems, or other machinery can interfere with the telephone system. The telephone has polarity sensitive wiring. Care should be taken to ensure the telephones are wired properly. See Figure 6.
The central office lines are connected to 11 C type jacks on the outside of KSU. These jacks are vertically located along the upper right side of the KSU. Lines 4 and 8 are at the top and lines 1 and 5 at the bottom. The central office lines are connected to KSU using industry standard conductor modular ended line cords. Connection to these jacks determines the actual order of CO line appearance on the ENCORE CX 816 key telephone. tines are operational only when the Expansion Module has been added to the KSU. The serving telephone company must be notified prior to installation. The central office lines must be located within 25 of the KSU and terminated in individual 11 C or W connectors. See Figure 4.
7. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTION

The ENCORE CX 816 Key System should be equipped with a power-line transient surge protection device. Systems equipped with such devices are more resistant to damage from power line surges than unprotected systems. Power line surges often occur during switching operations and especially during violent thunderstorm activity. Installation of a surge protector meeting the specifications described in the following paragraph. will prevent or minimize the damage resulting from power-line surges. See Figure 1. be a 15 Amp The surge protector contained unit that plugs into a standard, grounded must be 117 VAC wall outlet. The wail designed to accept a plug (2 blades and ground pin). The protector should be fast operating and capable of protecting for transients greater than 200 volts. The Transtector ACP-1 OOBL Transient Surge Protector is recommended for the ENCORE System. This device is available from Transtector Systems, P.O. 1299, Post Falls, ID 83854
(800-635-2537).
The EFI Corporation 453 Series, 253 Series, or 153 Series Transient Surge Protectors are available from EFI Corporation, P.O. 15606, Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 (801-486-5871). FIGURE 6. KEY TELEPHONE WIRING
ENCORE CX 8 16 KSU INSTALLATION
HANDSET RETAINER
REVERSIBLE BASE
JACK
THE BASE FOR
7. WALL
THE TELEPHONE
600-8
ENCORE CX 816 KSU
INSTRUCTIONS
9. WALL MOUNTING THE TELEPHONE

The telephone can be converted to allow wall mounting by unsnapping the base plate and placing it into the wall mount position. Every telephone can be converted for wall mounting without requiring any extra parts. To convert the telephone for wall mounting: A) Place the telephone with the bottom facing up toward you. B) Press in on the upper left of the base plate. It unsnaps and out. cord on the inside of the C) Remove the base plate. D) Insert connecting cord into the bottom of the telephone. See Figure 7. E) Reverse the base plate and snap it on the opposite side of the bottom of the telephone. The bottom of the telephone will now be level and there will be 2 holes which will enable the telephone to be placed on a regular telephone wall jack. Plug the connecting cord into the wall jack. up the number identification plate under the F) handset and remove the screw. G) Remove the handset retainer and turn it around. See Figure 7. H) Replace the screw. The telephone is now ready for wall mounting.
The Intercom Box consists of a top housing and bottom mounting plate. The top housing has a speaker, microphone, wire terminals and electronic circuitry. The housings are separated by inserting a thin, flat-edged tool at the bottom rim of the assembly. By pressing inward on the recessed retaining tab, the assembly will open. The bottom plate of the Phone Box assembly is fastened to the wall by mounting with No. 8 or larger pan head screws. The cable is routed through the cable entry holes provided on the bottom plate and is connected to the screw terminal strip on the upper housing. Four screw terminals are identified by wire color on the silk-screened printed circuit board to correspond with the wiring sequence at the down connector at the MDF. The slack wiring should be pulled back through the bottom mounting plate and the top housing snapped shut.
10. INTERCOM BOX INSTALLATION The ENCORE CX Intercom Box is designed to

initiate calls to preassigned stations as well as receive intercom calls with handsfree operation. See Figure 8. The unit should be located in weather protected areas where paging or monitoring is required. intercom box is connected to a dedicated key telephone station line card position. The connection of Intercom to the KSU is identical to that of the electronic Refer to paragraph 8 of this section.
FIGURE 8. INTERCOM BOX
11. EXTERNAL MUSIC SOURCE MUSIC-ON-HOLD as well as BACKGROUND MUSIC through telephone set speakers can be connected using a customer provided tuner, tape deck, etc. Separate Music-On-Hold and Background music volume adjustments are provided on the KSU. See Figure 3. Background Music (BGM) levels are also adjustable at each key telephone set. Connections are made on the J-l connector, the MOH pair. See Table 2.
the cables provided. There is a strapping wire that connects the batteries in series to obtain the necessary 24 VDC. See Figure 9. The black wire is negative ( ) and the red wire is positive The BBU has circuitry to charge batteries, and float charging to recharge the batteries. Connections should be made in accordance with the National Electric Code and local codes where applicable. Figure 3 shows connections.
TABLE 1. BATTERY BACKUP 12. ALARM INSTALLATION

The ENCORE CX 816 system may be used to transmit an alarm signal to each station (except phone boxes) in the system. The signal to activate the alarm can be an open or closure on the loop (programmable). When activated by an external alarm system, a continuous or intermittent tone (programmable) is transmitted to the station speakers. Leads from the external alarm are connected to the ENCORE CX 816 terminals ALMT and ALMR on the J-l connector. (Figure 10). Section 700 for programming states. Battery Amp Hour Rating I Configuration 4x8 4 HR I 8x16
2HR
14. EXTERNAL PAGING

External paging amplifier equlpment may be connected to the ENCORE CX 818 Key Telephone System for dial access from any telephone in the system. There is 1 amplified External Paging Zone provided with the 818 system. The page port has an external contact closure to activate external equipment. The contacts are normally open. Tone dialing through the page port is allowed. The output impedance of the paging zone is 600 Ohms at 0 The low voice signal output is specified at 6 milliwatts. Dry contact provided to switch ON the external equipment or to momentarily remove background music, if externally supplied to the paging device. connections are made on the J-l punchdown connector (see Figure 10). The voice output from the Key Telephone System is provided on the and EPVR pair. The make paging control contacts are identified as pair
13.
BACKUP
The ENCORE CX 818 system can be fully supported for complete operation during a power failure. An externally provided wall mount unit (BBU) and battery package (using 2 gel-type batteries such as Globe model GC 1290 rate 9 AH, 12 volt; YUASA NP-8-12 rate 8 AH, 12 volt) is required. The BBU provides battery charging, status monitoring and a convenient place to store the battery. A convenient plug for battery . connection is located on the lower right bottom of the KSU. See Figure 3. The connector used to connect the batteries referred to as a Mate-N-Lok connector. This is a universal connector. The connector mounted on the BBU will connect directly to the KSU connector located on the bottom of the KSU. The connector requires 2 wires for battery connection. The is powered by commercial 117 VAC, 60 Hz single phase electricity. It should be plugged into the power surge protector used with the KSU. The batteries are located in the battery tray and are connected with
600-l 0
ENCORE CX 8 1 6 KSU INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
15. LOUD BELL CONTROL

The ENCORE CX 816 system provides relay contact closure for activation of external signaling equipment in association with the ringing pattern at the programmed station. This can be intercom, CO line (day or night) or other supervisory ringing. Stations to receive Loud Bell ringing are selected by programming in the customer database under system parameters programming. There are 2 loud bell control circuits, either both of which may be assigned to a station. The Loud Bell Control dry contacts (normally open) will follow the ringing condition of that station. and terminals on the Locate the connecting block. Two wires are connected to these terminals and routed to a provided ringing generator or other power source required to complete the external ringing arrangement. The LBC contacts are current rated at 1 AMP/24 VDC. Externally provided ringing equipment must be provided.
RED
EMERGENCY TRANSFER
In the event of a commercial AC power interruption, lines will automatically transfer to the first 3 three single line telephones for emergency communications if the system has been equipped with these single line telephones. These should be equipped with ringers. They can be instruments or rotary dial, depending upon the signaling requirements of each CO line. Connection is done on an 1 C connector located on the right side of the KSU below the CO lines. See Figure 11.
CONNECT TO KSU MATE N-LOCK CONNECTOR

0
JUMPER
UT LIT
working
J CONNECTOR
MUSIC SOURCE
PIN 42 MOH
MOH
YUGN VOICE EPVR -
- EPCTL MAKE CONTROL
EXTERNAL
YUBN
- ALMT -
I
I PROCESSOR OR STATION WIRING FROM EMERGENCY TRANSFER
I
I
Ksu
- N O T E 1
FROM
GREEN
TIP
I I
I I
RING
I I
I
RED
CO LINE 1 RING
I
I
I
I
I I I
RING I I I I I
I
I YELLOW
CO LINE 2 RING
WHITE
I
I I
I I I
.
.
I I
I
l
I
I , BLUE
CO RING
I I I
I
I
RING
I
I
I I ,I
1: shown in power failure mode. I
FIGURE 11. EMERGENCY TRANSFER
600-l 3
17. INSTALLING THE EXPANSION MODULE

The system can be expanded to include an additional 8 stations and 4 CO lines with the addition of an optional expansion module. To install this module: Disconnect the power by unplugging the KSU. Remove the Program Module. Remove the 4 screws holding the cover and remove the KSU cover. Remove the 2 screws holding the left side panel using a 82 Phillips screwdriver. Flip the left side panel so it lies fiat. Take the 2 ribbon cables included with the expansion module and connect to the J-l and J-2 connections on the main board. Carefully position the preformed bent ends into the J-l and J-2 connections and press firmly to insert. See Figure 12. NOTE: The ribbon cable must be positioned so that the conductor edge mates with the conductor edge of the J-l and J-2 connectors.
Remove the snap-out plastic covers from the sides of the KSU for the additional connector and the additional 1 C connectors. Connect the J-2 cable to the expansion module (on the bottom). Take the expansion module and place it into the 1 C connectors into the KSU, inserting the right side of the KSU. Align the expansion module so that the 5 screw holes are over the stand-offs. Insert screws. Connect the J-l cable to the expansion module. Raise the left side of the KSU and reinsert the 2 screws. Replace the KSU cover and reinsert the 4 screws that hold it. Replace the Program Module. Reconnect the AC power. I
FIGURE 12. EXPANSION MODULE
600-l 4
TABLE 2.
CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT
station 107
MOH (VOICE) ALMT ALMR EXTERNAL PAGE DRY CONTACTS LOUD YUGN YUBN
17
19
TABLE 3.
Telephone tine Cord GREEN RED YELLOW GREEN Station 109 BLACK RED YELLOW GREEN RED YELLOW GREEN RED YELLOW GREEN RED GREEN RED BLACK YELLOW GREEN RED BLACK YELLOW GREEN RED
CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT

2 pr. Twisted Station Cable connector cable 26 DT 9 2 28 DT 10 DR 10 4 30
Station
Function
Station 108
Station 110
DT 11 VR DR 11 VT12 DT12 12 DR 12 VT 13 DT 13 DR13 14 14 DT 14 DR 14 15 DT 15 15 VR 16 DT 16 DR 16
32 8 34 10 36 12 38 BWBN 14 40 15 41 16
Station 111
Station 112 Station 113
BWBL BUBK
Station 114
Station
600-l 6
TABLE 4. CO CONNECTING BLOCK LAYOUT Location CO tine No. 1 BASIC KSU 2 3 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 5 6 EXPANSION .. MODULE 7 8 T5 T6 R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 Function Connector co 1 co2 co3 co4 co5 CO6 co7 CO6
600-l 7
18. RCU INSTALLATION

Turn off the KSU power by removing the plug from the AC outlet. Remove the program module. Remove the 4 screws holding the KSU cover. Remove the cover. Open the RCU box and verify the following components are included: 1 each RCU 1 each battery 1 each plastic beaded tie-wrap Locate the battery. The end with the colored ring is negative. Install the battery into the battery socket of the RCU, being careful to match the polarity of the battery with the polarity of the socket. Push the beaded tie-wrap through the hole in the RCU next to the battery. Pull the tie-wrap around the battery and through the cinch end to secure the battery. Refer to Figure 13. Locate the RCU socket (CN-2) and note the notched end of the socket. Align the notched end of the RCU with the notched end of the RCU socket in the KSU. See Figure 13 (battery should face up).
19. SMDR INSTALLATION

Turn off KSU power by removing plug from AC outlet. Remove Program Module from KSU. Remove the 4 screws holding the KSU cover. Remove the cover. cover plate. Remove the Open SMDR Module box and verify the following are enclosed: 1 SIU printed circuit board 1 adapter cable Gently insert the ribbon cable into the SIU connector board. Then insert the cable into the main connector on the KSU. See Figure 13. Note conductive edge of ribbon cable. Remove the 2 jack screws from the SIU board. Align the connector mounting hole with the KSU mounting hole and insert. Reinsert the 2 jack screws previously removed to hold the
SIU in place.
The SMDR module installation is now complete.
Replace the KSU cover and Program Module. Reconnect AC power. 20. HEADSET INSTALLATION The ENCORE CX key telephones have been
designed to operate with industry standard modular headset adapters and operator headsets. To modify
Take care not to install the RCU backwards, as damage to the unit could occur. insert the pins on the bottom of the RCU into
the RCU socket (CN-l), being careful to all of the pins with the socket. Apply pressure in the middle of the RCU (not the ends) to avoid breakage while seating the RCU into the socket. RCU installation is now complete. Replace the KSU cover and Program Module.
Reconnect AC power.
an ENCORE CX key telephone to support an external headset, plug the headset adapter the handset jack on the key telephone base. the telephone handset cord into the headset adapter box where indited by the headset manufacturers instructions. According to the programming section (700) under station programming, speakerphone operation must be disabled to allow headset operation. When this is done, such features as On-Hook Diiing and Handsfree speakerphone operation are rendered inoperable. However, incoming page/voice announcements, tone ringing and background music will still be heard over the speaker. On-hook and off-hook operation is controlled with the MONITOR button.
600-l
CONNECTOR
PO co
FIGURE 13. RCU AND SIU INSTALLATION
600-l 9
OR
ENCORE CX
IS
to on
block.
to
J-2
station of
FIGURE 14. TYPICAL STATION CABLE TERMINATION
BLOCK)
ENCORE CX 816
INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION ISSUE 1, MAY 1987
to
lnglblnebd.
l b
J.2
Block.
FIGURE 15. EXAMPLE DESIGNATION AND
FOR
BLOCK ON THE
MAY
21. FIRST RS-232C PORT

The SMDR port is an optional module added to the 816 system. The SMDR module provides an RS-232C port for SMDR data and system data printout.
A high signal is required on pin 20 (DTR) to activate the port for output. d. SMDR output The character set language is sent as Standard Numerical Code (ASCII). Either or print format can be selected. Program code FLASH 26 (button 3) controls the selection: if button 3 is is selected; button 3 is is selected. Default is &character.
21.1 DATA PARAMETERS a. Word format Asynchronous, 8 bits, 2 stop bits, no b. Data rate The data rate is programmable through the administration port 100. Program code FLASH 20 (button 4) is used to select either 300 or 1200 baud. Default is 300 baud. . The RS-232C port is considered DCE (Data Communication Equipment). RS-232 SERIAL PORT Name I RTS CTS I DSR SG Transmit data (in) Receive Data (out) Request to Send (in) Clear to Send (out) Data Set Ready (out) Signal Ground Data Terminal Ready (in) 5 6 7 20 d. Pin 2 3
21.2
CABLE INTERFACE TO PRINTERS AND TERMINALS
When making an interface cable to connect a printer/terminal to an RS-232C port on the ENCORE CX system, follow the guidelines below: a. Use the recommended connector for both the ENCORE CX and the printer/terminal.
b. Only connect pins and jumpers that will actually be used.

C.
Follow the recommendation of the printer/terminal manufacturers for the proper cable requirements, such as gauge, twisted pairs, stranded wire, shielding and maximum length. Use the busy signal (if it is provided from the printer/terminal) to control data flow from the SMDR port. A high signal applied to pin 4 (RTS) on the SMDR port indicates the printer/terminal is ready and a low signal means busy. If this Is not from the use to reduce the chances of exceeding the printers buffer capacity and losing records. Set up the printer/terminal parameters to match the ones In the ENCORE CX systems.
c. Data protocol A high signal is provided for and Data Set Ready (DSR) on pins 5 and 6, respectively, for control of a remote device. These signal leads remain high at times. The Request To Send on pin 4) can be used to control data flow. A high signal applied to pin enables data flow and a low disables data flow.
ENCORE 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... , 1. SITE PLANNING. 2 UNPACKING THE KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. KSU MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. KSU GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.
.........................................
7. KTU INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. STATION CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10. EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,

11.
KEY TELEPHONE INSTALLATION: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 DSS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
14. INSTALLING RECEIVER/SENDER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. WALL MOUNTING THE TELEPHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. HEADSET INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17. CONNECTION OF LOUD BELL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. BACKGROUND MUSIC AND ...............................
19. EXTERNAL PAGING CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .........................................
21. INSTALLING THE EXPANSION
22. INSTALLING THE RING GENERATOR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

601 -A
SECTION 60 1 ISSUE 1. MAY 1987
ENCORE 3672 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
DESCRIPTION
23. FIRST 24.
PAGE
PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PACKAGE V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25. REMOTE PROGRAMMING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3 3 26. OFF-SITE DATA TERMINAL PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FIGURES 1. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......................................................... 2. ............................................ 3. BASIC KSU AND EXPANSION TYPICAL INTERCONNECTION LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CONNECTING POWER SUPPLY TO DC/DC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6. CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD (COB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. KEY TELEPHONE INTERFACE BOARD (KIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOARD (APL) . . . . ................................................................................... 8. . 9. ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (EPB) 10. EMERGENCY TRANSFER CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : : 11. KEY TELEPHONE WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 12. DSS WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 14. WALL MOUNTING THE KEY TELEPHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. INSTALLATION OF EXTERNAL PAGING ZONES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16. 17. THE RING GENERATOR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 THE EXPANSION KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 18. 19. TYPICAL STATION CABLE TERMINATION BLOCK). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. RECORDED ANNOUNCE DEVICE HOOKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
.......................................... CONNECTING BLOCK ....................................... STATION CONNECTING BLOCK STATION CONNECTING BLOCK (SIB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMERGENCY TRANSFER UNIT CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-l CONNECTING BLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 CONNECTING BLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOARD CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23 24
27
601-B
KEY SERVICE UNIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

2. UNPACKING THE KSU 1. SITE PLANNING
Remove the Key Service Unit from the shipping carton and stand it upright on a level working surface with the cover facing forward. Turn the of a turn, 4 screws on the front of the cabinet tilt the cover and lift to remove. Remove all packing materials from inside the KSU and inspect for shipping damage. The KSU should be empty when received. Inside the KSU packing should be a mounting template. The mounting template includes mounting dimensions for the expansion cabinet. Some room should be left for future expansion in accordance with the template. The items listed below are needed to have an operating system. The number and type of peripheral needed depends on the size of the system being installed. Basic KSU Power Supply DC/DC Converter Enhanced Processor Board Peripheral Central Office Board (COB) Key Telephone Interface Board (KIB) OHVA Key Telephone Interface Board (KIBOH) Single tine Interface Board (SIB) optional Applications Card (APL) Emergency Transfer
The ENCORE CX 3672 Key Telephone System,

like most electronic office equipment, should not be subjected to harsh environmental conditions. To assure easy servicing and operation, several factors must be considered when planning the system installation. Always remember the following BEFORE installing the KSU and wiring: The KSU is designed for wall mounting. Both internal power supplies operate on 117 VAC, 60 Hz phase electricity. A (parallel blade with ground) receptacle must be provided on a dedicated, separately fused 15 AMP circuit. The KSU should be within 25 of the telephone company RJ2 1 X. The KSU should be centrally located and care should be taken to stay within prescribed cable lengths. It is recommended that 24 AWG twisted cable be used. Mounting space for standard backboard, or a plywood-type board for MDF blocks, if standard. backboard is not used. A well-ventilated area having a temperature range of degrees F with a recommended temperature range of 70-78 degrees F and a humidity range of (non-condensing). Lighting and accessibility of KSU for servicing. Protection from flooding, flammable materials, excessive dust and Proximity of radii transmitting equipment, arcwelding devices, copy machines and other electrical equipment that are capable of generating electrical interference. Access to a good earth ground such as a COLD water pipe. Inspect the pipe for non-metallic joints.
3.
MOUNTING
The KSU is mounted in the following manner: A) The KSU is designed for wall mounting KSU should not be mounted directly on a masonry or dry walled surface. A wooden backboard (plywood or pressed board) of should be attached to the wall for the KSU to be mounted upon. The KSU mounting template should be to identify screw hole locations. It is that the KSU and MDF connecting blocks be mounted on the backboard. See Figure 1 for a typical mounting arrangement. Insert 4 0 or larger) screws into the backboard and tighten enough to hold the weight of the KSU. the KSU and place it onto the screws. When the KSU is in position, the screws can be tightened and the KSU is securely mounted.
EXPANSION
RGU GND .
FIGURE 1. MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
4. KSU GROUNDING To ensure that the system will operate property, a good earth ground is required. A metallic COLD water pipe will usually provide a reliable ground path. Carefully check that the pipe does not contain the ground. In the insulated joints that could absence of the COLD water pipe, a ground rod or other source may be used. A AWG copper wire should be used between the ground source and the KSU (25 feet maximum). The farther from the ground source, the larger the ground wire used should be.
The wire should be kept as short as possible and can be connected to the ground lug provided on the lower right inside surface of the KSU. See Figure 3.
ENCORE
3672 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 60 ISSUE 1. MAY
BASIC KSU
EXPANSION KSU
FIGURE 2. KSU
BASIC KSU
COVER TO CONNECTIONS TO EXP. KSU POWER SUPPLY 1
FASTENERS STATION CABLES
GND TERMINAL
EXPANSION KSU
GROUND TERMINAL
FASTENERS STATION CABLES
FIGURE 3. BASIC KSU AND EXPANSION KSU
5. POWER LINE SURGE PROTECTION

The ENCORE CX 3672 Key System should be equipped with a power-line transient surge protection device. Systems equipped with such devices are more resistant to damage from power line surges than unprotected systems. Power line surges often occur during switching operations and especially during violent thunderstorm activity. Installation of a surge protector meeting the specifications described in the following paragraph will prevent or minimize the damage resulting from power-line surges. The surge protector shall be a 15 amp self-contained unit that plugs into a standard, grounded 1 17 VAC wall outlet. The wall outlet must be designed to accept a plug (2 parallel blades and ground pin). The protector should be fast operating and capable of protecting for transients greater than 200 volts. The Transtector ACP-1 OOBL Transient Surge Protector is recommended for the ENCORE System. This device is available from Transtector Systems, P.O. BOX 1299, Post Falls, ID 83854 The EFI Corporation 453 series, 253 series, or 153 series Transient Surge Protectors are available from EFI Corporation, P.O. Box 15606, . Salt Lake City, Utah 84115
A.
AND
CONNECTIONS
A battery package should be selected that ensures the proper back-up time during power outages. A 24 VDC (normally two 12 VDC batteries) package with a 40 Amp hour rating is considered maximum. It is recommended that maintenance-free gel-type batteries be used. The following must be considered when connecting batteries: 1. Batteries are to be placed in a limited access room or cabinet with adequate ventilation to dissipate any battery gases that may be present. 2. The batteries are to be installed in accordance with Article 480 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any other applicable codes.
3. A battery rack or case should be used to secure

the batteries to prevent tipping or any movement that could cause spilling of battery acid or shorting of terminals. The arrangement should protect against ail hazards such as fire, spark, heat, gas fumes and accidents. 4. Use the shortest length of flexible cord type that will comply with the National Electrical Code to connect batteries and power supply. The cable should be located, routed and clamped (strain relief) in such a way as to prevent the batteries from moving should the cables be moved. 5. A 15 Amp 48 V minimum fuse a 15 Amp DC instantaneous tripping circuit breaker should be installed. Locate it at the batteries in line with the battery negative lead to protect the battery from damage. 4 for wiring considerations. DC input 6. See wire size should be sufficient to restrict voltage drop to volt or less at rated input current between the battery and power supply. The length is the sum of the lengths of the negative and positive leads. Use wire sizes recommended by the National Electrical Code and/or local
6.
BACKUP INSTALLATION
Battery Charging is an option that can be purchased already installed on the DC/DC Converter. A separate external 24 volt DC battery package must be provided. AMP HOUR RATING
7. WARNING: Do not make connections with the

power applied to the power supply. (Remove battery protection fuse before connecting batteries.)
601-5
SECTION 60 1 MAY 1987
Connect the two-wire battery cable leads to the terminals marked + and Make sure the one wire is connected to the of the first battery, and the other wire is connected to the terminal of the second battery (connected to a fuse or circuit breaker). A single wire should connect the terminal of the first battery with the terminal of the second battery. CAUTION Fuse must be removed or circuit breaker open prior to connecting the batteries to the KSU.
The cable from the batteries is inserted into the lower left side of the front of the KSU (See Figure 3) and terminated on the screw terminals marked and Double check connections and, when satisfied that connections are proper, replace the Battery Protection fuse. Plug the AC into the power supply and return load to the system. Close the circuit breaker or fuse in line with batteries. Installation is now complete and battery back-up can be tested.
12 VOLT BATTERIES (2)
r I I I I I . I I
-MARKER, , WIRE CABLE
MARKER
TERMINAL
KSU
MARKER
SINGLE WIRE
RACK AND SEPARATOR
FIGURE 4. TYPICAL BATTERY INTERCONNECTION LAYOUT
7. KTU INSTALLATION
The printed circuit cards used to configure the system are referred to as The contain static sensitive components that will require a few simple handling precautions to avoid damage. A) Keep all in their protective anti-static bags until they are installed in the KSU. All that are not in protective bags should be handled by the card edges only. Always use a grounded wrist strap when This will minimize the possibility handling of static damage. C) Never lay an unprotected KTU card on a carpeted surface. INSERTING THE POWER SUPPLY(IES) Unplug main AC power cord before installing power supplies. The AC power cord should not be plugged in at this time. See Figure 5. Power supply which powers the Basic KSU, is located in the slot on the lower left side of the KSU. Power supply 2, which powers the expansion cabinet, is located in the slot on the upper left side of the KSU. The power supplies are inserted into the appropriate slot and fastened securely with the screws contained on the power supply. The AC cord is installed (plugged) into the socket on the KSU left side and distributed to the plugs located between the power supplies. There are 2 plugs located between the 2 power supplies. These are plugged into the power supply fronts. The top plug goes to power supply 2 and the bottom plug goes to power supply 1. The DC cables are routed from the DC output screw connector to the DC/DC converter DC input screw terminals. The DC cables to connect power supply 1 to the DC/DC converter are packaged with the DC/DC converter. The DC to connect power supply 2 to the converter are packaged with the expansion KSU.
INSERTING PERIPHERAL KTU s A) be safely unplugged with the power O n , but it is strongly suggested that power be turned OFF to insert them. B) When inserting a card into the KSU, make sure the card edges are aligned with the KSU card guides, that the service switch is down, and that the component side of the card faces to the right. Note that the card ejector tabs are color coded to match the designations on the KSU. Make sure that the are securely seated in their respective card connections. Press firmly on the card ejector tabs once the KTU is mounted into the KSU. The service switch should be returned to the normal (up) position.
KTU PROGRAMMING
A) The KIB, COB and SIB cards each have a service switch on the front of the card. The switch should be in the Normal (up) position for normal operation. The EPB has a DIP switch assembly for programming various system functions. Make sure the switches are positioned according to the functions described in Section C) APL card provides the and unsupervised conference features and supports single line telephones with 2 DTMF senders and 2 DTMF receivers.
FIGURE 5. CONNECTING POWER SUPPLY DC/DC CONVERTER
ENCORE CX 3672
INSTRUCTIONS
NORMAL/SERVICE
COMPONENT SIDE
FIGURE 6. CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD (COB)
(I
601-Q
SECTION 60 1 1, MAY 1967
COMPONENT SIDE :: :: S 2
I RECEIVERSENDER MODULE ; I I
EXTERNAL PAGING
FIGURE 8. APPLICATION BOARD (APL)
601-10
SECTION 60 1 ISSUE 1, MAY
YELLOW COLORED TABS
DIP SWITCHES
NOTE:
is
FIGURE 9. ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD
8. STATION CONNECTIONS
A type female connector is provided on each of the station (KIB, SIB, etc.) cards. These allow the system to be cabled to the main distribution frame (MDF). Twenty-five pair telephone cabling must be prepared with mating connectors to extend the KSU interface circuits to the MDF. The cables should be routed through the cable clamps at the bottom of the KSU to the MDF. These cables are then terminated on industry standard type punchdown connector blocks. It is recommended that 66M l-50 split blocks with bridging clips be used to simplify troubleshooting and to quickly isolate faults. The type connectors will be on the front edge of the printed circuit boards which are plugged into the green colored card slots. These connectors require male plug-ended cables for proper attachment. The actual quantity of cables required depends on the size of the system and the number of cards installed in the system. Each time a station is added to the system, another connector is equired. A maximum of 4 station cards can be
In the event of a commercial AC power interruption, lines per ETU can automatically transfer to single line telephones for emergency communications. These can be either rotary or
up to 6
DTMF but must be equipped with ringers. These SLT stations do not have to be used
for intercom, but can be if so desired. The Emergency Transfer Unit (ETU) also provides the contact closure for the Loud Bell Control.
The ETU has a
connector
that allows a cable to be installed and terminated at the MDF. Refer to Table 4 for connections.
11. KEY TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

A maximum of 72 key telephones may be installed with the ENCORE CX 3672 Key System (32 in
the Basic KSU and 40 in the Expansion KSU).

The key telephones are interfaced with (or which have 8 circuits per board. Each circuit interface is extended from the KSU to the MDF through the front edge connector cables which are located on the KIB boards. Also at the MDF are the terminated distribution cables that are run from each key telephone location.
installed in the basic cabinet.

After the type cable connector has been attached, the cable should be anchored to the cable clamps at the bottom of the KSU with tie wraps in order to prevent accidental disconnection. The expansion KSU contains station slots which connectors 5-9. See Figure 1 and
Each key telephone requires
twisted cable
wiring be used to connect the key telephones to the system on a home run basis. The telephone end of the cable is terminated on a modular jack and the MDF end of the cable should terminated on a
Tables
2 and 3.
punchdown block making up the MDF. Cross connecting (jumper) wires connect the telephone to the KIB allowing complete numbering flexibility. Each key telephone is assigned a intercom directory number in accordance with the locations of the equipped The Installer should when connecting a key telephone while system power Is ON. The first pair of wires is reserved for voice transmission. The second pair supplies data, and the third pair for off-hook voice announce (KIBOH). The first pair is the return for 24 volts and the second pair supplies the 24 volts. Both pairs are overload protected by internal circuitry on the card. See figure 11. The proper polarity of the wired connections must be maintained for proper operation.
9. CONNECTIONS An FCC approved RJ2 1 X connector should be supplied by the at the demarcation facility. The RJ2 1 X should be located within 25 of the KSU. All line connections are made on the and P2 cables. The connector is located on the Basic KSU and the P2 connector on the Expansion KSU. A COB card must be installed in
the associated KSU card slots in order for the line interface connections to be established. Refer to Tables and 6.
10. EMERGENCY TRANSFER CONNECTIONS 4s an option, an Emergency Transfer Unit

be installed in the basic and expansion
NOTE:
shown in
FIGURE 10. EMERGENCY TRANSFER CIRCUIT

2 J2 4
-qT
WING , -
11
FIGURE 11. KEY TELEPHONE WIRING

CROSS-CWNLCT MOCK 4 OR OR TO 4
BLOCK
FIGURE 12. DSS AND PHONE BOX WIRING
FIGURE 13. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE WIRING
12. DSS INSTALLATION

The is assigned to operate with a key telephone. Up to 3 units can be assigned to a station. There is no limit to the number of units that can be installed in a system, but each unit uses a key telephone interface circuit and this reduces station capacity on a 1 per basis. twisted cable is required for connecting A the DSS unit. The cable should be placed from the DSS to the MDF in a home run manner. The DSS end of the cable is terminated on a modular jack and the MDF end is punched down on a terminal block for cross connection to the appropriate station cable. See Figure 12. Since the KSU supplies power to the DSS, no or external power device is required.
INSTALLING RECEIVER/SENDER MODULE

A) Turn system power OFF and remove the Application Board. B) Locate the and K2 connectors on the Application Board. See Figure 8. C) Note the and K2 connectors on the RSM. D) Take the RSM and push the pin connector pins on the APL board. gently onto the E) Then push the K2 pin connector on the RSM gently onto the K2 pins on the APL board. The Receiver/Sender Module is now installed and the APL can be returned to its place in the KSU. If more than 24 Single Line sets, use an extra RSM.
13. SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Single line telephones can be exchanged for key telephones on an 8 for 8 basis. The following items are required for a system equipped with at least one Single tine Interface Board (SIB), one Ring Generator Unit (RGU), and one Application Board (APL). The SIB is color coded with green ejector tabs is plugged into any green designated card slot. Each SIB board supports 8 telephones (standard DTMF single line telephones and message waiting DTMF The Ring Generator Unit must be installed to provide power for tinging and message waiting for See Figure 13. When the number of installed exceeds the handling of the 2 DTMF receivers, the RSM module should be installed. The Receiver/Sender Module (RSM) plugs into the Application Board and provides 4 additional DTMF receivers and 1 additional sender to support single line phones. Figure 8. Each SLT requires one-pair cable. The cable should be placed from the telephone location to the MDF in a home run manner. The telephone end of the cable run should be terminated in a modular jack and the MDF end should be punched down on a terminal block for cross connection to the appropriate station cable. NOTE: Single Line Telephones operate on 24V for talk battery, which may not work with some peripheral devices.
15. WALL MOUNTING THE TELEPHONE

The telephone can be converted to allow wall mounting by unsnapping the base plate and placing it into the wall mount position. Every telephone can be converted for wall mounting without requiring any extra parts. To convert the telephone for wall mounting: 1. Place the telephone with the bottom facing up toward you. 2. Press in on the upper edge of the left side at the base plate. It unsnaps and lifts out. 3. Remove the connecting cord on the inside of the base plate. 4. Insert connecting cord into the bottom of the telephone. See Figure 14. 5. Reverse the base plate and snap it on the opposite side of the bottom of the telephone. The bottom of the telephone will now be level and there will be 2 holes which will enable the telephone to be on a regular telephone wall jack. Plug the connecting cord into the wall jack. 6. lift up the number identification plate and remove the screw. 7. Remove the handset retainer and turn it around. See Figure 14. 8. Replace the screw. The telephone is now ready for wail mounting.
REVISED
\ & k ) \
i - - .i
HANDSET RETAINER
REMOVE THE BASE
REVERSIBLE BASE
LL JACK
REPLACE THE BASE
FIGURE 14. WALL MOUNTING
KEY TELEPHONE
601-16
SECTION 60 ISSUE 1, MAY
16. HEADSET INSTALLATION

The ENCORE CX Key Telephones have been designed to operate with industry standard modular headset adapters and operator headsets. To modify an ENCORE CX key telephone to support an external headset, plug the headset adapter cord into the vacant handset jack on the key telephone base. Plug the telephone handset cord into the headset adapter box where indicated by the headset manufacturers instructions. Then in the programming section under station programming, speakerphone operation must be disabled to allow headset operation. When this is done, such features as On-Hook Dialing and Handsfree speakerphone operation are rendered inoperable. However, incoming page/voice announcements, tone ringing and background music will still be heard over the speaker. The monitor key (MON) then controls the on-hook or off-hook status of the telephone.
Using the 2 jack screws, mount the terminal strip to the KSU. wire on the back of the terminal Take the strip, route through the slot where the ETU is mounted and connect to the wire on the back of the ETU. Take the connector (taped to the opening in KSU) and Insert into the pins on the Insert the into the hole (see Figure 3) 2 washer screws. and fasten power source to Connect the customer the LBC contacts. Place the plastic protector over the washer screws to hold ln Tone ringing applied to the station assigned as the will activate the contacts.
EXTERNAL PAGING EQUIPMENT
17. CONNECTION OF LOUD BELL CONTROL

ENCORE CX system provides contact closure to activate optional external signaling equipment during incoming CO line ringing. Control are selected as The stations for Loud part of system programming. Either or both of the Loud Bell Control circuits may be assigned to a station. The Loud Bell Control dry contacts will the ringing condition of that station. Loud Bell contacts are packaged with the Emergency Transfer Unit. The package should contain: 1 1 terminal 1 connector 2 amphend clips 2 jack screws 4 washer screws 1 plastic terminal protector contacts are installed next to the The on both the basic and expansion See Figure 3.
..
FIGURE 15. INSTALLATION OF EXTERNAL PAGING ZONES
601-17
18. BACKGROUND MUSIC AND MUSIC-ON-HOLD

Music-On-Hold as well as Background Music through telephone set speakers can be connected via a customer-provided tuner, tape deck, etc. Separate and Background music volume adjustments are provided on the DC/DC converter. Connections for both Background Music and Music-On-Hold are made with an RCA jack connector on the Converter. The input impedance of the music source is at 2K ohms maximum. Channel 1 is the Music-On-Hold and background music channel. Channel 2 is the second background music channel (programmable).
specified at 5 milliwatts maximum. Dry contact control is provided to switch ON the external amplifier equipment or to momentarily remove background music if supplied to the paging device. Connection is made on the APL board (see Figure 15 and Table 7). The voice output is provided on the -T/R pair for External Zone 1 and the pair for External Zone 2. The break contacts are (2) and the make contacts are pair pair (2).
20.
CONNECTIONS
19. EXTERNAL PAGING CONNECTIONS

External paging amplifier equipment may be connected to the ENCORE CX 3672 Key Telephone System for dial access from any telephone in the system (except those denied paging access). optional non-amplified External Paging zones . y be provided with the APL card. The output Impedance of the paging zones is 600 ohms at The low level voice signal output is 0
One type connector is provided and is located on the EPB board. There is an optional second RS-232C connector which can be installed on the APL board. The connector on the EPB (station message can be used for recording) or for remote access features. If the second RS-232C connector is installed on the APL board, this connector should be used for SMDR while the standard connector on the EPB is used system program printouts and remote access features (including Remote Programming and Remote is shown in Figure Maintenance). The 16.
SERIAL PORT signal Name Transmit data (in) Receive Data (out) RTS CTS SG Request to Send (in) to Send (out) Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7
Data Set Ready (out)

Signal Ground
FIGURE 16.
CONNECTIONS
MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING The SMDR feature provides detailed records of all outgoing and/or incoming, long distance only or all calls exceeding 30 seconds. This feature is enabled or disabled in system programming. By default, SMDR is not enabled and is set to record long distance calls only (see Section. 700). If the SMDR feature is enabled, the system starts collecting information about the call as soon as it starts and terminates when the call ends. If the call was longer than 30 seconds, the following information is printed: 1. 3 digits station originating the call 2. 2 digits outside line used 3. 5 digits length of the call digits- time of day 4. 5. 6 digits- month, day and year 6. 24 digits-telephone number dialed 7. 12 digits account code
Locate the and S2 connectors on the APL board. See Figure 8. Note the and S2 pins on the SIU unit. pins on the SIU onto the Gently push the pin connectors on the APL board. Then gently push the S2 pins on to the pin connectors on the APL board. Take the cable found in the SIU box and connect one end of the ribbon cable to the pins labeled S3 on the SIU (component side). Route the cable between the Receiver/Sender Module and the connector. Take the other end of the cable with the connector and mount it above the and champ connectors using the 2 screws provided. Refer to the table for data and further RS-232C Information
Standard Format The standard format is 80

characters and a single line printout with automatic carriage return and line feed instructions to advance page. 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity. HH:MM HH:MM: GG (CR) (LF) station originator outside line number HH:MM of HH:MM of day CCC. ..CCC telephone number dialed of call code return feed AAA
INSTALLING THE EXPANSION KSU

The expansion KSU can be installed at the same time as the basic KSU or at a later time. In either case the system power must be turned off prior to . the installation. Refer to Item 3 of this section of the KSU mounting. The expansion KSU mounts to the right of the basic KSU. the template provided, identify the screw hole locations. Insert me 2 screws into me wooden backboard the weight of the unit. and tighten enough to Remove the connector cover on the right side of basic KSU. See Figure 18. Remove the last KSU. 3 cards in the Feed the 3 ribbon cables through the slot created by removing the side cover and plug them into the basic KSU. See 18. Take the power cable located in the expansion KSU and feed it through the slot in the basic KSU and plug it in. Then take the ribbon cable connected to the basic KSU and connect it to me expansion KSU.
Format This format is a 3-W printout with automatic carriage return and line feed instructions at the end of each line. AAA (CR) (LF) ccc...ccc (CR) (LF)
THE RS-232C CONNECTOR A) Turn system power OFF and remove the Application Board.
E) Secure the 2 cabinets together by hooking the mounting brackets on the left side of the expansion KSU over the ones on the right side of the basic KSU and at the same time position the expansion KSU on the 2 screws inserted in step A. Tighten the screws on the right side of the expansion KSU. F) Connect the ground of the basic KSU to the ground of the expansion KSU with or larger gauge wire.
22. INSTALLING THE RING GENERATOR UNIT

When the ENCORE CX 3672 is equipped with single line telephones, a Ring Generator Unit is needed to provide ringing and power for message waiting The RGU should be mounted next to the Basic KSU. It should then be connected to the KSU as shown in Figure 17.
YELLOW BLUE
FIGURE 17. INSTALLING THE RING GENERATOR
601-20
TABLE 1. STATION CONNECTING BLOCK (KIB)

PAIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 23 49 24 BRBK 5 31 6 32 7 33 6 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 3 29 VR VR DT DR 101 101 101 101 PIN 26 1 27 2
COLOR VR 100
DT 100 DR 100
102 VR 102 DT 102 DR 102
BLBK
VT 103 103 DT 103 DR 103 104 104 DT 104 104 VT 105 VR 105 DT 105 105 106 106 DT 106 106
BUY ORN
19 20 21 22 23
BW ORN GNN BNN SW 107 VR 107 DT 107 107
24 2s
NOTE: It may be necessary to ground the third pair of wires normally used for off-hook voice announce to prevent unwanted signals to speakers of telephones (Radio Frequency interference).
TABLE 2. STATION CONNECTING BLOCK (KIBOH)

PAIR PIN 26 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 21 22 23 GNN 24 25 49 24 50 25 BNN SIN 0 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 VR 104 DT 104 104 104 OVR 104 v r 105 VR 105 DT 105 105 105 OVR 105 VT 106 VR 106 DT 108 106 106 OVR 106 107 VR 107 DT 107 107 107 107 11 37 7 33 6 34 3: R/OR 3 29 2: COLOR VT 100 VR 100 100 100 100 OVR 100 101 VR 101 DT 101 101 101 OVR 101 VT102 VR 102 DT 1 02 1 02 02 OVR 1 02 03 VR 1 03 DT 1 03 103 o v r 103 OVR 103
SLBK BUY ORN
BNN
TABLE 3. STATION CONNECTING BLOCK (SIB)

PAIR 1 2 3 4 PIN 26 2: 2 28 3 29 w. OR COLOR
W-108
5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 13 39 14 40 15 41 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 10 36 BWBL BUBK BWOR 7 33 34 OR/R 5 31
BWSL SUBK
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ORN GNN BNN
21
47 22 48 23 49 24
BW
VR115
GNN BNN SW
601-24
SECTION 60 1 MAY
TABLE 4. EMERGENCY TRANSFER UNIT CONNECTIONS
PAIR
PIN 26 2: 2 28 3 29 5 31 6 32 8 34 9 35 10 36
COLOR
1
2 3 4
to
SPARE SPARE 1 STOT 1 2COIT
Mock
to SLT
to SIB
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SPARE SPARE
SPARE SPARE 3STOT BUBK 3STIT 4COIT 4COIR SPARE SPARE 4STOT 4STOR 4STIT
17 18
13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43
18
SPARE SPARE
19
20
21
44 19 45
20
VIBL 47
22 23
22 23
24 49
SPARE SPARE
25 25
601-25
TABLE 5. P-l CONNECTING-BLOCK
PAIR
1
PIN 26 2: 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 7 33 8 34
COLOR
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 17
W/OR B 1 COST
CO81
9
35 10 38 BUBK 12 36 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 ORN 23 24 25 25 S W 23 49 GNN BNN B CO1 CO1 CO1 2T CO1 2R CO1 3T CO1 3R CO1 CO1 3 CO1 7T CO1 co1 8T co1 8R
19 20 21 22
TABLE 6. P-2 CONNECTING BLOCK

PAIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 SW 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 38 11 37 . suw 1 27 2 28 3 29 BLW PIN COLOR CO1 CO1 C 0 B 4
OR/R
B 5 BUBK
SUBK
B 6
GNN
ORN GNN BNN
TABLE 7. APPLICATION BOARD CONNECTIONS
PAIR
1
PIN 26 1 27 2 28 3
29
COLOR PAGE VOICE 1 W/OR BREAK CONTACT MAKE CONTACT PAGE VOICE 2 BREAK CONTACT
2 3
4
5 8 7 8 9
10
11 12 13 14 15 18 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 38 BUBK 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25
MAKE CONTACT
BUY
ORN GNN BNN
601
ISSUE 1, MAY 1987
ENCORE win IO Me IO
lo
FIGURE .
TYPICAL STATION CABLE
BLOCK)
23. FIRST RS-232C PORT

The first RS-232C port for the system is a standard feature available on the EPB (and on the now obsolete CPB) card. It can provide Remote Programming and Remote Maintenance. The RS-232C port is considered DCE (Data Communication Equipment).
An input signal is not required on Data Terminal Ready (DTR pin 20). A high or low signal applied has no effect on data flow. d. SMDR output To direct the SMDR output data to port switch 7 on the EPB (or CPB) must be in the position if the second RS-232 port is installed. If the second RS-232 port is not installed, switch 7 has no effect. The character set language is sent as Standard Numerical Code (ASCII). Either or print format can be selected. Two factors affect this selection. First, is enabled when switch 6 on the EPB card is ON; is enabled when it is in the position. Second, program code FLASH 20 (button 3) also controls this option. If is selected and button 3 is ON, OFF assigns Default is
Pin, 2 4 5 6
Signal TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG
23.1 DATA PARAMETERS a. Word format Asynchronous, 8 bits, 2 stop A conflict can occur between the selection made on the EPB and programming of FLASH 20. If either programming or the EPB is set for will be the format used. So, if is desired both must be set for format. SMDR output must be programmed to be enabled. Program code FLASH (button 1) controls this feature. If button 1 is OFF, SMDR is is allowed button 1 is ON. disallowed. default for this feature.
no parity.
b. Data rate The data rate is programmable through the administration port 100. Program code (button 4) is used to either or 4866 baud. Default is baud. c. Data protocol A high is provided for Clear To Send and Data Set Ready on pins and respectively, for control of a remote These signal leads remain high at
23.2 SECOND
PORT
to control data A high to this pin enables data and a signal data flow. For this feature to be active, 2 on the (CPB) be the If it is in the data flow occur regardless of the applied to pin 4
The optional Module (222) added to the APL card considered the second port, This
a. Word format and data for port 1.
SECOND RS-232C PORT (CONTD) b. output To direct the output data to 2, 7 on the EPB must be in the ON position. Switch 2 on the EPB has no effect on the flow (RTS) of port 2. The also has a switch (switch 5) which enables output. Once again, both the system program (FLASH 20) and EPB switch must both be to enable SMDR. c. Data rate Data rate is not chosen by programming code FLASH 20 (button 4). Baud rate is by switch settings on the RS-232C module. 300, or baud can be chosen.
23.3
CABLE INTERFACE TO PRINTERS AND TERMINALS
When making an interface cable to connect a printer/terminal to an RS-232C port on the ENCORE CX system, fdlow the guidelines below: a. Use the recommended connector for both the ENCORE CX and the printer/terminal.
b. Only connect pins and jumpers that will actually be used.

C.
Fdlow the recommendation of the printer/terminal manufacturers for the proper cable requirements, such as gauge, twisted pairs, stranded wire, shielding and maximum length.
d. Use the EIA busy signal is provided from the printer/terminal) to control data flow from the SMDR port. A high signal applied to pin 4 (RTS) on the SMDR port indicates the printer/terminal is ready and a low signal means busy. If this control is not provided from the printer/terminal, use 300 baud to reduce the chances of exceeding the printers buffer capacity and losing call records. RS-232C port 1 is located on the front edge of the EPB. Port 2 is located on the front edge of the APL Because physical clearance between the a D-subminiature connector a low profile hood with a right angle exit is suggested. Set up the printer/terminal parameters to match the ones provided in the ENCORE CX systems.
23.4
EXAMPLE 1 : OKIDATA LOW SPEED INTERFACE CABLING CONNECTIONS . PRINTER KSU Pin Pin
62A WITH
23.6
EXAMPLE 2: PANASONIC TERMINAL (USING EIA PORT) CONNECTIONS KSU Signal TD RD RTS SG DTR Pin 3
2nd
PORTABLE
-Signal RD RTS CTS
TERMINAL Pin Signal RD RTS SG DTR
signal
3 ------- > 3 5 7- - - - - -7 - 2 0
CTS
SG DTR
SG
DTR
5 20
PRINTER SETUP I , Dip Switch OFF S2 OFF S3 OFF OFF ON S6 OFF S7 OFF S6 ON Back Dip Switch Sl A S4 S6 ON OFF OFF SP-2 A
23.7 TERMINAL SETUP Set the terminal parameters as follows: l-1200 l-6 3-M 4-N 5-N 6-N 7-N 8-N 9-N 10-2 11 12-L 13-N
23.5 KSU SETUP a. Set baud rate for 1200.
b. Turn on SMDR. c. d. OFF for SMDR output to be RS-232C port 1 on the card. to 2 Set for printing.
23.8 KSU SETUP See Example 1.
SMDR output to be directed to port 2 on the APL card.
24. FEATURE PACKAGE

Feature Package V software provides a number of new features, including Remote Programming, Remote Maintenance, and Call Distribution .
b. Data Rate The data rate is programmable (for the RS-232C port on the EPB) through the administration port Program code FLASH 20 (button 4) is used to select either 300, 1200 or 4800 baud. 4800 baud rate is the default selection. Most data terminals will support the use of 300 and 1200
25. REMOTE PROGRAMMING AND MAINTENANCE: AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

The use of a terminal or computer (with communication software) connected to the RS-232C port both on-site and acon the EPB can cess to the programming and maintenance features. If this system option is going into a new installation, initialization is required. of the EPB is no: required for adding this option to existing system installations. The configuration of the data device connected to the RS-232C port must match the parameters of the
c. Data Protocd A high signal is provided for Clear To Send (CTS) and Data Set Ready (DSR) on pins 5 and 6, respectively, for control of a remote device. These signal leads remain high at times. The Request To Send (RTS on pin 4) can be used to control data flow. A high to this pin enables date flow, and a low signal disables data flow. For this feature to be active, switch 2 on the EPB must be in the position. If is in the ON position, data flow will occur regardless of the signal applied to pin 4 (RTS). An input signal is not required on Data Terminal Reedy (DTR on pin 20). A high or low signal applied has no effect on data flow.
25.1
ECX EPB RS-232C PORT DATA PARAMETERS DCE (Data Com-
The port is munication Equipment).
The RS-232C port is located on the front edge

of the EPB. Because clearance between the KSU cover and port 1 is no more
than
D-subminiature connector
using a low profile hook with a right angle
INTERFACE
MODEMS
An interface
will connect a modem or terminal
to the tem, using the 252 DATA PARAMETERS a

Asynchronous, 8 bits, 2 stop bits, no parity.
on the ENCORE CX sysguidelines: for both the
a. Use
recommended CX and the
b. Only connect pins and jumpers that will actually used.
25.3
EPB RS-232C CABLE INTERFACE Follow the recommendation of the modem or terminal manufacturer for the proper cable requirments, such a gauge, twisted pairs, stranded wire, shielding and maximum length.
s2 OFF/ ON OFF;
s3 OFF/ OFF
S4 OFF
BAUD 300 1200
OFF
d. Use the EIA busy signal (if is provided from the modem or terminal) to control data flow from the EPB port. A high signal applied to pin 4
OFF
ON
9600
For additional information and examples for using the second RS-232C port, refer back to page 30 of this
section.
(RTS) on the RS-232C port indicates the modem or is ready and a low signal means busy. If this control is not provided from the modem or terminal, use 300 baud to reduce the chances of exceeding buffer capacity. e. Sat the modem or terminal parameters to match the ones provided in the ENCORE CX systems.
25.4
26. OFF-SITE DATA TERMINAL PROGRAMMING FOR THE ECX 3672136112

The ECX system can be remotely programmed from a data terminal interfaced to the ECX system through a modem connected to a single line telephone port or central office line. The ECX system can be programmed to direct a dedicated incoming CO line ring to a single line telephone port. The modem is then connected to the SIB board circuit that is programmed to ring. The modem then interfaces to the EPB using an cable. The telephone number is then dialed rings the SIB port and is automatically answered by the modem. Connection is then made to the ECX system by the modem through the EIA cable connections on the The remote caller is now connected, using a data terminal or computer, through a end modem or coupler to the ECX for programming. 26.1 EXAMPLE 1: HAYES CONNECTIONS
USING SMDR AND REMOTE PROGRAMMING
System setup to support both and Remote Programming/Maintenance features requires that the SMDR data be directed to the second RS-232C port of the ECX system. This port is provided on the APL card using the optional RS-232C module (232) which is required for this application. a. To direct the SMDR output data to port 2, switch 7 on the EPB must be in the ON position. Switch 2 on the EPB has no effect on the flow control (RTS) of port 2. 5) which b. The EPB also has a switch output. Both the system program enables (FLASH 20) and EPB switch 5 must be to SMDR. c. Data rate is not by code 20 (button 4). Baud rate communications through 2 selected by switch settings on the module.
CO line (SIB port) connection and the EIA port connection. The single telephone station port is connected to the LINE jack of the HAYES Smartmodem with a male mod-to-mod line cord.
26.1 EXAMPLE 1 (CONTD.)
The EIA port connections are accomplished with an RS-232C cable. HAYES Smartmodem Cabling Connections KSU (DCE) Pin signal TD MODEM (DCE) Pin Signal RD TD 7 -- 7 The HAYES Smartmodem must have all 10 internal dipswitches selected in the UP (OFF) position. The ECX EPB must have dipswitches 2 and 6 OFF and ail other switches set to the ON position.
The baud rate for the EPB RS-232C port must be set to 1200 or baud. This is programmed through Station 100. Program FLASH 20 (button 4) using option 1 or 2. Make sure the remote data terminal or computer has communications parameters set to 8 bits, 1 stop no and full duplex. The baud rate must match the rate assigned for the EPB RS-232C port of the ECX system. During remote programming, if no data communication takes place for 9 minutes, a warning tone will sound. If no communication is received during the next minute, the ECX system will TIME OUT and disconnect from database administration programming.
FIGURE 20. RECORDED ANNOUNCE DEVICE (REAR VIEW) AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC COMPANY 212 PLUS
39 I IL
FIELD CONVERSION KIT
ISSUE 1, JULY 1988

TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION 1. PAGE
1
INSTALLING THE 36112 FIELD CONVERSION KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 INSTALLING THE EXPANSION KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. EXPANDED INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 3
3
4. KTU PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF FIGURES
1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
INSTALLATION LAYOUT AND DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING CABINET STRAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIBBON CONNECTION CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTING POWER SUPPLY TO DC/DC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENCORE CX 36112 KSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 4 5 5
602-A
FIELD CONVERSION KIT
ISSUE 1, JULY 1988

1. INSTALLING THE 36112 FIELD CONVERSION KIT 1.1 INSTALLING THE EXPANSION KSU The 36112 Expansion KSU can be installed, at the same time as the Basic KSU or at a later time. In either case the system power must be turned off prior to the installation. a. Refer to Section 601, paragraph 3 of the Technical Manual: KSU mounting. The 36112 Expansion KSU mounts directly on top of the Basic KSU. There is also a power cage which mounts to the right of the Basic KSU. See Figure 1. If you are upgrading a previously installed 3672 system, you must first remove the 3672 Expansion cabinet prior to installing the 36112 power cage. Mark the location of the screws for the power cage and the Expansion KSU. Insert the screws and tighten enough to support the weight of the 2 units. Remove the connector cover on the right side of the Basic KSU. Remove the last 3 cards in the Basic KSU (slots 7, 6, 9). There are 3 ribbon cables that connect to the 36112 Expansion cabinet. Feed the 3 ribbon cables through the slot created by removing the side cover, and plug them into the Basic KSU. The cables are keyed to prevent from being them installed incorrectly. d. Feed the ribbon cables through the left side of the power cabinet and out the top. Secure the power cage to the Basic KSU by hooking the mounting brackets on the left side of the power cage over the ones on the right side of the Basic KSU, and at the same time position the power cage over the 2 screws inserted in step a. Tighten the screws on the right side of the power cage to secure it to the wall and to the Basic KSU. e. Mount the Expansion cabinet directly on top of the Basic KSU and power cage and position over the 4 screws inserted in step a. Be sure the ribbon cables are stuffed back into the power cabinet prior to placing the 36112 Expansion KSU on the Basic cabinet. Make sure the expansion power cord and connector are fed through the cabinet. top of the power Locate the two cabinet straps and place them on both sides of the KSU and secure them with screws. Figure 2. Tighten the screws into the backboard Expansion hold the cabinet securely in place.
b.
C.
662-l
ENCORE
1.1 INSTALLING THE EXPANSION KSU (CONTD) f. Feed the ribbon cables through the top of the power cabinet and through the slot at the bottom of the Expansion K S U . P u l l t h e cables up through the power and the cabinet into Expansion backplane of cabinet. Analog cable should be plugged in first followed by analog cable Last install the digital communication cable. See Figure 3. Cables should be inserted carefully and securely. Install the ribbon cable retainer on the left side of the DC/DC the space separator. Place ribbon cables into the plastic retainer and slide the cap on. Expansion cables should now be in a position not to interfere with any cards being plugged in. g. Take the inter-cabinet power cord and connector found in the Expansion KSU and pull through the same slot as the ribbon cables. Plug into the right rear on the inside of the Basic KSU. h. Remove the existing power cord plug from the left side of the Basic KSU. Take the AC cord from the power cabinet (female end) the power cabinet into the 36112 cabinet. Expansion Feed it
side of the power cage. Do not plug into the AC outlet at this time.
i.
Connect the ground of the Basic KSU to the ground of the Expansion KSU with or larger gauge wire. C a r e s h o u l d b e taken in routing the ground wire ensure to that it doesnt interfere with anything in the cabinet. install the DC/DC second converter into its slot in the 36112 Expansion cabinet. It should be connected to the third power supply. The two wires (15 inch for doing so are included in the Expansion KSU. the red wire to the B+ 24V terminal on the DC/DC converter and the black wire to the BGND terminal on the DC/DC converter. See Figure 4. A DC/DC converter BCB with (Battery Charging Board) should be installed if complete system battery backup is desired.
k. Re-install any cards removed from the Basic KSU. install the required cards into the 36112 Expansion KSU.
and route it through the top of
across the bottom of the KSU and

out the left side. Secure the cord with a cable tie on the side. inside left Take the
Ensure the converter on/off switches (both Basic and Expansion) are turned off. Plug the AC cord into the AC electrical outlet. NOTE: The (Expanded Interface Board) is an extension of the EPB. The should be installed before turning power on. This will allow the EPB to recognize it as part of the power-up sequence. The EIB cannot be inserted or removed under
power.
end of the AC cord and insert just the into removed. The power cord to the
AC is now plugged into the right
ISSUE 1. JULY 1988
2. EXPANDED INTERFACE BOARD

The is equipped with light blue ejector tabs and is installed in card slot 13 of the Expansion KSU. This required to support card is additional intercom paths and station numbers above 155. The is an extension of the processor capabilities.
4. KTU PROGRAMMING
Refer to Section 601, paragraph 7. The EPB contains the same DIP switches as described for the CPB and they should be positioned as described in Section 9001901. The also the same function as described in Section 901 for the CPB.
3. BATTERY BACKUP
If complete system battery backup is desired, both DC/DC converters must come equipped with BCB (Battery Charging Board). See Sec. 601, paragraph 6 for details on installing battery backup. One set of batteries can be used with 2 jumper leads to connect to both DC/DC converters.
IN3
ISSUE 1, JULY 1988

i 2 6 7 1 27-r 8
EXPANSION KSU
BASIC KSU
Figure 1 Installation Layout and
Figure 2 Installing Cabinet Straps
ISSUE 1, JULY 1988
EXPANSION KSU
Figure
Ribbon Connection
WIRE RED WIRE
CX 36112 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
ISSUE 1, JULY 1966
716.6 690 36112 EXPANSION KSU
BGND
ENDED POWER CORD
RIBBON CABLES: ANALOG VOICE CABLE 2. ANALOG VOICE CABLE 3. DIGITAL COMMUNICATION CABLE
AC
Figure 5
ENCORE CX 36112 KSU
LX
ISSUE
MAY 1987
ENCORE CX 816 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE DESCRIPTION 1. INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 PROGRAM MODE ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................................... 4 4 5
SYSTEM PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO LINE PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. STATION PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. EXCEPTION TABLES PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. SPECIAL TABLES PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINT ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. PROGRAMMING SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. PROGRAM
DEFAULT VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALLOW/DENY RULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 21
OF SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIST OF FIGURES 1. EXECUTIVE TELEPHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
700-A .
ISSUE
MAY 1897
ENCORE CX 816 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

1. INTRODUCTION The ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System can be programmed to meet each customers individual needs. All programming is done at station 100 using a key telephone. This can be done with either a button or non-display telephone. However, using a display phone will make programming easier. This display will indicate what features are being programmed and the current programming of these features. When data is changed, this will be displayed so you can see what has been entered. Upon entering the program mode, the ENCORE CX Key Telephone at station 100 no longer operates as a telephone but as a programming instrument with all of the buttons redefined. The keys of the dial pad are used to enter the various data fields and to enter numerical information such as timers. The 12 buttons located at the top of the phone (Program Buttons) are used to program features such as class of service, line groups, station features, toll restriction tables, .etc. (Figure 1) At the time the system is installed, upon entering the program mode, the system MUST be initialized to load default data into memory. See Table 1 for default data. If this preprogramming suits the customer, initialization is all that is needed. Any time data is to be changed, the program mode must be entered and then the individual program code. Use program codes to determine current programming or to change a specific feature. During programming other operate normally. If a program code is used to determine programming but nothing is changed (or changed but not entered into memory by pressing HOLD), the previous data will remain intact upon leaving the field. Program codes do not have to be used in any particular order. When programming, tones are provided to help the programmer determine correct or incorrect entry of data. A solid tone indicates the data was accepted. An interrupted tone means an error was made. When this occurs, re-enter the data. Until new data is entered and accepted, the system will continue to operate under default or previously programmed values. The ENCORE CX 816, unlike the 3672, has no temporary buffer area where data is stored during programming. Data is entered permanently into the data base when the HOLD button is pressed. It is not necessary to use FLASH 80.
700-l
Customer worksheets should be filled out before programming begins. Go through the following instructions and explanations step-by-step and fill out all worksheets before attempting to program the system.
TABLE 1. DEFAULT VALUES FEATURE

System Hold Recall Timer Exclusive Hold Recall Timer Transfer Recall Timer Preset Forward Timer Pause Timer Call Park Timer Conference Timer Wait Reminder Tone Paging Timeout Timer CO Ring Detect Timer Hold Preference Automatic Privacy
PROGRAM CODE Flash 01

Flash 02 Flash 03 Flash 04 Flash 05 Flash 06 Flash 07 Flash 08 Flash 09 Flash 10 Flash 11 Flash 12
VALUE
060 sec. 180 sec. 045 sec. 10 sec. 2 sec. 180 sec. 10 min.
000 min.
15 sec. 3 (100 msec.) System Yes
Loud Bell Operation for UNA

l
Attendant Override Attendant Station Assignment Loud Bell Control PBX Dialing Codes Transfer Station Hunt Groups SMDR (ON.OFF) Call Type Print Format Baud Rate Forced Account Codes
Flash 13 Flash 14 .
Flash 15 Flash16 Flash 17
Off Yes
100
Flash 18 (Buttons l-4) Flash 19 (Buttons l-8)

Flash 20 (Button 1)
None None None None

off
* Alarm ON/OFF Signaling Loop Detect Dii Pulse Ratio Dial Speed Access Code Intercom Box Timer Dedicated Attendant Intercom Path Music Channels Setting Time and Date Monitor Mode
(Button 2) (Button 3) (Button 4) (Button 5) Flash 21 (Button 1) (Button 2) (Button 3) Flash 22 (Button 1) (Button 2) Flash 24 Flash 25 Flash 26 Flash 27 Flash 28 Flash 29 .
Long Dist.
300
Once Closed (break/make)
None
20
No 1 None No
l l l
ENCORE CX 3672 only * ENCORE CX 816 only m* Also controls ring time in CX 3672 system
MAY 1987
TABLE 1. DEFAULT VALUES (CONTD)

FEATURE CO Line Attributes Pulse UNA Loop Supervision PROGRAM CODE Flash 30 (Button 1) (Button 2) (Button 3) (Button 4) (Button 5) (Button 6) (Button 7) (Button 8) Flash 31 Flash 32 Flash 33 Flash 40 Page A (Button 1) (Button 2) (Button 3) (Button 4) DTMF co Yes No No 20 1 1 1 sec. 010 msec. 01 min. VALUE
l l
l l
Flash Timer CO tine Group Line COS Hook Switch Timer Hook Switch Bounce Timer Attendant Recall Timer Station Attributes Paging Access
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
DND Access
System Speed Access Queuing Access Preferred Line Answer OHVA Call Forward Access Alarm Signal Station Type
(Button 5)
(Button 6) (Button 7) (Button 8)
No
No Yes No
Station Class of Service Speakerphone Operation Group Pickup Assignment Paging Zone Assignment Preset Assignment CO Line Group Access CO Line Button Assignment
Exception Tables
Page B (Button 1) (Button 2) (Button 3)

(Button 4)
(Button 5) (Button 6) (Button 7) (Button 8) Flesh 50 (Button 1) (Button 2)

(Button 3)
0 1 0 1 1 None
Allow Table A Deny Table A Allow Table B Deny Table B Special 1 Special Table 2 Special Table 3 Special Table 4
l l
None
None
(Button 4) (Button 5) (Button 6) (Button 7) (Button 8)
None All All All All
3672 only * ENCORE CX 816
MAY 1987
2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES 2.1 PROGRAM MODE ENTRY

Programming is done at station 100 using or display telephone. preferably a Programming is always done at this station regardless of attendant assignment or class of service. To enter the program mode, the programmer must first verify that the is property connected to station 100. 1. Go off-hook or press MON button to ON. 2. Dial an asterisk
l
3. Dial (PROG). Confirmation tone is heard. Initialize system data base at this point (ENCORE CX 816 must be initialized in programming; see paragraph 2.2) 4. Press FLASH button. Dial 2-digit program code.
l l
6. Enter data. 7. Press HOLD. (Confirmation tone) All data is now stored in permanent memory and will affect system operation.
EXECUTIVE TELEPHONE
700-4
ISSUE
MAY 1987
2.2
The system has been pre-programmed with certain features which are called default data. (Table 1) These features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. The system should ALWAYS be initialized when installed or at any time the data base has been corrupted. To initialize the system to default
ENCORE CX 816 Repeat the procedures explained below for each of the data base areas.
1. Enter the programming mode. button. 2. Press 3. Dial 60 to initialize system parameters.
4. Press HOLD button. 5. Repeat from step 2 for the other areas. In step 3 use the following program codes. 60 for system parameters 61 for CO lines 62 for station parameters 63 for exception tables. 64 for system speed numbers
SECTION 700
ISSUE
MAY 1 3 8 7
The following sections are divided into 2 columns. The left column is a step-by-step of how to enter data into the system data base. The right column is an explanation column and contains information such as default values and parameters for that program code. The enclosed box shows the information when using an executive telephone to program.
3. SYSTEM PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING Make sure you have entered the programming mode. (Sec. 2.1) A. System Hold Recall Timer
If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH
Determines the amount of time before a placed on system hold will recall the station placing the hold,
button and dial 01. If you have a display telephone, you will see
this display:
HOLD RECALL 000-300 060
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) Exclusive Hold Recall Timer If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 02. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
EXC HOLD RECALL 000-300 180
Default value is 060 seconds and is variable from 001-300 seconds. A 000 entry means no recall.
Determines amount of time before a call placed on exclusive hold will recall the station placing the hold.
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display now update) C. Transfer Recall Timer if this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and 03. if you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
TRANSFER RECALL 000-300
The default value is set at 180 seconds and is variable from 001 to 300 seconds. An entry of 000 means no recall. Determines the amount of time a transferred call will ring at the statlon receiving the transfer before it will recall the station which made the transfer.
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) 700-6
Default is 045 seconds and is variable from 001-300 seconds. A 000 entry means no recall.
REVISED
ENCORE CX 816 PROGRAMMING
ISSUE 1. MAY 1987
D. Preset Forward Timer If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 04. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: PRESET
10 TIMER 00-99
Determines the amount of time an outside line will ring before being forwarded to a predetermined station. This entry works with Preset Forward assignments in station attributes. More than one station can be forwarded to the same destination.
NOTE: This timer also controls the length of time a call will ring at a station.
Default time is set at 0 seconds and is variable from seconds. A 00 entry means no forward.
Enter 2 digits on the numeric keypad (Refer to worksheet). Press button. (Display will now update)
E. Pause Timer
If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 05. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
PAUSE TIMER 2
Determines the length of the pause for use with automatically sent digits or other speed dialing.
Enter 1 digit on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now
Default is 2 seconds and is variable from l-9

seconds. There is no 0 entry.
F. Call Park Recall Timer

If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH
Determines the amount of time before a placed in a call park location will recall the station placing
button and dial 06. you have a display telephone, you will see
this display: CALL PARK
180
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad
(refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
Default is 160 seconds and is variable from 001-600 seconds. A 000 entry means no recall.
ISSUE
MAY 1987
G. Conference Timer
If timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 07. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
CONFERENCE TIMER 00-99
Determines the amount of time an unsupervised conference can continue after the initiator of the conference has exited the conference.
Enter 2 digits on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
Default is 10 minutes and is variable from minutes. A 00 entry means no disconnect.
H. Message Waiting Reminder Tone If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 08. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
TONE ooo ooo-104
Determines the amount of time between repeated reminder tones to a telephone with a message waiting.
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad

(refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
Default is 000 (disabled) and is variable from 000-l 04 minutes.
Paging Timeout Timer

If this timer is to be changed, press
button and dial OS. If you have a display telephone, you this display:
see
Determines the maximum length of a page. The system automatically disconnect the page at the end of this time unless the has hung up . earlier.
Enter 2 digits on numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press (Display will now update)
Default is 15 and is seconds. A 00 entry the are not limited in length.
from 01-60 and pages
ISSUE
MAY 1987
J. CO Ring Detect Timer If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 10. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: CO RING DETECT 3 2-9
This timer controls the time necessary to detect an outside line as ringing into the system.
Enter 1 digit on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) K. Hold Preference If this feature is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 11. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: HOLD PREFERENCE SYS-EX
Default is 3 (hundred milliseconds) and is variable from 2-9. There is no 0 or 1 entry.
The system may be programmed to have either exclusive or system hold preferred. If exclusive hold is preferred, depress HOLD button once for exclusive hold and twice for system hold when a key telephone. If system hold is preferred, depress HOLD button once for system hold and twice for exclusive hold.
To make a change, press the top left program

button. It will toggle on and off with each depression. LED off --exclusive LED on
Default is system hold.
(Watch your display) Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) L. Automatic Privacy this feature is to be changed, press button and dii 12. If you have a telephone, you will see this display: desired, the system can be programmed to eliminate CO line privacy, allowing a maximum of c other station to join in on existing outside line conversations. If privacy is disabled and a station joins an existing call in progress, both parties will hear an alert tone. Default is yes-automatic privacy is in effect.
To make a change, press the top left
Program Button. It will toggle on and off with each depression. LED off
LED on ==yes
(Watch your display) Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) 700-9
ISSUE
MAY 1987
M. Attendant Station If this feature is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 15. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
ATTN STA ASSIGNMENT 100,
The system will identify an attendant station for the purpose of receiving recalls and activating night service. The ENCORE CX 816 can have only one attendant; the ENCORE CX 3672 can have up to 3.
Enter the 3-digit station number on the numeric keypad. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
By default station 100 is assigned as attendant will remove that station. Entering 3 pounds attendant assignment or a different station number(s) can be programmed. Two stations can be assigned to Loud Bell Control. The LBC contacts will follow the ringing assignments of those stations.
l
N. Loud Bell Control

If this feature is to be assigned, press FLASH button and dial 16. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
LOUD BELL CONTROL ASSIGN
The second 3 digits = the station assigned
to the second Loud Bell Control.

NOTE: Requires optional Emergency Transfer Unit (ETU) on 3672. Maximum one ETU per cabinet. One loud bell contact per ETU. By default no stations are assigned. Entering the
Enter the station numbers. A maximum of 6 digits (2 stations) may be entered.* Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
pound
will remove an assignment.
0. PBX Dial Codes If these are to be assigned, press FLASH

button and dial 17. If you have a display telephone, you will see
this display:
PBX DIAL CODES
J
Five 1 or PBX access codes can be programmed into memory. When dialed, these codes signal the system so that restriction is applied at the next dialed digit. When a single-digit access code (9) is required, the pound must be entered as the second digit (9
Enter code one right after the other up to a maximum of 10 digits on the numeric keypad. Press HOLD button.
By default no codes are assigned. To delete an entry, enter two (pound) and press HOLD.
700-l 0
P. Executive/Secretary Pairs If these are to be assigned, press button and dial 18. If you have a display telephone, you will this display:
See
There are 4 sets of pairs available. When an executive station is busy or in DND, intercom calls and transfers will be automatically routed to the designated secretary.
The top left Program Button will be lit indicating the first pair may be entered. executive station. Enter Enter secretary station. Press HOLD button. To enter a second pair, press the second program button. Enter 3-digit executive station. Enter secretary station. Press HOLD button. For a third pair, press third program button. Enter executive station. Enter station. Press HOLD button. For a fourth pair, press fourth program button. Enter executive station. Enter secretary Press HOLD button.
There can be only one pairing of stations no duplicates. You cannot pair EXEC to SEC 10 1) and then pair SEC to EXC (1 01 100). YOU can have the same station for more than one executive station (101-100, 102-100). An entry of pounds will remove the assignments. Individual pairs may be changed by pressing the associated program button.
Q. Hunt Groups
If these are to be assigned, press FLASH button and dii 19. If you have a telephone, you will see this display: HUNT GROUP
There can be 8 hunt groups of no more than 8 stations each. The hunt groups use a pilot hunting technique. If the pilot number is dialed, the assigned stations in that hunt group are searched in the order in which they are entered into programming. The first
idle station will be rung.
The top left program button
be lit for
programming the first hunt group.
If a specific station number is dialed, only that station is rung; no hunting will be done if that station is busy. By default no stations are assigned to a hunt group.
700-l 1
I IUN
UU
ISSUE
MAY 1987
Enter the station numbers up to a maximum of 24 digits (8 stations). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) To enter further hunt groups press program buttons as follows:
to another If a station is in DND or is station, it is considered busy. Hunt groups can be joined together by programming another hunt group number as the last entry instead
of a station number. To remove stations from a hunt group, enter three # (pound) signs and press HOLD. This will erase all previous stations in that group.
The groups and pilot numbers are:
Group 0= 260 Group

Enter station numbers. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) Group
Group
Group
Group Group
Group
R. SMDR If this feature is to be used, press FLASH

button and dial 20. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
SDR NO TPE LD PNT 80 BDR 300 ACC NO
A call accounting device can be installed allowing the system to track calls by outside line number, number dialed, time of day, date, station that placed or
received the and duration of the call.
To program SMDR features, use the program buttons as follows:
By default SMDR ii not enabled. The system can be set to record either ail outgoing calls or only long distance outgoing calls.
By default it is set to record long distance (LD) only. The system can be programmed to print in either an or a format. By default the system is set to print in the character format. The baud rate for the printer can be set for either These buttons toggle on and off 1200 baud or 300 baud (slow). Default is 300. (refer to worksheet). The system can be programmed to force the use of LED on enabled, LD only, go-character, account codes in long distance calls. If option is 300 baud, mandatory acct. codes required. set to on (yes), stations must an account code LED off disabled, recorded, (up to 12 digits) in order to make long distance calls. 1200 baud, no account By default this option set to off (no). used. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
700-l 2
ISSUE
MAY 1987
S. Alarm Signal (ENCORE CX 816 only)

If feature IS to be used, press button and dial 2 1 . If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: ALARM N O SIGNAL ONCE DETECT CLOSED
To program alarm features, use the program buttons as follows:
The system can recognize either an open or closed loop from an external source and transmit an alarm signal to all available (non-busy) telephones with a continuous or single tone. The type of alarm tone can be programmed. By default the alarm is not enabled. The signal can be either once or repeated. By default it is set at once. The loop sense can be either closed or open. By default it is set at closed.
These buttons toggle on and off. (refer to worksheet). enabled, once, closed loop LED on LED off alarm disabled, repeated, open loop. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
T. Dial Pulse Parameters*

If this feature is to be used, press FLASH button and dial 22. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: DIAL PULSE RATIO SPEED
*NOTE: When used in Canada, DOC regulations do not allow pulse signaling speed to exceed 11 pps (pulses per second) with a minimum of 33 msec. make internal and
54-66 msec. break interval. (tone) signaling. By default all lines are If outpulsing is required, the individual outside line must be programmed for pulse. See CO line programming section. The break/make ratio and the dial-speed can be with this program. By default the break/make ratio is set at but can be changed to
To program dial pulse features, use the program
buttons as follows:
By default the dialing speed is 10 pps but can be

changed to 20 pps.
700-l 3
These buttons toggle-on and off. LED on = 10 pps LED off = 20 pps Watch your display. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) U. Intercom Box Call Timer If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 25. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: Determines the amount of time programmed stations will ring when an Intercom box user presses the button.
BOS
Enter 2 digits on the numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) Setting System Time and Date (Enter FLASH 28) If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
DATE AND\ TIME
Default is 20 seconds and is variable from 00-60 seconds. A 00 entry causes programmed stations to ring until the call is returned. By default system time and date is set at 00. When entering the time and date, use the following data: year (YY) =OO-99 month (MM) 2 hour (HH) minute (MM) second (SS) =OO-60
am Enter time and date as follows: YYMMDDHHMMSS Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) W. Attendant Recall (Enter FLASH 33) If you have a this display:
ATTN REC.411 TIMER 01
Determines the length of the attendant will be recalled before automatic disconnect you see
Enter 2 digits on the numeric keypad. Press HOLD button.
Default is 0 1 minutes Range is 00 no automatic disconnect.
minutes.
700-l 4
X.
Monitor Mode (Group Listening)

If this feature is to be changed, press FLASH and dial 29. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following: YES-NO NO Toggle the top left button on or off to determine programming. LED on LED off = disabled Press HOLD button. YES means that the speakerphone can be used at the same time as the handset is being used. This allows for the group listening feature. NO means the monitor button is used to switch between handset and speakerphone. Default is no. This feature determines the use of the monitor button.
4. CO LINE PROGRAMMING If you are in the program mode, continue using the Program Codes. If you are starting to program at this point, enter the program mode first (Sec. 2.1).
If any CO Line features are to be changed, press FLASH button and dii 30. you have a display telephone, you will see this display: CO ATTRIBUTES SELECT A CO LINE RANGE Program button (SLCT will be lit. Enter a digit number for CO range being programmed. If only 1 line is being programmed, enter that number twiie (i.e 0101). Press HOLD button. The display will appear like this inditing current programming of that line of liis.
Each individual outside line can be programmed to be either DTMF (tone) or dial pulse. By default all are set for DTMF. When marked a 1 or dial-code may be entered after which toll restriction is applied. By default, all lines are CO. if a line is marked UNA, this activates night service answering of incoming calls on this line by stations not normally assigned access to the line(s). The must have a loop key assigned to do so. Default is yes. NOTE: For LOOP supervision and programming, see Section 701.
700-l 5
ISSUE
MAY 1987
ENCORE CX 816
PROCEDURES
To program CO Line features, use the program buttons as follows:
ENCORE CX 3672 only
Buttons l-3 toggle on and off. LED on CO, UNA LED off no UNA HOLD button should be pressed after all of these buttons are set correctly. (Display will now update) Program buttons 6-8 require numeric entries. Press that button and then enter numeric data on the pad. Press HOLD after each entry. When all entries have been made for each CO line or range of lines, press program button 12 and select a new line or range of lines. (NEXT FWD) will take you to the next Button higher CO line. Button 11 (NEXT BACK) will take you to the next lower CO line.
Flash is a programmable opening on a line for signaling. When using an outside line, Flash allows a user to obtain new dial tone without losing the line. This is particularly useful behind a PBX. Each individual CO line can be programmed for a Flash time. Default is 10 (1 seconds) and is variable from (1 msec. to 2 seconds). 8 line groups are available for CO line assignment. Groups should be assigned according to trunk type (local, FX, WATS, etc.). Line group 0 should be used for programming a line as a private line. All lines are placed in line group 1 by default. All lines are assigned Class of Service 1 by default. There are 5 possible classes of service which a line may be assigned: COS 1 restrictions COS 2=Table A governs; Sta. 2 and 4 monitored governs; Sta. COS 3 and 4 monitored 0, l , as first digit; COS 4 7 digit limitation COS Sta. For a particular call, the CO line COS is combined with the station COS to determine restriction for that cdl. TABLE 2. 1 OF SERVICE 4 5
co Lines cos 2 3
A
Tabbs A 5
6 canned 700-l 6
1.0:.
htercom
htercom
digit. 7
ENCORE
816 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
I IUN
UU
ISSUE
MAY 1987
5. STATION PROGRAMMING
you are in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If you are starting programming here, enter the program mode first. Refer to Section 2.1. If station features are to be changed, press FLASH
The features of Page A are described as follows:

PAGE
Stations can individually be allowed or denied the ability to make pages. Default allows paging access.
and dial 40,

If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: STATION ATTRIBUTES SELECT A STA RANGE Program button (SLCT STA will be lit. number for station range being Enter a programmed. If only 1 station, enter that number twice (i.e. 101101). Press HOLD button. The display will appear like this while programming Page A for that station or group of stations: Stations can be individually allowed or denied the ability to place their telephone in DO NOT DISTURB, Default allows DND. E l Stations can be individually allowed or denied the numbers. ability to use system speed Default allows system speed.
Stations can be allowed or denied the ability of queue for a busy group of lines. Default allows queuing.
To program Page A features, use the buttons as follows.
Stations can be given the ability to answer incoming outside line calls by simply going off-hook
(ringing line preference). Disallowed by default.
For Off-Hook Voice Announce (OHVA) refer to Section 701. These buttons toggle on and off. LED access, DND, system speed, queuing, ringing line preference, call forward, alarm receive. LED off restricted, no DND, no system speed, no queuing, no ringing line preference, no forward,
Stations can be allowed or denied the ability to have intercom and transferred outside lines forwarded to
a n o t h e r
Default allows
Forward.
Stations can be designated to receive signals through the telephone speaker. (816 only) Default gives no stations the feature.
700-l 7
0 I
ISSUE 1, MAY 1987
When the features of Page A have been selected, press HOLD. The display will now update to the new data. The display of current programming for those features will appear as follows: The remaining features of the station are located and programmed on Page B. UP Press PAGEB SELECT button. This will additional station features to be programmed. The display of current programming for those features will appear as follows:
XXX-XXX B COS SPO AAAA BBBB CCC DDDDDDDD
The features of page B are described as follows:

STA
ID
Each station must be identified as one of the following: 0 1 = DSS with MAP 1 (3672136112 only)
2 = DSS MAP 2 (3672136112 only) 3 = DLS MAP 3 72 on/y) 4 = intercom box
5 = SLT or OPX
72
(3672136112 6 = SLT 7 = DSS with MAP 4 (36172 only) MAP 5 (Feature Package V only) 8 = DSS
By default all are 0 (keyset).

NOTE: When identifying a station as an intercom
XXX range page B ID -station ID COS of service option A pickup group zone forward station C =CO line group access D To program Page B features, use the program
phone box (4) you must also enter the background music source to be used with that intercom box. 0 = none
1 2 first source
second source
buttons as follows:
E l Each station must be assigned a class of service governs that stations toll restriction. The 6 classes 1 by Table A by by Table A and B 1,l , as fit digit, 7 digits maximum Default gives For a with station stations 1. the CO line to determine combined that
These features all require a entry. Press program button and then enter the number via the dii Press HOLD after each numeric (Display will now update) NOTE: When identifying a station as a DSS number of the key telephone the DSS is associated with, not the extension number that the DSS using.
Each telephones speakerphone must be programmed. normal speakerphone 1 for outgoing but works for intercom headset Default assigns telephones to 0.
700-l8
Each station is assigned into pickup groups. Stations can be in any combination of the 4 groups or in no group at all. 0 = no group 1 1 3 4 By default all are in group 1.
Each station is assigned to internal paging zones. A station can be in any or all zones or in no zone at all. O-no zone (will receive no pages) 1 1 2 3 , Default assigns ail to zone 1. Internal Ail Call is defined as the sum of all zones. If a station is not in any internal zone, it will not receive any all call pages either.
A station can be programmed so that incoming to a preset ringing outside lines can be station if the first station does not answer after a programmable of time. Default assigns
A station is allowed access to any combination of outside line groups. Or a station may not be allowed any access to outside lines. The following are the line group numbers and their access codes: lines) Group 0 = no access (for Group 1 = code 9 Group 2 = code 81 Group 3 = code 82 Group code Group code 84 Group 6 code Group 7 code 86 Group 8 = code 87 (816 Group 8 = code 88 + line number* CO lines are accessed by the station user dialing the appropriate group access code number. the Dial tone will be received and they can desired telephone number. A station user can also program one of their flexible buttons with the code number and then can access that group of lines by simply pressing a button. When using a code to access an outside line, the fast line in the group will be the first one accessed and the first line will be the last one accessed. By default all stations will be allowed access to group 1. l Any station with access to line group 8 can use code to access lines in groups l-8.
no stations. NOTE: No more than 5 preset call forwards can be in sequence. For example:
101 preset to 102 102 to 103 103 preset to 104 104 preset to 105
To assign buttons are to be outside lines, press CO LINE button on page (Button 8) If you have a telephone, you will see this display:
CO LINE TO BUTTON PROG ENTER BUTTON DATA
No more
Refer to worksheet for button assignments. Each entry is 5 digits in length and is entered on the pad.
Press HOLD after each 5 digit entry.
UU
LX
PROCEDURES
ISSUE
MAY 1987
Button assignments are made in the following BBLLR button number = line assigned to that button l status 816 0 = no ring 1 =day ring ring and night ring NOTE: When programming a CO line at a 2500 set use 00 as the button number. To remove ring assignment enter By default the button assignment is square, which means that each button is assigned the corresponding line number (button 1 is line button 2 is line 2. etc.) The remaining buttons on an 816 station (4 or 16) are initialized as keys beginning with sta. 100 on button 9. To see what assignments were made previously, press DSP button on page B. Each depression of this button will display 4 button assignments (up to a maximum of 24 buttons).
6. EXCEPTION TABLES PROGRAMMING

If you are in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If you are starting programming here, enter the programming mode first. See Sec. 2.1. Press FLASH button and dial 50. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: EXCEPTION TABLES SELECT A TABLE
To program exception tables, use the program buttons as follows:
Press a button to program a table. You will see a

display such as this:
ALLOW TABLE A 02
If a button is not to be assigned as an outside line, the entry should be number. Any button not assigned as an outside line or as a loop button can be programmed by each station
user for one of several functions. Instructions for this programming are in the station users guide. l To program a button as a LOOP button, enter 00 for LL.
first 2 bin are displayed. Refer to worksheet and enter data via the pad; Digits O-9, button-dont l TRANS button special tables -End/Enter data HOLD button l onty entered into The entry format is: number XX number Press HOLD after each entry. (Display will now update) When all entries for one table are press the program button for the next table to be programmed and the procedure.
ISSUE
MAY 1987
The Allow Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site. Each allow table may contain up to 20 number strings and each deny table 10 number strings. Each number string can contain up to 8 entries including: any number O-9, , I dont care, stop and Search special table. The following rules should be remembered when Tables: setting up the 1. If the tables have no entries, no restriction is applied. 2. If entries are made in the allow table and only there, then only those numbers are allowed. 3. If entries are made in the deny table and only there, then only those numbers are denied. 4. If there are entries in both tables, the allow table is searched first and if number is found, it is allowed. If no found., the deny table is searched and if number is found, it is denied. If it is not found in either table, it is allowed.
l
7. SPECIAL TABLES PROGRAMMING

Press program button labeled Area Code If you have a display telephone, you will see this display.
The entries in the Allow Tables that tell the system to search the special tables should be the entries made. The home area code entry should be the very last entry made in the Allow Tables. The entries should be as follows: 1 XXXDDDS code) 1 (home area code)
TABLE 3. ALLOW/DENY RULES

Entries
Mow Deny Tables Tables Rule Rule 2 Yes
NO
Enter area code. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) Press associated SPEC program button (i.e. Area Code 1 goes with SPEC 1). To program home area code, go directly to SPEC 4 and enter office codes. office code followed by a which Enter means to allow this code. Press HOLD button to enter. (Display will now update) Continue entering office codes in this way until all have been entered for that area code. To erase an office code, enter that number followed by a 0 which means to deny this code. Press HOLD button. (Display will update with that number removed) To see what has been programmed into a particular table, press the DPS program button. The display will scroll through the bins which have been programmed. The following characters can be displayed within a code:
Condition 8 Result
Allow
E-end/enter D=dont care special table There are 4 special tables to expand the allow tables. The tables are composed of 800 3 digit office code bins. Three of these tables must be assigned an area code by which they are referenced. One table is reserved for the home area and requires no area code entry.
No
Found Not Found Denied Found Denied Not Found Allowed Found Found- Denied , Not Allowed
Rule 3 No
Yes
Rule 4 Yes
Yes
700-2 1
The command to search a special should be placed at the end of an entry in the Allow Table. The system will read the special table for the first 6 digits dialed (area code/office); if there are less than 6 digits, the same area code will be assumed. The tables are arranged by area code. If the area code of the allow table matches the special then the special table is checked for the code. If found, it is allowed; if not found, it is denied. Table 4 is the home area code. The other tables can have area codes assigned. NOTE: Table 4 can be used for allowing area codes and office codes (first 3 digits). 8. PRINT ROUTINES In order to obtain a hard copy printout of the entire database, a printer must be connected to the RS-232C connector. Press FLASH button and dial 70. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: PRINT SYSTEM DATA PRESS HOLD Press HOLD button. The display will read:
SYSTEM PARAMETERS PT CPT XFR 030 16 2 600 PTO COT HPR PRI 10 0 15 3 5 Y ENR ICM INT BGM N 1 N N 20 MON HST HSB N 10 010 ATTENDANT STATIONS 100 105 156 LOUD BELL ASSIGNMENTS 135 140 PBX CODES 81 82 ## ## EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY l-125 130 120 150 4-111 121 HUNT GROUPS 2 3 1 232 235 236 _ _ _ --1 2 4 ----125 PAIRINGS x SHR EHR 030 030
233 234 237 238 _ _ _ --- --126 ----- -------
--136 134 131 ---
The printer will print database programming such as the following example: Individual program areas can be printed by following program codes: FLASH 71 system FLASH 72 CO FLASH 73 station FLASH 74 exception FLASH 75 system speed numbers the
1 3 5 122 1 1 0 ---
137 121 --- --135 121 - - -----
SMDR Y Y
LD
29
BAUD ACCT 300 Y
DETECT REPT CLOSED
DIAL PULSE RATIO SPEED 6040 10
ENCORE CX 8 16 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
ISSUE
700 MAY 1987
CO LINE ATTRIBUTES CO 01 SIGNAL TYPE UNA YES DTMF CO SUPV FLTM GRP COS 1 24 20
01 05 09 13 17 21
02 06 10 14 18 22
03 07 11 15 19 23
04 08 12 16 20 24
Continues through the rest of the stations. CO 02 SIGNAL TYPE UNA PBX NO DP SUPV FLTM GRP COS 5 300 21 30 2 Continues through rest of CO lines. STATION ATTRIBUTES STA 100 PAGE DND SPD QUE YES YES YES YES YES OHVA FWD ALM SID COS SPK YES YES 0 1 0 YES PICKUP 1234 PAGE 1234 PREFWD 125 CO ACCESS 12345678 SLT RING 11 DAY 01028 02030 0305N 04060 08 07 06 05 11 12 10 09 15 16 14 13 19 20 17 18 24 23 22 21 NOTE: The letters at designate B both day N night O-none of EXCEPTION TABLES Allow Table A 01 1904DDDS 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Deny Table A 01 02 03 04 05 Allow Table 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Deny Table B 01 02 03 04 05 06 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
06 07 08 09 10
STA 101 PAGE DND SPD NO NO NO NO OHVA FWD SID COS SPK NO NO NO 1 2 1 PICKUP 1 34 PAGE 23 5 7 PREFWD 139 COS ACCESS 1 SLT RING 13 BOTH
700-23
SPECIAL TABLE 1 AREA CODE 305 ALLOWED OFFICE CODES: 200 201 202 203 204 205 207 208 209 210
206
PRINTING INDIVIDUAL EXCEPTION TABLES A. Press FLASH and 74.
SPECIAL TABLE 2 AREA CODE 904 SPECIAL TABLE 3 AREA CODE 813 SPECIAL TABLE 4 HOME AREA CODE (Only office codes that are allowed are printed and they are printed in numerical order.)
B.
Press HOLD button to print all tables.
PRINTING INDIVIDUAL CO LINES

A. Press FLASH and dial 72.
A. Press FLASH and dial B. Press program button for desired individual table. C. Dial bin number. D. Press HOLD button.
B. Program button 12 will be lit. C. Enter range of lines (i.e. to print first line, enter 0101; to print first 5 lines, enter 0105). D. Press HOLD button. Display will read:
Display will read:

PRINTING EX TABLES
PRINTING INDIVIDUAL STATION DATA A. Press FLASH and dial 73.
PRINTING SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS A. Press FLASH and dial 75.

PRINT SYSTEM SPEED NO
B. Program button 12 will be lit. C. Enter station range (i.e. to print station 100, enter 100100; to print stations 100-l 10, enter 100110). Press HOLD button. Display will read:
B. Press program button 12. C. Dial range. (for bin 20, enter 2020; for bins enter 2540, etc.) D. Press HOLD button. Display will read:
PRINTING SYS SPEED NO
700-24
ISSUE
MAY 1 9 8 7
9. PROGRAMMING SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS System speed dial numbers are entered at the first attendant station (in the 816 there is only 1 attendant station). There can be up to 80 speed dial numbers Of up 24 digits each including pauses, pulse to tone switchover and flash commands. The last 40,speed dial numbers are not monitored for toll restriction. To use any line in Group1 : A. Press SPEED button twice. Dial speed number location (20-99). Dial telephone numbers including pause, flash or pulse to tone switchover. D. Press SPEED button once. or To use a particular outlside line: A. Press SPEED button once. Press desired outside line. NOTE: To program a line group as part of a speed dial bin, the user must press a programmed flex key (9, 81, etc). groups cannot be entered as part of a speed dial bin from a keypad. The system will store all numbers entered from the keypad as digits to be dialed. C. Dial speed number location (20-99). D. Dial telephone number. E. Press SPEED button once. To use a particular group of outside lines: A. Press SPEED button once. B. Press desired outside line group or press a CO line that is a member of the desired group. C. Dial speed number location (20-99). D. Dial telephone number. E. Press SPEED button once.
To delete a speed number: A. Press SPEED button twice. Dial speed number location. C. Press SPEED button twice. To dial a speed number: A. Press SPEED button once. B. speed number location. To program a pause, press HOLD button once for each pause to be inserted. To program a pulse to tone switchover, press TRANSFER button. To program a flash, press the FLASH button. NOTE: The system will automatically pause after a PBX access code if the access code is died first and if it has been programmed into system memory. See page 700-l 0.
700-25
10. PROGRAM MODULE (PM-3) PROGRAMMING
A.
Automatic Timer If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 38. If you have a display phone, you will see this display:
Determines the amount of time elapsed before ringing reseizing the previously used back the redial the call. CO line, and
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) The timer is variable from 060 seconds. seconds. Default is
B.
Call Forward No Answer Timer If this feature is to be programmed, press FLASH and dial 42. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display: ,
The Call Forward No Answer timer is used when a station in the system specifies that no calls be forwarded to another station. This timer determines how long an incoming call ring before is considered a call. The call will then forward to the designated statlon for handling.
Enter a
number on the diai pad. The timer variable from 015 seconds. seconds. Default is
Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
CX 3672 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION 1. 2. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PROGRAM MODE ENTRY 2.1 PERMANENT UPDATE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2.2 ................................................ 2 2.3 ADDITIONAL 3672 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURE PACKAGE V FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOTE PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURE PACKAGE VI FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAGE
3. 4. 5. 6.
701-A
ISSUE
MAY 1987
C X 3672 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX 3672 Key Telephone System can be programmed to meet each customers individual needs. All programming is done at station 100 using a key telephone. This can be done with either a button or non-display telephone. Using a display phone, however, will make programming easier. This display will indicate what features are being programmed and the current programming of these features. When data is changed, this will be displayed so you can see what has been entered. Upon entering the program mode, the ENCORE CX key telephone at station 100 no longer operates as a telephone but as a programming instrument with all of the buttons redefined. The keys of the dial pad are used to enter the various data fields and to enter numerical information such as timers. The 12 buttons located at the top of the phone (Program Buttons) are used to program features such as class of service, line groups, station features, toll restriction tables, etc. (Figure 1) At the time the system is installed, upon entering the program mode, the system MUST be initialized to load default data into memory. See Table 1 (Section 700, pp. 2-3) for default data. If this preprogramming suits the customer, initialization is ail that is needed. Any time data is to be changed, the program mode must be entered and then the individual program code. Use program codes to determine current programming or to change a specific feature. During programming, other operate normally. operate under default or previously programmed values. After pressing the HOLD key to enter data, that data will be stored in the temporary buffer area. Data is not entered into system memory and has no effect on telephone operation until permanent update procedures are executed. This is done by pressing FLASH 80 and then HOLD. Then the data in the temporary buffer is copied into permanent memory. It is at this point that programming affects telephone operation. Until permanent update procedures
have been performed, the system will operate under default or previously programmed data. 2. PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES 2.1 PROGRAM MODE ENTRY
Programming is done at station 100 using preferably a or display telephone. Programming is always done at this station regardless of attendant assignment or class of service. It is recommended that station 100 be reserved exclusively for programming use. Do not assign station 100 to any station user, particularly not to an attendant. To enter the program mode, the programmer must first verify that the is properly connected to station 100. 1. Go off -hook or press MON button to ON. 2. Dii an asterisk ( l ). 3. Dial 7-7-8-4 (PROG). Confirmation tone is heard. l l Initialize here if necessary. 4. Press FLASH button. program code. 5. Dial 6. Enter data. 7. Press HOLD. (Confirmation tone) At this point data has not been entered into permanent memory. Proceed as follows to enter data permanently.
if a program code is used to determine programming

but nothing is changed (or changed but not entered into memory by pressing FLASH 80 and then HOLD), the previous data will remain intact upon leaving the field. Program codes do not have to be
used in any particular order.

When programming, tones are provided to help the programmer determine correct or incorrect entry of data. A solid tone indicates the data was accepted. An interrupted tone means an error was made. When this occurs, re-enter the data. Until new data is entered and accepted, the system will continue to
701-l
2.2 PERMANENT UPDATE PROCEDURES If you leave the programming mode for any reason before permanently updating your entries, all data entered will be lost. Therefore, before leaving the programming mode (pressing the MON button so the light extinguishes), do the following: 1. Press the FLASH button. on the dial pad. 2. Dial 3. Press HOLD button. All data entered is now stored in permanent memory and will affect system operation. 2.3 The system has been pre-programmed with certain features which are called default data. (Table sec. 700, pp. 2-3) These features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. The system should ALWAYS be initialized when installed or at any time the data base has been corrupted. To initialize the system to default values, proceed as follows.
ENCORE CX 3672 Use switches 1 and 8 on the CPB to originally initialize upon system power-up. Refer to Section 800. Use the procedures explained below to initialize only parts of the data base. 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. Press button. 3. Dial 60 to initialize system parameters.
4. Press HOLD button. 5. Repeat from step 2 for the other areas. In step 3 use the following program codes. 60 for system parameters 61 for CO lines 62 for station parameters 63 for exception tables. 64 for system speed numbers. NOTE: FLASH 80 Is required after initialization codes.
SECTION 70 ISSUE MAY
3. ADDITIONAL 3672 FEATURES A. Attendant Dedicated Intercom If this feature is programmed, press FLASH button and dial 26 on the dial pad. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
INTERCOM YES To make a change, press top left program
This directs the system to dedicate one intercom path for attendant use only.
button. It will toggle on and off with each depression. LED off =no LED on Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
Default has an intercom path dedicated to the attendant.
Music Channels If this feature is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 27 on the dial pad. If you have a display telephone, you will see this display:
MUSIC CHANNEL 1
In the ENCORE CX 3672, the system can be programmed to have 1 or 2 background music channels or no background music.
Enter 1 digit on numeric keypad (refer to worksheet). background music 1 1 channel channels Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
default the background music channel is number 1.
SECTION 70 1 ISSUE 1, MAY 1967
C. Attendant Override this feature is to be changed, press FLASH and dial 14. If you have a you will see the following:
ATTN OVERRIDE YES YES-NO
When this feature is set for YES, it allows the DND or override an attendant to override a OHVA set with the intercom switch set in the T or P position (for tone ringing or privacy). By default this feature is set at yes.
Toggle OFF the top left program button. LED off =no LED on Press HOLD button.. (Display will now update) D. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Access Code If the system is to be programmed for an access code can be entered into programming. To do this, press FLASH and dial 24. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
DISA ACCESS
allows an incoming line to gain access to all system resources. The access code provides security for the system. An APL card is required for operation. By default, no access code is assigned.
Enter number the access code. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
701-4 REVISED
ISSUE 1. MAY 1987
E.
(CO Assignment)
If this feature is to be enabled, press FLASH and dial 30. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
CO ATTRIBUTES SELECT A CO LINE RANGE
By default there are no outside lines assigned as lines. A line can be assigned as a line during night service only or on a 24 hour basis. Loop supervision should be programmed for assigned lines. NOTE: A maximum of 3 lines can be programmed on an ENCORE CX 3672.
Enter the line(s) that is to be line(s). Toggle ON program button 5.
Then enter 1 digit to indicate type of hour
desired.
*Used
remove CO line from
service
F. Loop Supervision
loop supervision is desired, press 30. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
CO LINE ATTRIBUTES SELECT A CO LINE RANGE
This feature is used primarily with and with unsupervised conferences. It provides the system with the ability to detect when loop current has been broken and an outside line is no longer being used.
Enter a 4digit line(s) to be programmed. (If only 1 line is being programmed,
enter that line number twice, i.e. for line enter 0101) Then toggle ON program button 4 marked Loop.
By default, there is no loop supervision on any s) . outside
on next page.
MAY 1987
F. Loop Supervision
Next enter a one-digit timer value between 1 and 9 (100-900 milliseconds). Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
To determine the timer value, consult your local serving central office for type and duration of loop supervision signal.
G.
Off-Hook Voice Announce

If this feature is desired, press and dial 40. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
This feature allows a caller to receive a voice announcement while busy, without Interrupting the existing outside call. By default no stations have the ability to receive OHVA. NOTE: receiving station must be wired for OHVA. Bee 601.
I
STATION ATTRIBUTES SELECT A STA RANGE
Enter a number for station(s) being programmed. (If only 1 station is being programmed, enter that number twice.) Toggle OFF program button 6 to deny this feature to a station.

H. Button Assignments
Select Page B of station attributes. Select CO line button 8. See page 700-l 9 for programming instructions.
By default, buttons 1 are assigned CO lines l-11. Button 12 is assigned as a loop key and buttons are unassigned.
ISSUE 1. MAY 1987 UNA Assignment To Loud Bell Control One (IN MAIN CABINET) If loud bell control is to be used for night ring:
1. Assign CO lines to UNA. (Flash 30, button 3)
2.
Press FLASH and dial 1 3 .
If you have a display telephone you will see the following:
Toggle on the top left program button LED Off = No LED On = Yes Press HOLD button. NOTE: The system must be in the night mode to operate.
J. Hook Switch Timer If this feature is to be programmed, press FLASH and dial 31. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
This timer determines how long the user should depress the hook switch in order for it to be considered a Flash. The timer is variable from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds. The entry should be a 2digit number between 05 and 20. Default is 1 second.
Enter a 2digit number on the dial pad. Press the HOLD button. I Hook Switch Bounce If this feature is to be programmed; press and dial 32. you have a display telephone, you see the following: This timer determines the length of time that is needed to determine a valid on-hook or off-hook. The timer is variable from 000-l 00 msec. Default is 010 msec. NOTE: The range between these timers considered a A longer than one second a disconnect. A shorter than ten is a has
number on the dial pad. Enter a Press the HOLD button.
FEATURE PACKAGE V FEATURES

A. Programming CO Lines to Ring Directly
Into a UCD Group

To program a CO line to ring directly into a UCD group, press FLASH and dial 30. if you have a display telephone you will see the following:
CO lines can be programmed to ring directly into a UCD group.
Press flexible button 9. Enter the UCD group number that this CO line should ring into. Press HOLD.
B. Uniform Call
(UCD)
If these timers are to be programmed, press and dial 37. If you have a display telephone, you will see the foilowing: UCD TIMERS RING XXX BGM XXX To program: ring timer timer ovrtimer
If all stations in a UCD group are unavailable, the ring timer determines the length of time an initially ringing CO ring before it is answered by the system and receives the first recorded message. The timer (bgm) determines the duration of music-on-hold between recorded messages. messages and music and repeat the call is abandoned or answered. The timer determines the length of messages and music-on time a caller before to a designated station. only happens the call gets into queue. The range for the and background seconds. The range for music timers the timer is seconds. Default for ail three timers.
XXX
flex
Enter the range for the timer. This is a three-digit number entered on the keypad.
HOLD.
Uniform Call Distribution If this feature is to be programmed, press FLASH and dial 36. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
Uniformly distributes incoming calls among stations in a designated group. Eight groups of stations can be programmed. Each group can contain eight stations.
000
= UCD group O-7 alternate group 270-277 = overflow station number = station numbers within a group
NOTE: The station cannot be a member of the UCD group.
The flexible buttons are assigned as follows:

270-277 0 0 0
ANN
Press flexible button (270-277) to determine which group is to be programmed. You are now ready to enter the specific information for the group you selected. Next press button 9 or 10 or 1 1 or 1 2 . Enter the data for the specific Press the HOLD button. To delete all information for a Press that groups button (l-8). Dial on the keypad. group: group.
= UCD groups 270-277 Alternate UCD Group ( 2 7 0 - 2 7 7 ) = station number 1) Station numbers within a group up to eight 3dlgit numbers) Announcement table index or or 1 or 2) is not displayed on the LCD because there is no room. It is displayed by the print system command.)
NOTE: The announcement table index defines which recorded announcement device will be heard by that UCD group and in which order. The first device 1) is used to answer incoming CO calls. The second device 2) Is used to answer transferred and holding CO calls.
To delete one area within a group: Press the groups flex button (l-8). Press the flex button for the area to be deleted (9-l 1). on the keypad.
Announcement Table Press FLASH and dial 39. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following:
Recorded announcement(s) may be provided in UCD groups to incoming callers.
Table 1 represents the first recorded announcement device.

1.
Enter 1 to specify table
1. A maximum of two recorded announcement groups. devices may be assigned to the 2. The announcement device must be connected to either a CO line port or a SLT port. 3. Specifies the port number (CO) or extension the device is hooked up to. number 4. The value entered depends on the duration of the actual message you record on the announcement device. Some devices have automatic disconnect at the end of the message; in this situation the value you enter must be greater than or equal to the actual length of the message. *Note: The entire dailing sequence (l-4) must be completed before depressing HOLD.
2. TYPE Enter 1 or 2: 1 CO line port 2 = SLT port 3. Enter the CO port number (2 digits) or SLT extension number (3 digits). 4. TIME Enter message duration
seconds).
Press HOLD*. Display will now update. Enter 2 if you wish to add a second announcement device. Repeat the above instructions. To delete entries currently programmed in a and HOLD. table, press 1 (or Flex button 12 used to toggle back and forth between Tables 1 and 2 to display the values currently programmed, If any.
701-10
Automatic Timer If this timer is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 38. If you have a display phone, you will see this display:
Determines the amount of time elapsed before ringing back the redial initiator, reseizing the previously used CO line, and redialing the
Enter 3 digits on the numeric keypad. Press HOLD button. (Display will now update)
Default is seconds. The timer is variable from seconds.
F. Day/Night COS
Press and dial 40.
stations to have a different COS at night than during the day.
Enter a number for station range being programmed. If only one station, enter that number twice (i.e. 101101). Press PAGE B SELECT button. This will bring up additional station features to be programmed, Including class of service (COS). The display of current programming for these features will appear as follows:
Each station must be assigned a of service which governs that stations toll restriction.
BBBB CCC DDDDDDDD COS

button 2 1 2
unrestricted
3 4 maximum
6 intercom
Dial the 2digit COS entry as follows: 1 st digit is day COS

digit is night COS
Depress HOLD. Display
now update.
Default gives all stations COS 1 in day mode and COS 1 in night mode.
701-l 1
G. Automatic Hold If this feature is to be changed, press FLASH button and dial 4 1 . If you have a display phone, you will see this display:
Determines whether or not the Automatic Hold feature is allowed. If enabled, a station user can automatically put one CO call on hold by selecting a second CO line.
AUTO HOLD NO
YES/NO
The data is entered by pressing the top left button in the flexible field. The button toggles on and off. LED ON = YES LED OFF = NO Press HOLD button. (Display will now update) Default is no: Automatic Hold disabled.
H. Call Forward No Answer Timer If this feature is to be programmed, press FLASH and dial 42. If you have a display telephone, you will see the foilowing:
The Call Forward No Answer timer is used when a station in the system specifies that answer calls be forwarded to another station. This timer determines how long an incoming call will ring answer call. The before it is considered a call will then forward to the designated station for handling.
FWD NO ANS 000400 015
Enter a
number on the
pad. now update) The timer la variable from Default Is 015 seconds.
seconds.
Press the HOLD button.
Voice Mail Press FLASH and dial 43. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following display:
A voice mail system must be provided in order for this feature to be available. Voice mail automatically handles unanswered calls. Station users can then retrieve messages left for them. Up to eight voice mail groups can be configured in the system. Each group can contain up to eight voice mail stations.
= voice mail group (O-7) alternate group (240-247) = put mail index into voice P mail dialing tabie for leaving message = get mail index into voice mail dialing table for retreiving message voice mail station numbers (up to max.) l See note The flexible buttons are assigned as follows: P G VM groups 240-247 = alternate group (240-247) Put mail dialing index (O-7) digits mail dialing index (O-7) station numbers within a group (up to eight numbers) be an SLT.
to determine 1. Press flexible button l-8 which VM group is to be programmed. You are now ready to enter the specific for the group you selected. 3. Enter the data for the 4. Press the HOLD button. for a To delete Press that flex button (l-8). on the keypad. group.
*Note: Entries in the Put and Get of the Voice Mail Group table are required to allow calls to be routed to station extensions assigned In the group. See 44 for programming indexes.
group:
To delete one area within a group: Press the groups button (l-8). Press the flex button for the area to be deleted Dial on the keypad.
J.
Voice Mail Dialing Table Press FLASH and dial 44. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following display:
Determines how the system gets messages (allows for stations to pick up mail) and messages (allows stations to leave messages in voice mail).
Dial O-7 for the y (the number entry of the voice mail entry you want to program). Dial one of the following, if required: 0 if a prefix is required 1 if a suffix is required HOLD to delete an entry Enter any digits that are required: O-9, l , TRANS (pause). Press HOLD. Flex button 12 can be used to display the entries in the voice mail table. Each depression of the button will advance the user, one entry at a time, through the table.
Build a table for example) for any additional digits needed to leave a message for a station
Build another table for example) for any additional digits needed to retrieve a message
These digits make the ENCORE CX system comdifferent mail systems, allowing patible them to communicate.
K. Least Cost Routing (LCR) Priority 1. ROUTE LIST TABLE Press FLASH and dial 5 1 . Press program button 4. If you have a display tdephone, you will see the following display:
Allows route entry priorities to be assigned on a per station basis. This allows or disallows specific stations the ability to access certain trunk groups through LCR.
RR T G DD L
Route Number (W-15) Time Period Route List (14) CO Line Group (l-7) = Insert/Delete Table (W-19) = number (l-7) 1 is highest 7 is lowest priority
To enter additional CO line groups in the same for the same route number, time G DD L HOLD. To enter data for a different list within a route, press program button 4 and enter all data (RR T G DD Repeat the above to program a new Route Number (00-l 5). A station is able to use a trunk group the number is equal to or greater stations number. than the trunk groups
Press HOLD button. Display will now update. 2. STATION PROGRAMMING Press and dial 40.
Enter a 6digit number for station range being programmed. If only one station, enter that number twice (i.e. 101101). Press HOLD button. If you have a display telephone, you following: XXX-XXX A PAGE DND SPD QUE PLA LCR Press program Enter LCR 1 highest 7 lowest 9. (l-7) see the
Press HOLD button. Display
now update.
L.
Map5 Refer to Sec. 700, paragraph 5 (Station Programming). Each station must be identified as one of the fdlowing:
0
A fifth DSS map has been added to programming to provide buttons for CO lines l-24 and 24 buttons.
DSS with MAP 1 2 DSS with MAP 2 3 MAP3 4 intercom box SLT or OPX 5 6 = SLT with m/w 7 DSS with MAP 4 8 MAP5
1
Only MAP 5 can be associated with a station.
5. REMOTE PROGRAMMING
Complete programming can be done remotely from a terminal. This allows changes to the system data base for feature allocation and configuration. Changes can be made, via the terminal, while the system is being used. The terminal is a data device connected to port on system CPU PCB. the Certain buttons on the terminal compare to the buttons on the telephone keypad that are normally used to program the system
5.1
ENTERING THE PROGRAMMING MODE Press Enter key on the terminal. Enter the password when prompted: The terminal will prompt ADM. Proceed to program as you normally would from a on-site. After completing programming, enter press the ENTER key.
a. b.
e.
and ther
NOTE: Data is displayed after the program code is entered or after the return key is pressed. Pressing the buttons on the terminal that correspond to the flex buttons is the same as For pressing the flex buttons on station example, a feature is then pressing the terminal key and enter that feature. In place of button toggling to enable/disable a feature, press the key on the data terminal to disable a feature. Use the key on the data terminal to enable a feature. After pressing the + or key on the terminal, press the appropriate key that corresponds to the equivalent flex button. This operation can be used when the current status of a feature is unknown; if a computer is used to load the system data base into the system, the current status of the feature will be unknown and use of the + and option in required.
6.
A.
FEATURE PACKAGE VI FEATURES

Data Base Update (Flash 80) The routine previously necessary to invoke changes of the customer data base (Flash 80) into permanent memory is no longer required. All changes made in the administration programming procedures for the customer data base are invoked when the HOLD button is pressed.
B.
Station
Programming (Flash 40) If the Station Type has been assigned as 4 or 5, Button 8 of Page A controls the SLT Add-On Conference feature. The restriction of this feature can be used for SLT ports assigned for Automated Attendant interface. Some Automated Attendants fail to properly detect when a station user has answered a supervised transfer attempt, thus causing an unexpected Add-On Conference if the Automated Attendant attempts to recover the call to be transferred. The programming routine continues to provide OHVA selection for when Station Type is used. By default all station are allowed the SLT On Conference feature.
Two changes have been made in the Station Attributes Programming routine. Disable SLT Add-On Conference If programming for this new feature is desired, press FLASH and dial 40. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following: STATION ATTRIBUTES SELECT A STA RANGE
Enter a number for a station(s) being programmed. (If only 1 station is being programmed, enter that number twice.) Toggle ON program button 6 to deny the SLT Add-On Conference feature. Press HOLD button. (Display 2. CO now update)
the entry for button assignments from to 4 digits. Now the button assignments are made in the following format:
CO ringing for button assignment is no selected using page button 8. See the new feature CO Line Ringing Assignment defined below.
701-18
BBLL
BB flexible button number (01-24) LL line assigned to that button (01-36) If a button is not to be assigned as an outside
Note: Programming of CO line at a 2500 type set is

no longer required using this routine. See the new feature CO line Ringing Assignment
defined below.
line, the entry should be number.
BB
To program a button for use as a LOOP button, enter BBOO.
C.
CO Llne Ringing Each CO line in the system may be assigned initial incoming ringing to one of the following destinations: one or more stations or to a UCD, Voice Mail or Hunt Group Off-Net (System Speed) 1. Entering the programming mode. 2. Press FLASH and dial 30. 3. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following: CO LINE ATTRIBUTES SELECT A CO LINE RANGE From the dial pad, enter the range to be programmed will show: CO XX-XX A DT CO UNA FL20 Press the PAGE B button (Button 9) to toggle to the PAGE B diiay. The diiay will show the information: CO XX-XX B RING I BUT-TON 1 2 Cont ATTRIBUTE CO Ringing Assignments Display CO Ringing Assignments Incoming calls directed Off-Net will be connected to an outgoing system speed bin. Stations that are assigned for initial ring-in can use a LOOP button(s) to answer the call(s). CO lines assigned to ring multiple stations will not follow any stations forward to a UCD, Voice Mail, Hunt Group or Off-Net. Forwarding to another station will be allowed. Multiple station assignments are allowed for a particular CO line in a mixture of Day, Night, or Day Night ring types. An incoming CO line may be programmed to any number of stations but it cannot be programmed to a mixture of stations and groups (ie. a Hunt Group and 4 stations, or more than one Hunt Group).
I CO line The display
701-19
Press Button 1 to program ring assignments. The following information will be shown:
Valid 3 020-099 100-211 240-247 260-267 270-277
destinations are: Svstem Bins 20-99 Voice Mail Groups l-8 Hunt Groups l-8 UCD Groups l-8
Enter the three digit destination (DDD) and the single digit ring type (R) followed by the HOLD button. Press Button 2 to display assignments. Assignments will be displayed in sets of 8 up to the number programmed. Press button 2 additional times to cycle to the next group of 8 assignments. The following LCD format will be used to display the assignments. DDDR DDDR DDDR DDDR DDDR DDDR DDDR DDDR DDD Destination D for Day, N for Night or B for Both Day & Night.
are: Valid 0 Unassigned 1 Day Ringing 2 Night Ringing 3 Day Night Ringing Multiple station assignments are accomplished by assigning another destination with status, DDDR, and pressing the HOLD button. This can be done for up to the maximum number of stations on the system.
Tone 1. Enter the programming mode. 2. Press FLASH and dial 45. 3. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following display: KEY ANNOUNCE TONES 3 4. Dial the desired number:
5. Press HOLD.
701-20
E.
Least Cost Routing Toll
Calls
1. Enter the programming mode. 2. Press FLASH and dial 51. 3. Press button 8 of the programming buttons. 4. If you have a display telephone, you will see the following display:
5. the desired route number. 6. Press HOLD.
F.
UCD New Call

1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the programming mode. Press FLASH and dial 37. Press button 4 of the programming buttons. Enter on the dial pad (000-999 sec.) Press HOLD.
701-21
ADDENDUM 1, FEBRUARY

TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION 1. 2. LCR 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCESSOR BOARD (2994402) AND (2996301). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEATURES & CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROUTE LIST TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME OF DAY ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSERT/ DELETE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXCEPTION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE (OFFICE CODES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETING ....................................
1
2 2 2 3 3
4
LCR PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 EXCEPTION CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TIME TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 DAILY 12.3 WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......................................... 12.4 12.5 INSERT/DELETE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 ............................................. 12.7 ENABLE ....................................................
4
4
5 5 5 5 6 6 6
13.
701 A-A
ADDENDUM 1, FEBRUARY 1988
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTD) DESCRIPTION 14. 15. 16. PAGE
PROGRAMMING STATION LCR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 PRINTING LCR TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER EPB ENHANCEMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) BAUD RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMABLE PAGE WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAMMING DATE AND TIME FROM STATION 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE RING CADENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSWERING AT SLT STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CANCELLING CALL FORWARD OR DND FROM AN SLT. . . . . . . . , , .
......... 7
7 7 7 7 7 7
LIST OF FIGURES
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. 9. 10. ROUTE LIST TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CO LINEGROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 DAILY START TIME TABLE. WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE EXCEPTION TABLE INSERT/DELETE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................... OFFICE CODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LCR OPERATION FLOWCHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRINTING ...........................................

1. INTRODUCTION
The ENCORE CX Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature is a cost-saving enhancement which selects the most economical programmed route for an outgoing call. When a station user dials an outside number, the LCR feature analyzes the number and then automatically chooses an outside line from the group that has been programmed as least costly. The LCR feature puts the responsibility of choosing the least expensive route for each area and exchange code on the system, not on the station user. Route List Table 2. Daily Start Time Table 3. Weekly Schedule Table 4. Insert/Delete Table 5. Exception Table 6. 3-Digit Table 7. Office Code Table.
4. ROUTE LIST TABLE

Up to 16 different routes (00-l 5) can be programmed. Each route can contain up to 4 route lists one for each of the 4 time periods. Up to 7 CO line groups (routing choices) and their corresponding Insert/Delete Tables may be programmed within each route list. The Route List Table should be programmed in sequence so that the first CO line group entry is the least costly (and first selected) and the last CO line group is the most costly (and last selected). (See Figures &
2. ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (2994402) AND LCR (2996301)

In order to have access to the LCR feature, the ENCORE CX 3672 KSU must be equipped with an EPB (Enhanced Processor Board) card (2994402) that has 3672 LCR software (2996301) installed. The EPB card replaces the Central Processor Board (CPB) in the KSU, and is inserted in the same card slot. The EPB is shipped without software. The software enabling 3672 LCR is a PROM chip set that is installed on the EPB.
5. TIME OF DAY ROUTING

The least costly route for a particular dialed number may be different at different times of the day and on different days of the week. To accommodate this situation, there are 2 tables (Daily Start Time Table Weekly Schedule Table). These tables work together to: A. Divide each day into 1-4 time periods, and B. the list number to be used for all routes based on the time of day and day of week. By default, the Daily Start Time Table is set at the standard divisions of 8 AM, 5 PM and 11 PM. In addition, the route lists specified by the Weekly Schedule Table are consistent with the Interstate DDD discount structures for those time perii. However, both tables can be changed depending upon customer requirements. (See Figures 3 4)
3. FEATURES & CHARACTERISTICS

In order to make the routing decision, the ENCORE CX LCR feature uses a data base. The data base is programmed by field personnel at the time of installation. The successful operation of the LCR feature is completely dependent upon the accuracy of the programming. 7 different tables are set up to monitor the dialing of digits and to select the best route for the call depending on time of day. The tables are:
701 A-l
ISSUE 1 , MAY 1987 ADDENDUM FEBRUARY 1988
--.
6. INSERT/DELETE TABLES There are 20 Insert/Delete Tables (00-l 9). Up to twenty digits, including pauses, can be inserted and up to sixteen digits deleted. Digits can be inserted before or after the number dialed, but can be deleted only from the beginning of a number dialed. For instance, if a user dials a long distance call that should be placed on a home area code foreign exchange line, the digit dialed by the user must be deleted before the call is placed on that FX line. An Insert/Delete Table can be programmed to do this. Digits can also be added to a number that has been dialed by the user. access codes, for instance, can be automatically inserted by the system. Figures to
7. EXCEPTION TABLE This table is used to route operator assisted calls and any other calls which would use a or 2-digit number rather than a area code. There are 20 available entries in this table. Each entry contains both the exception code (1 or 2 digits) and the two-digit route number (00-l 5) to be used for that code. Figure 5) There are no default data entries in the Exception Table. CAUTION: The Dialing Privileges tables are not checked for any calls routed via the Exception Table.
8. TABLE This table is divided into 2 sections: Leading is dialed before the number) and Leading (no is dialed before the number). This gives the system the ability to handle call routing in areas that require a before a long distance number, as well as in areas that do not require the
This table provides routing based on the first three digits of the number dialed including: area codes: service codes such as 911,411, etc.; office codes for the home NPA and direct International dial access (IDDD). It should also include, for each digit code, the route to be used, the number of digits likely to be dialed and if the Table is to be checked. This table can include 1000 entries from (Bee Figure CAUTION: All local office codes must be included in this table or local calls cannot be completed through LCR. The number of digits likely to be dialed controls routing of calls as follows: A. Fewer than the programmed number of digits dialed: The system pauses 5 seconds after the last digit is dialed before routing. B. Exactly the programmed number of digits dialed: The system routes the call as soon as it sees the last digit it is programmed to expect. C. More than the programmed number of digits dialed: routes the call as soon as it sees the last digit it is programmed to expect, and ignores all digits in excess of the programmed number. NOTE: A minimum of 3 digits is required for route selection by the Table. Once the system has routed the call and sent all digits, the keypad is live and additional digits can be dialed if required. A default has been established for area codes, and for both the Leading and Non Leading sections of the Table for service codes and office codes associated with the home NPA Please refer to the default data base for detailed information. Exhibit I for the Default Data Base.
701 A-2
ADDENDUM
FEBRUARY 1988
I,
9.
TABLE (Office Codes)
The Table must be referenced by an area code in the Table. It is usd to determine the route for individual office codes when preceded by that specific area code. The 6-Digit Table can include 20 office code maps. Each map can route up to 800 office codes to one of the 15 possible route lists. Each map must be associated with a specific area code in the Table. Several different office code maps can be used with the same area code to provide additional routing flexibility. There are no default entries in any of the 20 different office code maps. (Sea Figure 8) If the office code dialed is not found in the 6-Digit Code Table, the call is then routed according to the route programmed in the Table.
10. OPERATION
To access the LCR feature: a. Lift the handset. b. Dial 9. Hear dial tone. c. Dial if required. d. Dial area code, if required. The system first checks to see if the number dialed is more than 2 digits. If it is 2 digits or less, the call is processed according to instructions in the Exception Table. If the number is not found in the Exception Table, the call is denied. If the number is more than 2 digits it then goes to the 3-Digit Table where the first 3 digits are checked, whether office cods or area to see if those digits are found there. If not found, the call is denied. If the digits are found in the Table, the system then checks this table to see if the Table must be referenced. If the 6digit column is marked yes, the system checks to see if the office code of the number dialed is found in this table.
Table, If the office code is found in the the number is then checked against Dialing Privileges. When LCR is enabled, Dialing Privileges are determined only by station Class of Service. line Class of Service is no longer applicable. All CC lines are considered Class of Service 1. If the call is not allowed through Dialing Privileges, the call is denied. If it is allowed, the call goes to the Route List Table to be sent by the route indicated in the Table. After a call is sent to the Route List Table, it can no longer be denied: a station cannot be programmed to dial on some CC line groups in a route but not on other groups in the same route. If the office code is not found in the Table, the call is referred back to the Table. The call is checked against Dialing Privileges. If the number is denied there, the call is denied. If it is allowed, the call then goes back to the Route List Table to be sent by the route indicated in the Table. If a line is not available in the first CC line group in a list, the system advances to the next choice in the list and searches for a free line. The process continues until an available line is found or the last available line group is searched. If no lines are available in any of the CC line groups programmed for that list in the route, the call can be queued on to the first choice (least costly) line group. If the user waits 3 seconds after dialing the number, he/she will hear confirmation tone, which indicates that he/she is queued on to the first choice line group. The user must hang up after hearing confirmation tone to be placed in queue. Queuing is on a FIFO (First In/First Out) basis. There is no Queue Priority. The queue can be canceled by dialing the digit 4. The queue will be canceled automatically after the system tries three times unsuccessfully to call back a busy The queue will also cancel automatically after queue callback is unanswered for fifteen (15) seconds. To answer a queue callback, press the line or pool key flashing at the queue callback rate (480 ipm flutter). call will be dialed automatically.
701 A-3
ADDENDUM 1 , FEBRUARY 1988
10.1 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS Restrictions in a system with LCR apply only when a station attempts to access a line in a group through a direct key appearance of that line or by dialing the Trunk Group Access Code. A station is not restricted from access to a line group if that group is part of a route which is accessed by the station via the LCR feature access code (dial This is true regardless of whether or not LCR access is forced in the system. See Figure 9 for an LCR operation flow chart.
You will see the following display if you have a display telephone:
LCR TABLES SELECT A TABLE
There are 7 tables which can be programmed for LCR. Use the program buttons as follows to program these tables:
11. COMPLETING WORKSHEETS

It is extremely important that the worksheets be completed before programming the LCR tables. It is suggested that the worksheets be completed in the following order. First fill out the CO line group table, then the Exception Table (as this is the first table the system will check when a number is dialed). Then determine time of day routing by completing both the Daily Start Time Table and the Weekly Table. These times are used in the Route Table. Next determine time and CO line group priority for the various routes to be used. Then complete the Insert/Delete Table and, using this table, complete the last column in the Route List Table. When the Route List Table has bean completed, then fill out the Table. Area codes can broken into specific office codes by using the Digit Table. Refer to Figure for a flow chart on the operation of LCR.
Press the button for the table being programmed. NOTE: The only w a y to data in the LCR Tables is to do-a of the Table(s) in question. See Figure 10 for details on how to obtain printouts. 12.1 EXCEPTION CODE TABLE (Program Button 3) If you have a display phone, you will see the following display:
EXCEPTION CODE TABLE ENTER S XX RR HOLD
12. LCR PROGRAMMING

If you are in the program mode, continua using the Program Codes. If you are starting to program at this point, enter the program first (Sac. 700, 2.1). To initialize all LCR Tables to default data, FLASH To program the for least routing, FLASH 51. NOTE: We suggest that LCR disabled during programming. LCR programming does require FLASH 80 for update.
to add to table exception codes (for single as 2nd digit) RR route number, 00-l 5 HOLD must be pressed after each entry. The display will now update. Press program button 3 again for further entries. Up to 20 Exception may be programmed in this table. XX
ENCORE CX 818 SYSTEM CHECKOUT PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE , 1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. OPERATIONAL TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
DESCRIPTION
LIST OF FIGURES 1. ENCORE CX KEY TELEPHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
800-A
ENCORE CX 8 16 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM

1. INTRODUCTION
This section describes the procedures that should be followed during system start-up and is intended to be used by a technician trained in the installation and maintenance of the ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System. The installer will also find these tests to be helpful in the event of system malfunction and troubleshooting. A. Ensure that the KSU is properly grounded. B. Inspect the MDF for shorted wiring or improper polarity. C. Make sure the plug-ended MDF cables connected to the KSU are plugged into the correct position. D. Make sure the Program Module is firmly seated in its socket. (816 only) E. Check music source connections and alarm connections if provided. F. Plug the AC power cord into the dedicated 1 17 VAC outlet.
2. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
Before starting the functional test procedures, it is recommended that the following checklist be completed:
FIGURE 1. ENCORE CX
KEY TELEPHONE
800-l
3. OPERATIONAL TESTS OPERATIONAL TEST

1. Depress MON button. 1.1 1.2 1.3 2. Intercom Call (Handsfree Dial desired station. 2.3 2.1 2.2
RESULT
MON button lights steady. ICM dial tone heard. No reaction. MON button lights steady. 3 tones heard at called and calling station. 1 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2
FUNCTION
Normal Normal Check station wiring, modular cord. Normal Normal Normal
2.4
Handsfree communication 2.3 possible if station is in HF mode. Handsfree communication 2.4 not possible if station is in PV or TN mode.
Check station
programming for set option and that the station is in HF mode.
3. ICM Call (Tone ringing) Dial desired station.
3.1
3.2
tone heard by
calling station. Ringing heard at called
3.1
3.2 Normal 3.3 Normal 3.4 Normal
station. 3.3 3.4

4. ICM Call (Privacy mode)
HOLD button flashes at called station. Calling station must lift handset to converse.
3 tones heard at called station.
4.1
4.2 4.3
4.1
4.2 Normal 4.3
desired station. Station can hear voice announcement. Called station cannot
talk back.
800-2
3. OPERATIONAL TESTS OPERATIONAL TEST

5. Outgoing CO calls. Press CO line button.
RESULT 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4

CO line LED lit steady. Dial tone heard. No LED indication. No dial tone. CO ringing heard. CO line LED flashing at 30 IPM. No ringing heard. No LED flashing. CO line LED lit steady. 5.1
FUNCTION
Normal Norma) Check station programming Check CO connections.
5.2 5.3
5.4
6. incoming Calls.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
6.1 6.2
Normal
Normal
6.3 Check programming.
6.4
7.1
Check CO line connections. Normal
7. Press flashing CO line button. 8. Conference. (Multi-line) Make CO line call. Press CONF button. Make another CO call. Press CONF
7.1
8.1 8.2 8.3
Both parties hear Conf.

tone.
8.1 8 . 2
Normal
tine goes on hold. CONF LED flashes.
8.3 Normal
button twice. Conference initiator Presses CONF button and hangs up. Conference initiator lifts handset and presses CONF button. 8.4 8.5 8.0 Two outside lines remain
l
8 . 4 8.5 Normal 8 . 0 8.7 Normal
CONF LED lit steady. Conf. tone heard.
8.7 Initiator re-enters conference. 9. Internal Conference. Make an intercom call. Press CONF button. Make another intercom call. Press CONF twice.
9.1 9.2
Party goes on Hold. 3 parties are connected.
9.1 9.2 Normal
Unsupervised conference is an option on the 3672 only: not available on 816. 800-3
3. OPERATIONAL TESTS (CONTD)

OPERATIONAL TEST 10. Add On Conference. Make a CO call. Press CONF button. Make an intercom call. Press CONF button twice. 11. Background Music. With station idle, dial code 73. RESULT FUNCTION
10.1 2 10.3
CO line goes on hold. Station signals according to intercom switch. All 3 parties are connected.
10.1 Normal 10.2 Normal 10.3 Normal 11.1 Normal 11.2 Normal
11.1 MON button flashes momentarily. 11.2 Music is heard through speaker (if programmed and music source is connected).
l
11.3
No music is heard.
11.3 Check speaker volume on phone. Check music source connections. 11.4 Normal 12.1 Normal
Dii 73 again. 12. Ring Volume. With station in TN mode, have another station intercom call your instrument. 12.1 12.2
Music is OFF. Ring tone is heard. No ring is heard or ringing is too loud.
12.1 Use
adjustment switch on front of
instrument to adjust to desired level. Check station connections. 13.1 ICM tone is heard. 13.1 Normal 13.2 Adjust volume level with speaker volume slide switch. 14.1 Normal 14.2 Verify that station is allowed DND in programming.
14.3 Normal
13. Speaker Volume. Press MON button.
13.2 Dial tone is not head or is too loud. 14. DND (Do Not Disturb) Press DND button while on-hook. 14.1
14.2
DND LED lit steady.

LED does not light.
Press DND button again.

l
14.3 DND light goes out.
A second music source is an option on the 3672 only: not available on 616.
800-4
3. OPERATIONAL TESTS (CONTD)

OPERATIONAL TEST Call Transfer. Make a CO call. Press TRANS button. Receive ICM dial tone. Dial desired station. Announce transfer or simply hang up. 15.2 Called station signals according to signal switch. 15.3 Called station receives transferred ring and CO line flashes at 60 IPM. 15.2 Normal 15.3 Normal RESULT FUNCTION
15.1
CO line goes on Hold.
15.1 Normal
800-5
ISSUE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 1. INTRODUCTION 2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. POWER UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OF FIGURES
1. STATION WITH DSS CONSOLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. .......................................................... 3. CENTRAL PROCESSING BOARD (CPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 2 2
1. POWER SUPPLY TESTS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
801 -A

1. INTRODUCTION Prior to actual power up and initialization, the key system should be checked over to avoid start up delays or improper loading. A step-by-step check list is provided this purpose. 2. PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. Verify that the DC output power cord from the power supply is plugged into the DC connector on the KSU. B. Ensure that the KSU is properly grounded according to instructions provided in Section C. The DC/DC converter must be installed in the KSU and firmly seated in its card connector position. The ON/OFF switch should be in the OFF position. The circuit breaker switch should be in the ON position. are firmly plugged into their D. Verify that all correct color coded card slot positions. This can be done by comparing the color of the KTU ejector tabs with the colored labels on the KSU shelves. E. Check the Service switches on the associated The switches should be in the NORMAL position. F. Inspect the MDF for shorted wiring and improper polarity that would affect the key telephone or DSS consoles. G. All switches on the CPB should be ON so that default data can be loaded into memory when the system is powered up. Check the remaining switches to confirm the settings (Sec. Make certain that the lithium battery Is connected to the battery (+) terminal. H. Make sure that plug-ended MDF cables connected to the KSU are secure and are plugged into the correct position.
801-l
3. POWER UP SEQUENCE
The power up sequence involves the proper application of AC power to the system, monitoring DC/DC converter and observing on the CPB A successful power up is assured if the installation check-list has been followed. When system power is applied, default data is loaded into memory.
D. Press the reset button on the CPB. The CPB has 8 red located on the front of the card. Upon a successful power up, 1 and 2 will flicker and then go off. LED 8 will remain lit. If LED 1 only is lit, this indicates a ROM failure. If LED 1 and 2 only are lit, this means a RAM failure. F. Check for and + operation on the DC/DC converter and adjust if necessary. A digital read-out meter is required to adjust the 5 volts. Turn switch 8 on the CPB off to protect
The 8 white DIP switches on the front of the CPB should all be in the ON position.
A. Plug the AC power cord of the power supply into the dedicated 117 VAC outlet. The LED on the power should light. B. Turn the power switch on the DC/DC converter ON. C. The 2 red on the DC/DC converter should light immediately.
accidental loading of default data in case of power outage.

G. The system is ready for programming. If any problems have See Section occurred, see operation tests in section or Troubleshooting in Section
SWITCHES
INTERNAL WIRING TO
FIGURE 2. DC/DC CONVERTER
FIGURE 3. CPB
801-2
TABLE 1. POWER SUPPLY TESTS DC/DC CONVERTER I
Voltage Designation VDC VDC VDC
Voltage Reading
Test Point Location Front of DC/DC Converter Front of DC/DC Converter Front of DC/DC Converter
Remarks Adjustable on front cover of DC/DC Converter
5%
If 24V is below 22V or above check AC No adjustments.
POWER SUPPLY 117VAC + 24 VDC 5% Commercial power source DC output terminals with access cover removed.
If 24V is below 22V or above check AC No adjustments.
The Converter is at the time of manufacturing, but should be checked at system initialization with a digital volt meter having an accuracy off 1%
KEY
ENCORE CX 818 SERVICE INFORMATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION 1. INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE ....................,.......
2. TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. FAULT CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. SYSTEM FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. KEY TELEPHONE FAILURES, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. LINE FAILURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 1
900-A
ISSUE 2, SEPTEMBER 1988
1. INTRODUCTION
This section provides common maintenance, troubleshooting and repair instructions for the ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System. It is advisable to use the latest issue manual and supporting documentation whenever possible.
4. SYSTEM
Various problems will affect the entire system. These are normally related to the power supply, causing central processor or memory failure, in which case the KSU must be replaced.
A qualified person should perform all maintenance and field upgrades. 2. TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
The following test equipment and tools are necessary in performing maintenance and repair on the ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System: a. digital voltmeter b. test set (DTMF and rotary) c. standard telephone repair tools
5. KEY TELEPHONE FAILURES

The following questions should be considered when isolating key telephone failures: Is the reported fault: A. Present on 1 phone only? Check the wiring, programming, telephone, KSU. B. Common to station numbers in pairs? Check wiring polarity and KSU. C. Common to all stations? Check programming, wiring and KSU. D. Common to a station that was recently moved or programmed? Check wiring and programming.
3. FAULT CONSIDERATIONS
Reported problems come from a variety of people under different conditions. Therefore, all trouble reports should be examined thoroughly so the exact problem is understood. Do not always suspect the 816 equipment. To help isolate a fault from the reported description, the following information should be investigated: A. Were any changes made recently to the customer data base that could cause the problem? Were any changes made to cabling recently? C. Is the trouble associated with one circuit? With a particular section or sections of circuits (i.e. CO lines, stations) or common to all circuits? D. Is the trouble intenittent or continuous?
6.
LINE FAILURES
Is the reported fault: A. Present on 1 line only? Check the affected CO line,
plug
connections. B. Common to 2 or more lines? Check CO lines, wiring, KSU. C. Associated with key station? Check programming, phone, KSU. D. Associated signalling or incoming ring? Check programming and KSU.
ISSUE 2. SEPTEMBER 1988

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE DESCRIPTION 1. CENTRAL PROCESSOR BOARD (CPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DC/DC CONVERTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. KEY INTERFACE BOARD ........................................... 3
4. OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE BOARD (KIBOH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5. CENTRAL OFFICE INTERFACE BOARD (COB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. SINGLE LINE INTERFACE BOARD (SIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. SINGLE LINE RING GENERATOR AND MESSAGE WAIT POWER SUPPLY (RGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8. APPLICATION BOARD (APL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
RECEIVER/SENDER MODULE (RSM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 10. MODULE (SDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMERGENCY TRANSFER MODULE (BTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1. CENTRAL PROCESSOR BOARD
CONTROL 1. Central Processor Unit (CPU) to control system operation. 2. Read Only Memory (ROM) with factory set 3. Random Access Memory (RAM) protected by a lithium battery. 4. Hard Restart switch for manual system restart. 5. Provides RS232 port for SMDR. Contains 8 process running indicators which indicate various conditions of the system. LED Dependability/ Recovery, flickers on/off in normal operation. LED 2 Ringing, will fbsh steady when ring scan is functioning. Timers, will flicker when timers are operating. Monitor LCD No soft restart. processing. Administration Idle the system stops and LED1 ROM type Allows soft restart. Switch 5 OPTIONS Switch 1 Protects contents of data base. Allows update of the data base from station 100. Switch 2 For equipped to send CTS signal. Is terminal FAULT CONDITIONS 1. Complete system failure. 2. Erroneouscalf processing. 3. Inoperative features in system operation. 4. Partial failures in system operation. 5. Continual. system restarts. 6. Failure of SMDR. 7. Loss of unique customer data base programming.
Color
WOW
Code:
Switch 3 ON Allows trace output. OFF No trace output. Switch 4
Switch 6
RAM failure.
901-l
SECTION 90
ENCORE
3672 SERVICE INFORMATION
1. CENTRAL PROCESSOR BOARD (CPB) (CONTD)

FUNCTION
CONTROL
OPTIONS Switch 7 SMDR goes to
FAULT CONDITIONS
SMDR goes to first port. Switch 8 win not initialize. be
2. DC/DC CONVERTER
DC/DC Converter 4v
1. Receives 24 from 2. volume. 3. Has ON/OFF switch. 2. Loss of
Provides LED indiitions it voltages Provides BGM 1 connections.

DC/DC Converter with
1. failure.
3. KEY INTERFACE BOARD (KIB)

FUNCTION Rovides interface for 8 key CONTROL Busy state LED that monitors for busy condifon. Service switch with mode. I OPTIONS FAULT 1. Unable to receive intercom dial tone. 2. Poor transmission characteristics. 3. Key Set inoperative. 4. Key telephone to invoke features. 5. No LED indications.
Color Code: Green
4. OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE BOARD (KIBOH)

Provides interface for 8 key telephones and provides the off-hook voice feature for those telephones. Busy state LED that monitors circuits for busy condition. Normal/Service switch. None 1. Key telephone set inoperative. 2. Poor transmission characteristics. 3. Loss of Off-Hook voice announce.
5. CENTRAL OFFICE INTERFACE BOARD (COB)

Color Code: White Provides interface for 8 lines. Busy state ED that monitors each line for ringing, busy and idle conditions. Service switch with mode. None 1 . Unable to receive CO tone. 2. Unable to break CO tone. 3. CO not ringing. 4.
6. SINGLE LINE INTERFACE BOARD (SIB)

Color Code: Green Provides interface for 8 Contains the intercom paths. with MW 1. SLT cant receive dii tone. 2. Poor transmission characteristics.
7.
KTU
LINE RING GENERATOR AND

FUNCTION Externally mounted unit that provides 90 VAC 20 Hz ring supply to support Also provides voltage to light lights when cards SIB are used.
POWER SUPPLY (RGU)

CONTROL OPTIONS FAULT CONDITIONS 1. wont ring. 2. M/W light will not function properly on all
RGU Single Line Ring Generator and Power
8. APPLICATION BOARD (APL)

APL Application Board Color Code: Red Provides 2 DTMF receivers and 2 DTMF senders for and DISA. Matrix and control circuitry for conference, 2 external page zones and supports RSM module and additional module. RSM Module. Module. circuit does not work. 2. Loss of external 3. SLT cannot receive intercom dial tone. 1.
9. RECEIVER/SENDER MODULE
RSM Single Line. Module Added to APL Used to expand the DTMF receivers and senders in system to
10.
MODULE
2nd port to system. 2. ON= 1200 baud rate 3. rate 4 . ON= 9600 baud rate 1. Loss of SMDR data.
Module Added to APL
11. EMERGENCY TRANSFER MODULE (ETU)

FUNCTION ETU Emergency Transfer Module. Provides relay transfer circuits for up to 6 CO lines in the event of a power or processor failure. Facilitates loud bell ringing. CONTROL OPTIONS Manual switch used for activating the for testing purposes. FAULT CONDITIONS 1. Power failure transfer does not function. 2. Loud bells do not ring.
12. ENHANCED PROCESSOR BOARD (EPB)

Refer to Central Processor Board (CPB), paragraph 1.
901-S
ENCORE
TECHNICAL MANUAL ISSUE 2. NOVEMBER
RECORD OF CHANGES
This Record of Changes page is used to keep you up-to-date with changes and variations in ENCORE CX Key Telephone System are issued, list them on this equipment. As Technical Facts pertaining to the ENCORE Record of Changes page and follow the instructions given in the Technical Facts. The combination of Technical Facts and Record of Changes will provide you with a changes made to the ENCORE CX Key Telephone System. To insure that you are using the most current instructions when installing or Record of Changes page and study all pertinent Technical Facts. of all
equipment, check the
LEGEND:
1. Information previously contained in this Technical Facts has been integrated into the body of thii section this manual. Therefore, this Technical Facts is not contained in the Technical manual. The entire Technical Facts has been inducted in the Technical Facts section of this manual. Information previously attached to this Technical Facts has been integrated the body of this manual. The header sheet is not contained in the Technical this manual. The Technical Facts is listed on the Record of Changes However, Facts is not induded in the Facts section of this manuai.
DATE cx 3872 TF1818 TF1818 TF1819 TF1822 12-23-87 CX 2872
DESCRIPTION 3672 Software Release ENCORE Program 2872 SIB Power Is On Release 2.04
Cost Routing (LCR) Package TF1828 TF1827 TF1828 Of-1548 07-l 8-88 for the ENCORE for ENCORE CX 818 Upgrade System CX 3872
TECHNICAL FACT
DATE 11-14-88 12-12-88 an V Program Module III Information

System Attendant Technical ENH
New Boards for the ENCORE CX

Revised Information for the ENCORE
TF 1655
1 O-89 01-10-90
Feature Package VI and Program Module

Encore CX 816 3672 36112

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Encore CX 816 3672 36112

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

816,3672 AND 36112

KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM

ENCORE" CX 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM

No. 1608 October 2, 1987 For Distributors Only

ENCORE' CX 3672 SOFTWARE RELEASE

call. 4. Reset Lockup of KIB or COB Ports

Of Service" mode after a

How To Obtain Version

2. Upon receiving the new PROM sets, (2994401) cards.

ENCORE CX 3672 SOFTWARE RELEASE

to all attendants simultaneously.

Not Disturb Warning Tone

ENCORE'" CX 3672 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEM

E N C O R E ' " C X K E Y TELEPHONE SYSTEM

N o . 1621 January 29, 1988 For All Oistributors

Alan Penick Product Line Manager

John Henderson Product Line Manager

re installed quickly and old PROM sets are returned immediately.

How To Obtain Version

CX 816 KEY For All

No. May 3, 1988 Distributors

Refer t o 3672 Technical Manual, Form

ENCCRE CX 3672 KEY

No. 1626 2 0 , 1988 Distributors

operations and corrects problems in software.

Form 2993101 Issue C. Also list it t h e R e c o r d of C h a n g e s p a g e .

the end user; It is not a

occurs to indicate the A then presses while

Be&use the a. Call Forward:

we offer the following reminder: and cancellation by pressing the the

DISA call is not

OFF position. This

an. then check for system

tube and secure.

36112 KEY TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

No. 163OA December All EXECUTONE Distributors

NEW BOARDS FOR THE ENCORE CX

NOTE: This Technical Facts replaces TF 7630, issued Page 1 of4

Example 2. Station Connecting Block

2. AMPLIFIED CENTRAL OFFICE BOARD (COB-A, 2993705)

Example 3. Jumper Straps

on COB-A for Setting Gain/No Gain

(Sat for no Gain)

0 Gain Off Gain Off

Gain On Gain On On Gain On On

No. 1635 S e p t e m b e r 16, 1 9 8 8 Distributors

FAX call toll free l-800-458-4799.

should be sent to:

E X E C U T O N E Information Systems, Inc.

Customer Service/Inside Sales

ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System

No. 1637 October 14, 1988 For All EXECUTONE Distributors

How To Return PM-1 (2993601) and PM-2 (2993602) For Rework

Installing Updated Modules at Customer Sites

Technical Manual for initialization and programming. John Henderson,

Manual, Form 2993101 A,

list it on your Record Of Changes page.

ENCORE CX 816 Key Telephone System

No. 1637 October 14, 1988 For All EXECUTONE Distributors

How To Return PM-1 (2993601) and PM-2 (2993602) For Rework

Installing Updated Modules at Customer Sites 1.

GROUP (Feature Package 5

Connect the AC power cord to the AC receptacle.

Receptionist and plug the cord into an